Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected].

uk, Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled C

A single copy of this document is licensed to

[email protected]

On

13/02/2013

This is an uncontrolled copy. Ensure use of the

most current version of the document by searching
the Construction Information Service.
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Part 6
Superstructure (excluding roofs)

6.1 External masonry walls

6.2 External timber framed walls

6.3 Internal walls

6.4 Timber and concrete upper floors

6.5 Steelwork

6.6 Staircases

6.7 Doors, windows and glazing

6.8 Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

6.9 Curtain walling and cladding

6.10 Light steel framed walls and floors

Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

Part 6 Superstructure (excluding roofs)

Chapter 6.1
 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

CONTENTS

DESIGN Clause Page APPENDIX 6.1-A

Design standards D1 1 Suitable wall constructions 16
Statutory requirements D2 1 APPENDIX 6.1-B
Structural design D3 1 Areas of severe exposure to frost attack 18
Exposure D4 2 APPENDIX 6.1-C
Mortar D5 3 Mortar mixes 20
Damp-proof courses and cavity trays D6 3 APPENDIX 6.1-D
Wall ties D7 4 Dpcs and cavity trays 21
Stone masonry D8 4 APPENDIX 6.1-E
Lintels D9 4 Durability classification of bricks 22
Thermal insulation D10-D11 5 APPENDIX 6.1-F
Fire safety D12 5 Protection of ancilliary components 22
Sound insulation D13 5
Claddings D14 5 INDEX 22
Rendering D15 5
Provision of information D16-D17 6
Scope
MATERIALS
Materials standards M1 7
This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
Bricks M2 7 Requirements and recommendations for external masonry
Blocks M3 7 walls.
Stone masonry M4 8
Mortar and rendering M5 8
Dpc materials M6 8
Wall ties M7 8
Lintels M8 8
6.1

Thermal insulation M9 8
Cladding materials M10 8
Movement joints M11 9

SITEWORK
Sitework standards S1 9
Construction S2 9
Stone masonry S3 11
Damp-proof courses and cavity trays S4 11
Wall ties S5 12
Lintels S6 13
Thermal insulation S7 14
Rendering S8 14
Cold weather working S9 15
Handling and protection S10 15
 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

(d) point loads The spacing of the first movement joint

DESIGN STANDARDS Padstones and spreaders may be from a return should not be more than half
necessary and, where required, should be of the above dimension.
6.1 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical located beneath areas of concentrated
Requirements When different materials are used
loads.
together, consideration should be given to
Design that follows the guidance below will
(e) chases potential differential movement. Wall ties
be acceptable for external masonry walls.
The position and depth of chases for are needed on either side of movement
services should be considered. Horizontal joints (reference should be made to Clause
STATUTORY chases should be limited to one-sixth the D7 and Sitework clause 6.1 - S5).
REQUIREMENTS thickness of a single leaf, and vertical
Movement joints should run the full height
chases to one-third the thickness of a
6.1 - D2 Design shall comply with all of the masonry wall. Any movement
single leaf.
relevant statutory requirements joints provided in the substructure must
Particular care is needed where hollow be carried up into the superstructure.
Design should be in accordance with
blocks are specified. Hollow blocks Movement joints may be needed in the
relevant Building Regulations and other
should not be chased, unless specifically superstructure where none are required
statutory requirements.
permitted by the manufacturer. in the substructure - however suitable
allowance should be made for relative
STRUCTURAL DESIGN (f) bonding movement.
When partition walls abut the external
6.1 - D3 External cavity and solid Where masonry walls form panels in a
wall and are of similar materials, they may
walls shall be designed to support and framed structure, movement joints should
be either fully bonded or tied together.
transfer loads to foundations safely and be provided in accordance with BS EN
Where materials have dissimilar shrinkage
without undue movement 1996-2.
or expansion characteristics, eg dense
Items to be taken into account include: concrete and aerated concrete, a tied joint Details of suitable materials to form
(a) standards is preferable as this will reduce the risk of movement joints are given in the Materials
Structural design should be in accordance random cracking. section of this chapter.
with BS EN 1996-1-1.
In the case of a connection between a Where movement joints are provided to
Intermediate floors and roofs should be loadbearing wall on foundations and a control shrinkage in concrete blockwork,
designed to provide lateral restraint to non-loadbearing wall supported on a they may be simple vertical joints filled
external walls, in accordance with BS 8103 ground bearing slab, it is preferable to tie, with mortar and sealed.
and ancillary components to BS EN 845-1. not bond, the walls. This will reduce the
risk of cracking due to differential vertical To ensure the sealant is effective, there
Walls of dwellings or buildings containing movement. should be a good bond with the masonry.
dwellings over three storeys high should The sealant should be at least 10mm deep
be designed in accordance with Technical Tied joints should be formed using or in accordance with manufacturers’
Requirement R5. expanded metal, wire wall ties or a instructions.

6.1
proprietary equivalent, at maximum
(b) lateral restraint provided by concrete 300mm intervals. Movement joints are not normally
floors necessary to the inner leaf of cavity walls
Concrete floors, with a minimum 90mm (g) movement joints but consideration should be given to
bearing onto the wall, provide adequate Movement joints should be provided, providing:
restraint. where necessary, and in such a way that • movement joints in rooms with straight
stability is maintained. If no provision unbroken lengths of wall over 6m. This is
Concrete floors running parallel to and is made for both initial and long term unnecessary for fired clay bricks
not built into walls require restraint straps movements, masonry walls may crack. • bed joint reinforcement as an alternative
to provide restraint to the wall (reference to movement joints in areas of risk, eg
should also be made to Chapter 6.4 Vertical movement joints should be
under window openings.
‘Timber and concrete upper floors’ (each provided in the outer leaf to minimise the
section)). risk of major cracking, as shown in the To reduce cracking and to maintain the
following table: level of thermal resistance:
(c) lateral restraint provided by timber • bricks and blocks, or blocks of different
floors Material Joint Normal spacing densities, in a wall should not be mixed
Timber joisted floors can provide adequate width • a joint should be formed where
restraint when joists are carried by (mm) dissimilar materials abut
ordinary hangers to BS EN 845 and Clay brick 16 12m (15m maximum) • the joint should be tied (eg with
connected to the wall with restraint straps. expanded metal in the bed joint) unless
Calcium 10 7.5 to 9m
In buildings of not more than two storeys, silicate the joint is to act as a movement joint.
timber joisted floors can provide adequate brick
Where cracking is likely, walls should be
restraint without strapping when: Concrete 10 6m dry lined or clad (reference should also be
• the minimum bearing onto masonry block and made to Sitework clause 6.1 - S2(g)).
is 90mm (or 75mm onto a timber wall brick
plate), or Any 10 half the above (h) calcium silicate brickwork
• joists are carried by restraint type masonry in spacings and 1.5m Design of calcium silicate brickwork
hangers, as described in BS EN 845-1 a parapet from corners (double should follow the the brick manufacturer’s
with performance equivalent to a wall the frequency) recommendations.
restraint strap at not more than 2m
centres. (i) cladding to framed structures
Allowance should be made for differential
movement between cladding and frame.

2013 Chapter 6.1 Page 1

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

The following precautions should be taken • below dpc where there is a high risk of In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of
to prevent buckling and fracturing of saturation Man and in other places where the
masonry panels: • retaining walls exposure to driving rain is Very Severe,
• flexible movement joints should be • parapets masonry should form a rebate at the
provided at the underside of each • freestanding walls reveals of openings to avoid a straight
horizontal support member • rendered walls through joint where the frame abuts the
• the masonry outer leaf should have at • areas of Severe or Very Severe exposure masonry.
least two-thirds of its width supported to driving rain. Minimum 12mm overlap of
masonry (or render) to frame
securely by the concrete frame or a
Reclaimed bricks should be used only in
metal angle sealant ‘rebated‘ or
accordance with Technical Requirement R3. ‘check‘ reveal
• the inner leaf should be adequately tied 25mm
in areas of Very
severe exposure
to the structural frame. Forked plate (b) rain penetration
ties held in dovetail slots, cast into the Rainwater will penetrate the outer leaf of
sealant

column or an equivalent are acceptable a masonry wall in prolonged periods of

• vertical movement joints should be driving rain. Resistance to rain penetration
provided at corners. of masonry walls can be improved by Proprietary cavity closers may be an
cladding the wall. Total resistance can only acceptable alternative provided they have
For timber framed construction, reference
be achieved with an impervious cladding. been assessed in accordance with
should be made to Chapter 6.2 ‘External
Technical Requirement R3. For information
timber framed walls’ (Design). The following should be taken into account on doors and windows, reference should be
to minimise the risk of rain penetration: made to Chapter 6.7 ‘Doors, windows and
(j) corbelling
• determination of the exposure to wind glazing’ (each section).
The size of corbels should not exceed the
driven rain
dimensions given in Sitework clause In Scotland and areas of Severe or Very
• a suitable wall construction and
6.1 - S2(j). Severe exposure to driving rain, cavities
insulation method
• design detailing for the local exposure, should be continuous around enclosed
EXPOSURE taking into account the likely quality of porches and habitable areas.
6.1 - D4 External walls shall be suitable workmanship on site. Cavity trays should be used at junctions
for their exposure and resist the A very high standard of workmanship with roof (reference should also be made
passage of moisture to the inside of the is required to ensure that cavities are to Clause D6).
dwelling not bridged. Where full or partial cavity Sills, copings and the like should be
In this Chapter, reference is made to insulation is proposed, the installation weathered and throated unless adequate
exposure to: should follow the recommendations of any alternative provision is made to protect the
• wind driven rain assessment and the manufacturer. brickwork from saturation, frost damage
• frost attack. and staining.
The most exposed part of the building
Details of how these are defined are should be given particular attention when
(c) frost attack
6.1

contained in Appendices 6.1-A and 6.1-B. selecting a suitable construction method

The main factors affecting frost attack are:
as this may affect the choice for the whole
Items to be taken into account include: • degree of exposure (incidence of frost)
building.
(a) general aspects affecting durability • saturation of the masonry
Masonry in the following locations is The following aspects of design can reduce • frost resistance of the masonry
particularly likely to become saturated and the risk of rain penetration: • localised protection of the masonry
may remain so for long periods. Precautions • providing cladding (other than render) by roof overhangs, trees and other
as necessary should be taken to resist frost to the wall. Even if cladding is only buildings.
damage and sulfate attack in: added to gable walls and upper floors, it
Areas of severe frost exposure are shown
• parapet walls and copings reduces rain penetration
on the map in Appendix 6.1-B.
• sills and projections • increasing the clear cavity width or the
• masonry below dpc at ground level width of full cavity insulation. Increasing In areas of exceptionally severe frost
• freestanding walls. the cavity width for full cavity insulation exposure, which is defined as a location
from 50mm to 75mm or more greatly which is in a severe frost exposure area
The selection of bricks and mortar should reduces the risk of rain passing through and, in addition, faces long stretches of
follow the recommendations given the cavity. A nominal cavity of 50mm is open countryside, only frost-resistant
in BS EN 1996-1-1 and manufacturers’ always required on the outside of partial bricks (F2,S2 or F2,S1 to BS EN 771) are
recommendations. cavity insulation acceptable for the superstructure.
• rendering the wall (reference should also
In addition to the mortar designations In areas of severe frost exposure, the
be made to Clause D15). Specify backing
given in BS EN 1996-1-1, the following following are acceptable:
material carefully to avoid cracking
mortar mixes can be used with ordinary • clay facing bricks which are frost-
which can reduce the effectiveness of
Portland cement or sulfate-resisting resistant (F2,S2 or F2,S1 to BS EN 771).
render against rain penetration
cement: Reference should be made to Appendix
• designing protective features to keep
• air-entrained 1 : 1 : 5½ cement : lime : 6.1-E for the freeze/thaw resistance
sand, or
the wall dry, eg projecting sills and deep
overhanging eaves and verges classification of bricks to BS EN 771
• air-entrained 1 :½ : 4½ cement : lime : • clay bricks which are classified
• mortar joints. All joints should be fully
sand. in manufacturers’ published
filled. Where full cavity insulation is
Sulfate-resisting cement should be used proposed, recessed joints should not be recommendations as satisfactory for the
where clay bricks with S1 designation are used. Reference should also be made to exposure
used as follows: Clause D5(c). • calcium silicate bricks (in accordance
In areas of Very Severe exposure to driving with BS EN 771)
• below dpc where there are sulfates • concrete bricks with a strength not less
rain and in Scotland the cavity should not
present in the ground than 20N/mm2
contain full fill insulation.

Page 2 Chapter 6.1 2013

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

• concrete blocks with a density not less bricks without the brick manufacturer’s (d) admixtures and additives
than 1500kg/m3 or of strength not less written agreement. Calcium chloride should not be used as
than 7.3N/mm2 an admixture to mortar. The contents of
• most types of aerated concrete blocks MORTAR admixtures should be checked to ensure
with render. that they do not contain calcium chloride.
6.1 - D5 Mortar shall be of the mix
In Scotland, all clay bricks used as facings proportions necessary to achieve Admixtures should only be used in
should be frost-resistant (F2,S2 or F2,S1 to adequate strength and durability and be accordance with manufacturers’
BS EN 771). suitable for the type of masonry recommendations/instructions.
If there are doubts about the suitability Items to be taken into account include: Mortars containing an air-entraining
of a facing brick for sites in areas of plasticiser are more resistant to freeze/
exceptionally severe frost exposure (a) geographical location and position thaw damage when set.
classification, written confirmation should within the structure
Recommended mortar mixes for different White cement to BS EN 197 and pigments
be obtained from the brick manufacturer
locations are given in Appendix 6.1-C. to BS 1014 may be used, but pigments
that the brick is suitable for:
should not exceed 10% of the cement
• its geographical location, and
(b) sources of sulfate weight or 3% if carbon black is used.
• its location in the structure.
Ordinary Portland cement mortar can
Further advice concerning admixtures is
This applies particularly to bricks such expand, crumble and deteriorate badly
given in Appendix 6.1-C.
as fletton facings which are moderately if attacked by sulfates. Sufficient soluble
freeze/thaw resistant (F1,S2 or F1,S1). sulfate to cause this problem may be
In addition, follow manufacturers’ contained in clay bricks. Clay bricks with DAMP-PROOF COURSES
recommendations on suitability, including an S1 designation have no limit on their AND CAVITY TRAYS
the choice and use of mortar and the type sulfate content. The problem is most acute
of pointing. when brickwork is saturated for long 6.1 - D6 Damp-proof courses and related
periods; mortar is vulnerable to attack by components shall be provided to prevent
Recessed joints should only be used in moisture rising or entering the building
any soluble sulfates present.
compliance with Clause D5(c).
To reduce the risk, sulfate-resisting Items to be taken into account include:
Bricks that are not frost-resistant (F0,S2 or
Portland cement to BS 4027 should be (a) dpcs
F0,S1 to BS EN 771) may not be acceptable
used: Damp-proof courses should be provided
for use externally, unless completely
• below dpc level when sulfates are in accordance with the Table in Appendix
protected by a cladding which can
present in the ground 6.1-D.
adequately resist the passage of water.
• when clay bricks (F2,S1 and F1,S1 to BS
Good brickwork detailing can limit EN 771) are used, and there is a high At complicated junctions, clear drawings
persistent wetting of brickwork and reduce saturation risk, for example in the should be provided and preformed
the risk of frost attack. following situations: profiles specified. Isometric drawings
-- parapets can sometimes be clearer than the

6.1
For example: -- chimney stacks combination of plan and section/elevation
• paths should drain away from walls to -- retaining walls drawings.
avoid saturating bricks near the ground -- freestanding walls
• sills, copings and the like should have a -- rendered walls (b) cavity trays
weathered upper surface -- areas of Severe or Very Severe Cavity trays should be provided at all
• a coping should be provided for exposure to driving rain. interruptions to the cavity, eg window
all parapet walls, chimneys and and door openings, air bricks, etc, unless
freestanding walls unless clay bricks of (c) joints otherwise protected, eg by overhanging
F2,S1 or F2,S2 classification to BS EN Struck (or weathered) and bucket handle eaves.
771 have been used. Copings should joints are preferable.
A cavity tray should:
have a generous overhang, throatings
Recessed joints should not be used where: • provide an impervious barrier and
at least 40mm clear of the wall and a
• bricks are perforated nearer than 15mm ensure that water drains outwards
continuous, supported dpc underneath
to the face • project at least 25mm beyond the outer
which projects beyond the line of the
• bricks are not frost resistant (if clay F1,S1 face of the cavity closure or, where
wall. Single leaf parapet walls should not
or F1,S2 to BS EN 771), unless the brick a combined cavity tray and lintel is
be rendered on both sides.
manufacturer has agreed in writing for acceptable, give complete protection to
Where there is a risk that brickwork may their use in a particular location the top of the reveal and vertical dpc
be persistently wet, bricks should be • there is no reasonable shelter from where provided
specified that are low in soluble salts (if driving rain (reasonable shelter could • provide drip protection to door and
clay, F2,S2 or F1,S2 to BS EN 771). be from buildings or groups of trees window heads
if these are within 50m and of similar • have an overall minimum upstand from
Note height to the dwelling) the inside face of the outer leaf to the
Only clay bricks designated L by BS EN • the dwelling is built on steep sloping outside of the inner leaf of 140mm
771 have a low limit on their soluble salt ground, facing open countryside or • be shaped to provide at least a 100mm
content. In persistently wet conditions, clay within 8km of a coast or large estuary vertical protection above a point where
bricks of S1 designation may create sulfate • the cavity is to be fully filled with cavity mortar droppings could collect.
attack on the mortar. insulation.
Painted or decorated finishes can trap Jointing is preferable to pointing because
moisture in external brickwork and it leaves the mortar undisturbed.
increase the risk of frost damage, sulfate
attack or other detrimental effects. They
should not be applied to S1 designation

2013 Chapter 6.1 Page 3

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

throating Minimum bearing length (mm)

clear of
brickwork Span (m) Simple Lintel combined
lintel with cavity tray
dpc supported Up to 1.2 100 150
at least at least over cavity
140mm 100mm Over 1.2 150 150

To avoid overstressing, composite lintels

open perpend
weep holes at
should have the required depth of fully
maximum 1m
spacing at least bedded brickwork stipulated by the
150mm
shape of an
effective
manufacturer above the lintel, before
cavity tray point loads are applied. Where necessary,
padstones and spreaders should be
In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of provided under the bearings of lintels.
Man and areas of Very Severe exposure to Reference should be made to Chapter
driving rain, the upstand part of the damp- 6.5 ‘Steelwork support to upper floors
proof protection should be returned into and partitions’ (Design) for details of
(e) materials padstones.
the inner leaf of masonry except at sloping
Materials that are suitable for use as dpcs
abutments. In all other areas, the upstand (b) adequate durability against corrosion
are given in Materials clause 6.1 - M6.
should be returned into the inner leaf and resistance to water entering the
unless it is stiff enough to stand against
the inner leaf without support. WALL TIES dwelling
Cavity tray/damp-proof protection should
Where fairfaced masonry is supported by 6.1 - D7 Wall ties shall be provided, be provided over all openings, either as a
lintels: where required, to tie together the combined part of the lintel or separately.
• weep holes should be provided at leaves of cavity walls Reference should be made to Clause D6(b).
450mm (maximum) centres with at least The spacing of wall ties in masonry walls Steel and concrete lintels should comply
two weep holes per opening should be in accordance with Sitework with BS EN 845-2.
• cavity trays or combined lintels should clause 6.1 - S5.
have stop ends. Separate cavity tray protection should be
Details of suitable wall ties are given in the provided when:
Where full fill insulation is placed in the Materials section of this Chapter. • the profile of the lintel is not as shown in
cavity, a cavity tray should be used above
Clause D6(b), or
the highest insulation level, unless the STONE MASONRY • steel lintels have materials coatings
insulation is taken to the top of the wall.
references L11, L14 and L16.1 and are
(Manufacturers’ recommendations should 6.1 - D8 Elements constructed of
used in external walls
be followed.) natural or cast stone masonry shall
comply with the performance standards Lintels used in aggressive environments
6.1

(c) abutment details for brick and block masonry, where (e.g. coastal sites) should be austenitic
Cavity trays should be provided at applicable stainless steel.
abutments of roofs and cavity walls. This
will ensure that any water penetrating into Stone masonry (natural or cast stone) In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of
the cavity does not enter the enclosed should be designed to meet the Man and areas of Severe or Very Severe
area. This only applies where the roof requirements of BS EN 1996 ‘Design of exposure to driving rain, separate damp-
is over an enclosed area, including an masonry structures’. proof protection should be provided over
attached garage, but does not apply to all lintels in accordance with the guidance
open car ports and open porches. LINTELS for cavity trays given in Clause D6(b).

Where the roof abuts at an angle with 6.1 - D9 Lintels shall safely support the Lintels should be of such a size and be
the wall, preformed stepped cavity trays applied loads located so that the external edge of the
should be provided. Items to be taken into account include: lintel projects beyond, and therefore offers
protection to, the window head.
(a) structural support
preformed
stepped Concrete, steel and reinforced brickwork (c) cold bridging and condensation
cavity trays
are acceptable materials for use as lintels. The BRE Report ‘Thermal insulation:
Timber lintels should not be used, unless: avoiding risks’ discusses aspects of
• they are protected from the weather, insulation relevant to external masonry
and walls. In England and Wales account should
• they do not support masonry or other be taken of Accredited Details.
at least
85mm rigid or brittle materials. The risk of condensation at reveals and
Lintels should be designed in accordance soffits becomes more likely as the wall
either with Technical Requirement R5 or insulation increases. Cold bridge paths
manufacturers’ published data. A lintel should be avoided.
should be provided where frames are not To avoid a cold bridge, the wall insulation
designed to support superimposed loads. should ideally abut the head of the window
(d) parapet details
Lintels should be wide enough to provide frame.
Dpcs below the coping should be
supported over the cavity to prevent adequate support to walling above. Clause D4(b) details methods of preventing
sagging. A dpc should be specified that can Masonry should not overhang the lintel rain penetration which may also be
achieve a good key with the mortar. support by more than 25mm. A lintel required.
should extend beyond the opening at each
end by at least the following lengths:

Page 4 Chapter 6.1 2013

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

(d) adequate fire resistance (c) partial cavity insulation SOUND INSULATION
Where steel lintels are used, Partial cavity insulation should be fixed
manufacturers’ recommendations for only against the cavity face of the inner 6.1 - D13 External walls adjacent to
providing adequate fire resistance, leaf. The clear cavity width between partial sound-resisting walls shall be designed
particularly to the lower steel flange, cavity insulation and the outer leaf should to adequately resist flanking sound
should be followed. be at least 50mm nominal. In areas of Very transmission
Severe exposure in England and Wales, a Acceptable levels of sound reduction
THERMAL INSULATION residual cavity of 75mm is required where between dwellings may be achieved by:
the outer leaf is fair faced masonry. • the inner leaf of an external cavity wall
6.1 - D10 External walls shall be
Wall ties should be long enough to allow a having sufficient weight, and
designed to provide the required
50mm embedment in each masonry leaf. • sealing of air paths
standard of thermal insulation
• allowing appropriate spacings between
The insulation value of the wall must meet (d) inner leaf of insulated blockwork openings in external walls.
the requirements of the relevant Building Types of blockwork include:
Regulations. The density of external walls and the
• lightweight aerated concrete
position of openings adjacent to sound-
• lightweight aggregate blocks
Design should avoid cold bridging at resisting walls should be in accordance
• voided blocks with insulation infill
openings and at junctions of external walls with statutory requirements and, where
• blocks faced with insulation material.
with roofs, floors and internal walls. relevant, an assessment which complies
Manufacturers’ recommendations should with Technical Requirement R3.
6.1 - D11 External walls shall be designed be followed and particular note taken of
to ensure the correct use of insulation
materials
the following: CLADDINGS
• a clear 50mm wide cavity should always
be maintained 6.1 - D14 Cladding shall satisfactorily
Items to be taken into account include:
• the blocks should be capable of resist the passage of moisture
(a) acceptable insulation materials
Insulation, or lightweight aerated concrete supporting concentrated loads Items to be taken into account include:
blocks, or blocks with face bonded • the correct type of joist hanger for the (a) battens
insulation, or voided blocks with insulation type and size of block and size of joist Where battens are required, they must be
infill should be used in accordance with: should be used pre-treated with preservative, as described
• an assessment which complies with • long unbroken lengths of blockwork in Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber preservation
Technical Requirement R3, or should be avoided (natural solid timber)’ (each section).
• a British Standard and the relevant Code • precautions should be taken to reduce
of Practice. risk of shrinkage cracking (b) joints
• dry lining should be used where Joints between claddings and adjacent
(b) full cavity insulation shrinkage cracking might be unsightly materials should be detailed to be
In Northern Ireland and the Isle of Man, and to avoid long term pattern staining watertight under the particular exposure
it is not permissible to fill cavities with at mortar joints conditions of the site. Where necessary,

6.1
pumped thermal insulants at the time of • restrictions on chasing for services provision should be made for differential
construction. when using voided blocks should be movement.
noted (reference should be made to
In Scotland, it is not permissible to fill the (c) moisture barriers
Clause D3(e)).
full width of the cavity with any thermal Unless specifically not required for a
insulants at the time of construction. (e) dual insulation proprietary cladding, moisture barriers
Where partial cavity insulation is used should be provided between walls of solid
The type of insulation, its thickness and
in addition to an insulated block inner masonry and any boarding, slating, tiling
the wall construction should be suitable for
leaf (reference should be made to Clause or other similar claddings. The moisture
the exposure of the dwelling in accordance
D11(c)), the whole composite construction barrier may be roofing underfelt or
with Appendix 6.1-A.
should have been assessed in accordance equivalent.
Materials clause 6.1 - M9 sets out the range with Technical Requirement R3.
of acceptable insulation materials and the Vapour barriers such as polyethylene
relevant British Standards. (f) insulated dry linings sheet are not an acceptable moisture
Where an insulated dry lining contains a barrier as they can trap moisture in the
Render on an external leaf of clay bricks combustible insulant, the plasterboard structure.
(F2,S1 or F1,S1 designation bricks to BS EN should be at least 12.5mm thick and
771) in Severe or Very Severe exposures mechanically fixed to the masonry inner For timber framed walls clad with masonry,
is not permitted where the cavity is to be leaf. This is to prevent early collapse of the reference should be made to Chapter 6.2
fully filled with insulation. lining in a fire. ‘External timber framed walls’ for details.

The following design points should be (d) vertical tile or slate cladding
noted: FIRE SAFETY Every tile or slate should be nailed with
• stop ends should be provided to cavity 6.1 - D12 Cavity walls shall adequately two nails. Nails should be aluminium,
trays or combined lintels resist the passage of fire copper or silicon bronze.
• weepholes should be provided at
Cavities should be closed with cavity Bottom edges should be finished with an
450mm (maximum) centres with at least
closers in accordance with statutory under-course and tilting batten.
two per opening
• mortar joints should not be recessed requirements.
(e) timber cladding
• painted finishes on bricks or render are Timber claddings should be pre-treated
not acceptable if they are likely to cause with preservative in accordance with
frost damage or sulfate attack or other Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural
damage. solid timber)’ (each section).

2013 Chapter 6.1 Page 5

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

RENDERING • cement for brickwork mortar is sulfate- Undercoats should be allowed to shrink
resisting to BS 4027 and dry out before applying following
6.1 - D15 Rendering, in conjunction • the brick manufacturer has confirmed, coats. When rendering onto dense
with the surface to which it is applied, in writing, that the brick is suitable, concrete blocks, adhesion can be improved
shall satisfactorily resist the passage of taking account of the brickwork detailing by use of proprietary bonding agents or a
moisture and the particular exposure of each spatterdash coat.
Items to be taken into account include: rendered element. If sulfate-resisting
cement is used in the mortar, it should (g) detailing of timber/brick/render
(a) rain penetration Dwellings which incorporate rendered
also be used in spatterdash coats and
External rendered finishes should comply panels between timber boards should have
base coats of the render.
with BS EN 13914 ‘Design, preparation at least one coat of render applied over
and application of external rendering and Care should be taken when specifying the whole wall face before the boards are
internal plastering’ and the guidance given render to walls with full cavity fill. The lack fixed. The second coat may be applied
below. of a ventilated cavity can slow down the between the boards.
rate at which the wall dries out.
It is important to prevent rainwater Rendering and timber can shrink causing
penetrating behind the rendering. Design Rendered finishes should not be used over gaps. Precautions should be taken to
features around openings and at the head fully filled cavity walls if: prevent rain from penetrating the junction
of the rendering should provide shelter, • the outer leaf is built in bricks with S1 as this might cause the render to fail as a
where possible, and help to shed water designation (F2,S1 and F1,S1 to BS EN result of frost damage.
away from the surface below. 771), and
• the site is in an area classed as Severe All exposed timber, except naturally durable
(b) exposed elements or Very Severe exposure to driving rain species, should be treated in accordance with
It is not advisable to render exposed (see Appendix 6.1-A). Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural
parts of a building, such as parapets and solid timber)’ (each section).
chimneys constructed of clay bricks of S1 Rendering may be used on brickwork
designation, without the use of sulfate- with partial cavity insulation provided a Where timber is used on brick or render,
resisting cement. clear cavity width between insulation and it is essential that all cut ends, mortices,
outer leaf of at least 50mm nominal is etc made after treatment are flood coated
(c) movement maintained. with preservative.
Movements can occur at a change in
Large section timbers should be fitted
material. In such cases, the render should (e) mixes
with suitable weather bars, flashings, etc
be either stopped at specially formed The rendering mix should be appropriate
to prevent moisture penetration through
movement joints or, if the expected to the strength of the background. No
joints with adjacent materials.
movement is small, be reinforced by metal render coat should be stronger than the
lathing carried across the joint. If metal background or richer than the preceding Non-ferrous fixings should be used.
lathing is used, three rendering coats coat. The render should be of adequate Aluminium is not suitable when the
should be applied. strength to achieve durability. preservative is Copper/Chromium/Arsenic.
6.1

(d) background Mixes should comply with the (h) proprietary and local rendering
To achieve a good bond, the masonry recommendations of BS EN 13914 ‘Design, systems
backing should be moderately strong preparation and application of external Proprietary rendering finishes should be
and porous to give some suction and a rendering and internal plastering’. When applied in accordance with manufacturers’
mechanical key. Dense masonry with a rendering on bricks that are F1,S1 or recommendations.
smooth surface should not be rendered. F1,S2 to BS EN 771, the Table to Sitework
clause 6.1 - S8(b) should be followed. The Traditional local rendering should comply
Aerated or lightweight aggregate concrete manufacturer of the background masonry with the above guidance, as appropriate,
blocks can be used, as a background, should be consulted regarding particular and with established local practice.
but more care is needed when selecting requirements for the mix or its application.
a rendering mix and surface treatment.
Strong render mixes should not be used. Pigments complying with the requirements PROVISION OF
Roughcast and dry dash finishes that of BS 1014 may be added to the finishing INFORMATION
require a strong mix are not recommended coat up to a limit of 10% of the cement
6.1 - D16 Designs and specifications
for use on aerated or lightweight weight or 3% in the case of carbon black.
shall be produced in a clearly
aggregate blocks. Block manufacturers’ White Portland cement may be used.
understandable format and include all
recommendations should be followed. relevant information
(f) number and thickness of coats
In Scotland, render should be applied only The number of coats should be chosen For external masonry walls, the drawings
to bricks: with regard to the background and the should show:
• which are keyed, or exposure conditions of the site. • wall layout with all dimensions shown
• where a spatterdash coat has been • position and size of openings
For rendering on masonry cavity walls,
applied before the first render • coursing of the bricks and blocks in
one undercoat and one finishing coat is
undercoat. relation to storey heights and opening
acceptable. On metal lathing or on solid
In other areas, render should be applied wall construction, two undercoats and one positions
only to bricks where either: finishing coat are required. • details at all junctions, indicating
• keyed bricks are used, or position of dpcs and cavity trays.
Initial undercoats should not be less than Isometric sketches are recommended
• the joints are raked out at least 15mm
10mm and not more than 15mm thick. Any for complicated junctions
deep.
further undercoat should be thinner than • position and type of lintels
Render may be applied to bricks (if clay
the preceding coat. Finishing coats should • position of restraint straps
F2,S1 or F1,S1 to BS EN 771) only if the
be generally between 6mm and 10mm • details of cavity closers
following conditions are met:
thick. • details at reveals

Page 6 Chapter 6.1 2013

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

• details of how support is given to other CLAY BRICKS RECLAIMED BRICKS

elements, eg padstones and wall plates BS EN 771 classifies clay bricks according Reclaimed bricks could be unsuitable
• position and detail of movement joints to their freeze/thaw resistance and soluble for external work because of a high salt
• acceptable methods of pointing or salt content (see Appendix 6.1-E). content or a lack of freeze/thaw resistance.
mortar joint finish Their use is permitted only in accordance
Only bricks that are freeze/thaw resistant
• type of insulant to be used with Technical Requirement R3. It is
(F2,S2 or F2,S1 to BS EN 771) should
• type and location of wall ties. advisable to know where they come
be used where there is a high risk of
from, both geographically and within the
6.1 - D17 All relevant information shall prolonged wetting and freezing. Such
previous building. Bricks used internally
be distributed to appropriate personnel areas include:
or fully protected may be unsuitable in
• all external facing work in Scotland
Ensure that design and specification external situations.
• exposed parts including copings, sills
information is issued to site supervisors and parapets and chimneys which have Reclaimed bricks should be considered
and relevant specialist subcontractors and/ no overhang to provide protection. as F1,S1 or F1,S2 to BS EN 771 and used
or suppliers. Reference should be made to Design accordingly. Independent certification of
Where proprietary products are to be clause 6.1 - D4(c) suitability may be required.
used, manufacturers usually have specific • areas of the country subject to
requirements for fixing and/or assembly exceptionally severe freeze/thaw SPECIAL SHAPED BRICKS
of their products. This information should exposure (see map in Appendix 6.1-B). Special shaped bricks should conform to
also be made available for reference BS 4729.
In areas of severe freeze/thaw exposure
on site so that work can be carried out outside Scotland, bricks that are
satisfactorily in accordance with the design moderately freeze/thaw resistant (F1,S1 BLOCKS
and specification. or F1,S2 to BS EN 771) may be used for 6.1 - M3 Concrete blocks shall:
general wall areas, provided they are (a) be capable of supporting intended
MATERIALS STANDARDS classified in manufacturers’ published loads
recommendations as satisfactory for the
Blocks should comply with BS EN 771 and
6.1 - M1 All materials shall: exposure.
be used in accordance with BS EN 1996-2.
(a) meet the Technical Requirements Bricks that are not freeze/thaw resistant
(b) take account of the design In general, 2.9N/mm2 blocks are suitable
(F0,S2 or F0,S1 to BS EN 771) are not
for one and two storey dwellings.
Materials that comply with the design and acceptable for use externally, unless
the guidance below will be acceptable for completely protected by a cladding which For three storey dwellings or dwellings
external masonry walls. can resist satisfactorily the passage of with storey heights over 2.7m, 7.3N/mm2
water. blocks are required for certain parts of the
Materials for external masonry walls structure.
shall comply with all relevant standards, Where brickwork may become saturated,
including those listed below. Where no moderately freeze/thaw resistant bricks Structural design may show that strengths
standard exists, Technical Requirement R3 (F1,S1 or F1,S2 to BS EN 771) are not lower than 7.3N/mm2 are adequate.

6.1
applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the appropriate if there is a risk of vulnerability
to frost. In saturated conditions, sulfate- Other factors may dictate the strength of
Standards and Technical Requirements’).
resisting cement mortar is required for S1 blocks required in certain circumstances,
References to British Standards and Codes designation bricks. eg sulfate-resistance may require blocks of
of Practice include those made under the greater strength.
Construction Products Directive (89/106/ CALCIUM SILICATE BRICKS The maximum loadbearing capacity of the
EEC) and, in particular, appropriate Bricks of compressive strength Class 20 wall should not exceed manufacturers’
European Technical Specifications (to BS EN 771-2) are suitable for most recommendations.
approved by a European Committee for applications. Bricks of strength Class 30
Standardisation (CEN). and declared as freeze/thaw resistant (to (b) have appropriate resistance to
BS EN 771-2) are recommended in areas adverse effects of freeze/thaw and
BRICKS of severe freeze/thaw exposure (see map sulfate attack
in Appendix 6.1-B) or for use where bricks Concrete blocks used in the outer leaf
6.1 - M2 Bricks shall:
may be persistently wet (eg parapets, without protective cladding or render,
(a) be capable of supporting intended chimneys, sills and below dpc). should:
loads
Calcium silicate bricks do not contain • have a compressive strength exceeding
Requirements for the design strength of
significant amounts of soluble sulfates 7.3N/mm2, or
bricks are given in BS EN 1996-1-1. The
and may be suitable where sulfate bearing • have a density exceeding 1500kg/m3, or
brick specified in the design should be
soil and ground water conditions exist. • be made with dense aggregate to BS EN
used. Clay bricks to BS EN 771 with a
Manufacturers’ recommendations should 12620, or
minimum compressive strength of 9N/mm2
be followed. • be lightweight aerated concrete blocks
should be adequate for one and two storey
dwellings and 13N/mm2 for three storey having had their suitability confirmed by
CONCRETE BRICKS the manufacturer.
dwellings.
In concrete bricks there is a direct
relationship between strength and Concrete blocks should not be used below
(b) have appropriate resistance to the
durability, including freeze/thaw resistance. dpc where there are sulfates in the ground,
adverse effects of freeze/thaw and
Most concrete bricks in production have unless suitability is confirmed by the block
sulfate attack
a strength of 20N/mm2 and are durable manufacturer. Sulfates may attack the
in most situations. For copings and sills, cement used in the block. Sulfate-resisting
bricks with a compressive strength of 36N/ cement will be required in the mortar. The
mm2 should be used. proportions will depend on the level of
sulfates in the ground.

2013 Chapter 6.1 Page 7

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

(c) have an adequate thermal resistance, DPC MATERIALS Lintels up to 1.2m length which do not
where required need a separate dpc tray should have a
The designer may have specified a 6.1 - M6 Materials for damp-proofing minimum 100mm end bearing and project
particular type and thickness of concrete shall resist adequately the passage of beyond the cavity closer by at least 25mm.
block because of its thermal insulation moisture Normally, other lintels should be long
performance in addition to its strength. Items to be taken into account include: enough to have a minimum 150mm end
Alternative concrete blocks should not be bearing each side of the opening.
(a) dpcs
used without the designer’s acceptance. The following materials are acceptable for Cavity trays may be required over the
use as dpcs: lintels. This should be specified in the
STONE MASONRY • bitumen to BS 6398 design. Reference should be made to
6.1 - M4 Stone masonry shall be capable • polyethylene to BS 6515 (except below Design clause 6.1 - D9(b).
of supporting the intended loads and copings and in parapets)
• proprietary materials assessed in
have appropriate resistance to the
accordance with Technical Requirement
THERMAL INSULATION
adverse effects of freeze/thaw
R3. 6.1 - M9 Insulation materials shall
Stone for masonry should conform to the Dpcs and flexible cavity trays should be of provide the degree of insulation to
requirements of BS EN 771-6. the correct dimensions to suit the detailed comply with the design
design. All retro-fill insulation materials (UF
Cast stone masonry units should comply
with BS EN 771-5 or BS 1217 as appropriate. For complicated junctions, preformed foam, blown mineral fibre and expanded
cavity trays are recommended. Care should polystyrene beads) should be installed by
MORTAR AND RENDERING be taken to order the correct type and installers trained by the assessment holder
shape. and approved jointly by the assessment
6.1 - M5 Mortar and rendering materials holder and the assessing organisation.
shall be of the mix proportions to (b) flashings
achieve adequate strength and durability The following are acceptable as flashings: The installer should be a member of a
to comply with the design • rolled lead sheet (at least Code 4) surveillance scheme acceptable to NHBC.

Items to be taken into account include: complying with BS EN 12588 Insulation materials should be installed in
• aluminium and aluminium alloys accordance with the following:
(a) cement and lime
complying with BS 1470 (0.6mm to • UF foam to BS 5617 installed in
Ordinary Portland cement should be to BS
0.9mm thick) accordance with BS 5618
EN 197. Sulfate-resisting Portland cement
• zinc alloy complying with BS 6561 and • all other insulation materials, whether
should be to BS 4027. Masonry cement
0.6mm thick. for full or partial cavity insulation,
should be to either BS EN 197 or BS EN
insulated blockwork or internal
413. WALL TIES insulation may only be used if
Limes should conform to BS EN 459. 6.1 - M7 Wall ties shall be appropriate assessed in accordance with Technical
for their location and intended use Requirement R3.
(b) sand type
6.1

Sand and aggregate from natural sources Wall ties shall be in accordance with either: The thickness of materials required by the
should conform to BS EN 13139. • BS EN 845, or design and Appendix 6.1-A should be used.
• an assessment in accordance with
(c) mortar type Technical Requirement R3.
Ready-mixed mortars should comply with
CLADDING MATERIALS
BS EN 998. For recommended mortar Ties should be long enough to be 6.1 - M10 Cladding materials shall be
mixes, see Appendix 6.1-C. embedded at least 50mm into each leaf. of the quality, type and dimensions
In England and Wales, wall ties should be required by the design
(d) additives
stainless steel or non-ferrous. In Northern Items to be taken into account include:
Air entraining and set retarding admixtures
Ireland, stainless steel or non-ferrous ties (a) tiles and slates
should comply with BS EN 934.
should be used where the cavity is fully Clay tiles for tile hanging should be to BS
Pigments for colouring mortars should filled with insulation and 75mm wide or 402.
conform to BS EN 12878. more. In Scotland, galvanised ties may be
used. Concrete tiles for tile hanging should be to
(e) render BS 473.
Sand for render should be sharp sand to Where partial cavity insulation is used,
BS EN 13139, preferably from the coarse it should be held in place by retaining Slates for vertical slating should be to BS
end of the grading scale. Sand with devices which may be clipped to the wall 680.
excessive fine material will shrink and ties. These devices should be assessed in
accordance with Technical Requirement R3 (b) timber boarding
crack.
and used only with compatible wall ties. Timber should comply with BS 1186 and be
Reinforcement for render, including angle Class 3 or better.
beads, corner beads, stop beads and
render stops, should be stainless steel or
LINTELS Timber should be a naturally durable
species or pre-treated with preservative.
PVC. 6.1 - M8 Lintels shall be of the type and
Reference should be made to Chapter 2.3
dimensions appropriate to their position
Decorative finishes that contain asbestos ‘Timber preservation (natural solid timber)’
within the structure
are not acceptable. (each section) for guidance on preservative
Steel and concrete lintels should comply treatments.
with BS EN 845-2, ‘Specification for
ancillary components for masonry’. (c) underfelt behind cladding
Type 1F felt to BS 747 is acceptable as an
underfelt behind cladding.

Page 8 Chapter 6.1 2013

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

(d) battens (b) setting out

Battens should be of the size specified When setting out masonry, avoid cutting
in the design and pre-treated with bricks or blocks except when it is essential
preservative treatments. Reference and avoid irregular or broken bonds,
should be made to Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber particularly at openings.
preservation (natural solid timber)’ (each properly
Where a number of openings of similar filled joints
section) for guidance on preservative reduce risk
width are being formed, use a rod cut to of rain
treatments. penetration
the required size to check the width of
(e) proprietary cladding systems openings as the work rises.
Proprietary systems should be assessed
in accordance with Technical Requirement
R3.

MOVEMENT JOINTS Unless the design states otherwise, only

6.1 - M11 Materials for movement joints bucket handle or weathered joints should
shall be suitable for their intended be used. Recessed joints should not be
purpose used where the cavity is to be fully filled
with insulation.
When choosing materials, account should
be taken of the following: Where pigments (to BS 1014) are used
• joint width they should not exceed 10% of the cement
• joint depth weight or 3% if carbon black is used.
• anticipated movement
• movement capability of material For precautions to take in cold weather,
• surface preparation reference should be made to Chapter 1.4
• backing materials ‘Cold weather working’.
• projected life span of joint. To keep courses to the correct height, use (d) cavity walls
a gauge rod. The rod should be marked Cavities should be uniform and of the
Acceptable materials for movement joints
with the height of windows, doors and width specified in the design. All cavities
in clay brick walls are:
floors. should be at least 50mm nominal clear
• flexible cellular polyethylene
• cellular polyurethane All work should be reasonably level and width. Partial cavity insulation should be
• foam rubber. true. The bond detailed in the design fixed against the inner leaf of the cavity.
should be used. Perpendicular joints Check that the correct wall tie is being
Materials which are acceptable for use used (reference should be made to Clause
should be kept in line and plumb. Courses
in contraction joints with concrete bricks S5).
should be kept level by using lines and
or blocks, but not acceptable for use as

6.1
spirit levels. To keep the wall plumb, do not over-reach
expansion joints in fired clay bricks, are:
• hemp at changes of lift. It is better to wait for the
(c) mortar
• fibreboard next scaffolding lift.
Different types of bricks and blocks need
• cork. different strength mortar mixes. Some
In concrete blockwork, the construction parts of the building, such as below
joint may be a simple vertical joint filled dpc, chimneys and copings, may need a
with mortar and sealed. different mix to the main walling. Make
sure the mix is right for the job.

SITEWORK STANDARDS Recommended mortar mixes are given in

Appendix 6.1-C.
6.1 - S1 All sitework shall: Plant and banker boards should be kept
(a) meet the Technical Requirements clean. Mixers should be kept clean to
(b) take account of the design operate efficiently. The mortar colour
(c) follow established good practice and should be consistent.
workmanship
Mortar which has started to set should not The difference in heights between the two
Sitework that complies with the design and be re-tempered.
the guidance below will be acceptable for leaves of a cavity wall under construction
external masonry walls. All bricks and blocks should be laid on a can be up to 6 block courses, provided
full bed of mortar and all perpends should the ties are sufficiently flexible to ensure
be solidly filled. coursing is achieved without breaking the
CONSTRUCTION bond.
6.1 - S2 Construction shall ensure a Joints should be filled to reduce the risk
of rain penetration and dampness in the Cavities should be constructed so that:
satisfactory standard of brickwork and
wall. Solid mortar bedding and fully filled • mortar is struck off from all joints as
blockwork
perpends are particularly important in work proceeds
Items to be taken into account include: exposed areas and where the cavity is to • wall ties are kept free of droppings and
(a) appearance be fully filled with insulation. debris
The appearance of a masonry wall depends • cavity trays are clear of droppings and
upon the materials used, the setting out debris.
and the workmanship. Further details are
given in Clauses S2 to S10.

2013 Chapter 6.1 Page 9

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

• frame cramps, or flat roof joists

• proprietary cavity closers, or
• plugs and fixings.
board keeps 12mm
cavity clear of
mortar droppings Timber plugs should not be used in
vulnerable positions, such as the outer
leaves of walls.

(g) bonding
A regular bonding pattern should be
maintained. External walls should be
bonded to partitions and party walls, as
required by the design. Either: Where a different size of masonry unit is
• • tooth every alternate course, or needed to ensure correct coursing, small
• • tie with wall ties, expanded metal or units of the same material should be used
equivalent at centres not exceeding to reduce cracking and problems due to
300mm vertically. different thermal insulation properties.
different masonry types
bond where blocks used to adjust coursing
are of the same type
Clean cavities with mortar droppings
removed are particularly important in
exposed areas and where partial cavity fill
is used.
Where cavity insulation is used, mortar
droppings should be cleaned off from the
top edge. Mortar left on the top edge may
transmit dampness to the inner leaf. The
use of a cavity batten will prevent this.
incorrect use of different masonry types
Cavity battens should be wrapped with
flexible material to allow easy withdrawal.
Where the inner leaf of a cavity wall is
being used for thermal insulation and
batten keeps tie where blocks are where a different size of masonry unit is
of a different type
cavity clear of
mortar droppings
used to ensure correct coursing, the unit
should have similar thermal insulation
properties to the masonry used for the
rest of the wall. For example aerated
concrete blocks should not be mixed with
6.1

clay bricks.

(h) chasing for services

Chases should be cut with care. Impact
power tools can damage the wall and
should not be used.
(e) movement
Brickwork/blockwork should not be
subjected to vibration until the mortar has
set. horizontal chase no
deeper than one-sixth
block thickness
(f) openings sill
Masonry may be built around either:
• the frame in-situ, or
• a profile or template to enable the frame 1/2 vertical chase no deeper
than one-third block thickness
to be fitted later. 3/4 3/4

Openings should be the correct size and 1/2

square. The brickwork should butt closely
3/4 3/4
against the frame. The frame should not The depth for horizontal chases should be
be distorted by forcing bricks against the brick bond set out at base of wall limited to one-sixth of the thickness of the
so that cut bricks occur below openings
jamb. single leaf. The depth for vertical chases
should be limited to one-third of the
Where joist hangers are not used, joist thickness of the single leaf. Hollow blocks
filling should be brick or blockwork, should not be chased unless specifically
without excessive mortar joints. Clay bricks permitted by the manufacturer.
and concrete blocks should not be mixed.
frames should
Joist filling should be kept 12mm below the (i) movement joints
not be distorted top of flat roof joists to allow for timber Movement joints should be formed where
shrinkage, but check also that cold roof required by the design. Movement joints
ventilation is not blocked (reference should are necessary in long lengths of walling to
be made to Chapter 7.1 ‘Flat roofs and reduce unsightly cracking. Joints are often
Window and door frames, when built-in, balconies’ (Design and Sitework)). hidden in corners, or behind rainwater
should be fixed with: pipes.

Page 10 Chapter 6.1 2013

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

The correct materials should be used DAMP-PROOF COURSES

to form movement joints. Clay bricks
expand and require an easily compressible AND CAVITY TRAYS
material. 6.1 - S4 Dpcs and cavity trays shall be
installed to prevent moisture entering
the building at least
225mm
easily compressible filler
Items to be taken into account include:
12mm (a) horizontal dpcs
Dpcs and cavity trays should be in one
continuous piece, whenever possible.
Joints in horizontal wall dpcs positioned
to prevent rising damp should be
sealant lapped 100mm or sealed or welded. The (b) dpcs in parapet walls
manufacturer’s recommendations should Parapet walls should have:
be checked. Elsewhere, joints in dpcs and • a dpc under the coping, and
cavity trays should be sealed to prevent • a dpc tray starting 150mm minimum
Suitable materials are: water seeping through the joints. above the roof.
• flexible cellular polyethylene At ground level, all parts of the dpc should The coping throating should be clear of the
• cellular polyurethane be at least 150mm above finished ground brickwork. Reference should be made to
• foam rubber. or paving level. Clause S4(d) for guidance on sealing dpcs.
The sealant should be at least 10mm deep All dpcs should be fully bedded in mortar.
to ensure a good bond. If the joint is in
a freestanding wall, the filler will require throating
sealant to both exposed edges and the clear of
brickwork
top (where the joint is carried through the
coping). dpc supported
over cavity
(j) corbelling
Where courses are corbelled out in at least
ordinary masonry, one above another, the 150mm
open perpend
extent of corbelling should not exceed that weep holes at
maximum 1m
shown in the following diagrams. spacing at least
150mm

Where reinforcing is used, corbels should

be designed by an Engineer in accordance
with Technical Requirement R5. Special dpc detailing may be required

6.1
at doorways where the dwelling is to be
T designed to allow access for the disabled.
thickness
not reduced
wall tie
on this side Dpcs should: (c) dpcs to prevent downward flow of
• be laid on a surface, free from water
projections which could puncture or Where dpcs are intended to prevent the
adversely affect the dpc material downward movement of water, joints
• be fully bedded on fresh mortar where should be sealed or welded. Lapped joints,
required by the design, or where the unsealed, are unacceptable.
T
building is over three storeys in height
maximum corbel = T maximum corbel = T • be of correct width Where flashings link with dpcs, rake out
3 3
• not project into the cavity 25mm of mortar below the dpc to allow for
CAVITY WALL SOLID WALL
• not be set back from the edge of the the flashing to be tucked in. It is easiest to
masonry rake out the joints as the work proceeds.
(k) calcium silicate bricks • lap the dpm.
Where calcium silicate bricks are used, the
brick manufacturer’s recommendations dpcs clear of cavity
should be followed.
dpc laps dpm
STONE MASONRY
slight
projection 25mm
6.1 - S3 Stone masonry shall be
mortar raked out flashing wedged in
constructed to an acceptable standard while still green place and pointed up

Stone masonry will be acceptable if it: STAGE 1 STAGE 2

• complies with brickwork/blockwork

clauses (where appropriate) (d) dpcs around openings
• gives an adequate weather-resisting A dpc (either separate or combined as
structure (in conjunction with any brick part of a proprietary cavity closer) should
or block backing and/or vertical damp- The concrete fill in a cavity wall should be provided at jambs of openings and at
proof membranes) stop at least 225mm below the base dpc. heads and sills as required by the design.
• is prepared and laid on its natural bed This may be reduced to 150mm where
(unless local practice is otherwise) special foundations, such as rafts, are
• follows good local recognised practice. used.

2013 Chapter 6.1 Page 11

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

Where a jointed or permeable sill is used protection to the top of the reveal and A dpm should be provided behind meter
(all sills in Northern Ireland and the Isle vertical dpc where provided. boxes in areas of very severe exposure to
of Man), a dpc should be placed between driving rain.
the sill and the outer leaf, turned up at the
back and ends of the sill.

cavity cavity
tray tray

at least at least
dpc turned up 140mm 100mm rise
at back and total rise in cavity tray
ends of sill in cavity from front
tray of cavity

dpc oversails groove in window AIR BRICK

lintel to protect head prevents rain
timber door and penetration
window heads METER BOX

The upstand part of the cavity tray should

Where a separate vertical dpc is used it be returned into the inner leaf masonry (f) stepped cavity trays
should be 150mm wide and be nailed to the unless stiff enough to stand against the At the abutment of pitched roofs to cavity
full height of the frame. The dpc should inner leaf without support. walls, preformed stepped cavity trays
protrude into the cavity by about 25mm should be provided as shown below. The
and extend up to the underside of the lintel In Scotland, all lintels should have a dpc lowest cavity tray should have two stop
where it should be turned back towards built into the inner leaf. ends and a weep hole to allow water to
the inner leaf. drain from the cavity.
In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of
Man and areas of Very Severe exposure to preformed
sealant stepped
driving rain, the upstand part of the damp- cavity trays
25mm 25mm proof protection should be returned into
sealant the inner leaf of masonry.

NORMAL EXPOSURE VERY SEVERE EXPOSURE

Where fairfaced masonry is supported by
lintels:
• weep holes should be provided spaced at least
at maximum 450mm intervals. Each 85mm

opening should have at least two weep

holes.
• cavity trays or combined lintels should
6.1

have stop ends.

WALL TIES
stop end
6.1 - S5 Wall ties shall be of the correct
type correctly installed
Items to be taken into account include:
at least 2 weep holes (a) type
per opening, not more
than 450mm apart The type of wall tie specified by the
insulation vertical dpc
designer should be used.
combined lintel
projects at least
Where there is a sill dpc, it should be 25mm beyond (b) position
the outer face
lapped with the reveal dpc. of cavity closure If ties slope down to the inner leaf, if
drips are off-centre or if ties have mortar
If there is no sill dpc, the vertical dpc 25mm min droppings on them, water can cross the
should be continued 150mm below the sill cavity.
level.
The two leaves should be coursed so that
A fillet joint of sealant should not be the wall tie is level or slopes outwards.
considered as a substitute for good
combined lintel
workmanship or dpcs. However, a bead of or cavity tray
mastic should be used around openings.

(e) cavity trays

The single brick thick external leaf of a
cavity wall can allow moisture into the
cavity. Cavity trays should be used so that wall tie should be
level or sloping
water drains outwards above openings. A cavity tray should be provided where the to the outside
cavity is bridged by air bricks, etc. The dpc
Cavity trays over lintels should extend at should extend 150mm beyond each side of
outside inside
least 25mm beyond the outer face of the the bridge.
cavity closer and cover the ends of the
lintel. Where the lintel does not require a Where not otherwise protected (eg by a
Ties should be bedded a minimum of
dpc, the lintel itself should have a suitable roof at an appropriate level), a dpc tray
50mm into each leaf of the wall as work
profile and durability and give complete should be provided over meter boxes.

Page 12 Chapter 6.1 2013

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

proceeds. The drip should face downwards. At openings and movement joints, wall ties
Ties should be built-in, not pushed into should be spaced at maximum 300mm
joints. centres vertically even if this means
wall tie built at least
50mm into each leaf cutting cavity insulation to insert the tie. lintel

additional ties additional ties full block for

at movement joint at openings lintel bearing

correct bonding
below supporting
block

225mm
450mm
Lintels and masonry should form openings
of the correct size for the frame of the
window or door.
Concrete floor units or other heavy
900mm
components which bear on lintels should
be positioned carefully to avoid damage or
drip of wall tie placed
centrally in cavity (d) use of partial fill insulation shock load.
Where partial cavity fill insulation is
The lintel toe should:
being used, it should be retained against
• project past the window head
the inner leaf by retaining devices. The
• have a flexible sealing compound
retaining devices should be compatible
between toe and window.
with the wall ties and used in accordance
with an assessment which complies with Brickwork or masonry should not overhang
Technical Requirement R3. the lintel by more than 25mm.
Unless the independent assessment states
otherwise, where partial cavity fill is being
used the wall ties should be spaced more
closely to provide adequate support and
restraint for the 1200mm long boards.
Where one leaf is built in advance of the
Ties should be spaced at 600mm centres
other, the wall ties should project enough
horizontally and in vertical as well as
from the built leaf to bed at least 50mm
horizontal rows, ie not staggered.
into the unbuilt leaf.

LINTELS
overhang overhang

6.1
6.1 - S6 Lintels and beams shall be not more not more
than 25mm than 25mm
installed correctly
flexible sealant
Items to be taken into account include: lintel toe projects between lintel
50mm beyond window head and window
(a) span and placing
wall tie should project Lintels should be the correct size for the STEEL LINTEL
enough to build 50mm
into the unbuilt leaf opening and have the correct bearing at
each end: (b) thermal insulation
Insulation may help to prevent cold bridges
Minimum bearing length (mm) at the heads of openings in external walls.
Span (m) Simple Lintel combined The design should be checked for this
lintel with cavity tray requirement. Insulation should be provided
to the underside of the lintel unless the
Up to 1.2 100 150
manufacturer shows an alternative to
prevent cold bridging.
Over 1.2 150 150

Longer span lintels may require padstones

(c) spacing (the design should be checked).
Wall ties should be spaced above and Setting out should ensure that lintels
below dpc as follows: bear on a full block, where possible, or on
a whole brick, and be installed level on a
Maximum spacing (mm)
solid bed of a mortar. Soft or non-durable
Horizontally Vertically packing should not be used. Small pieces
General wall 900 450 of cut brick or block should not be used
sealant
area around lintel bearings.
At jamb within 225 not more
openings, of opening than 300
movement sealant
joints, etc.

(c) use of dpc cavity trays

A separate cavity tray should be provided
over some lintels if:

2013 Chapter 6.1 Page 13

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

• the corrosion protection to the lintel is • hacking the surface

inadequate, and • applying a bonding agent
• the shape of the lintel is unsuitable. ties in vertical
rows at joints
• applying metal lathing
between • applying a spatterdash coat, or
This should be checked with the designer insulation
boards (partial • other appropriate means.
or buyer. cavity fill)

The surface suction should be checked by

In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of
splashing water onto the wall. The result
Man and areas of Severe or Very Severe
should be observed and appropriate action
exposure to driving rain, a cavity tray is
taken as follows:
required over all lintels. Reference should
• if too much suction, spraying with water
be made to Clause S4(e) for details of
may be needed - do not use too much
cavity trays.
water
All cavity trays should have stop ends Where wall ties need to be closely spaced, • if too little suction, a spatterdash coat or
where the outer leaf is fairfaced masonry. for example at reveals, it is acceptable to bonding agent may be needed
make a clean cut neatly in the insulation • if the background is too wet, delay
(d) use of steel lintels to accept the extra ties. The insulation rendering until conditions improve.
Where steel lintels are being used, the manufacturer’s instructions should be
inner and outer leaf should be built up followed. The design requirements should be
together to avoid twisting the lintel flange. checked where rendering is continuous
The difference in height between the Insulation should be close butted with no over different materials. Corrosion-
leaves should not exceed 225mm. gaps. Gaps provide routes for dampness, resistant metal lathing should be fixed
and condensation can form on the cold across the joints or, alternatively, provision
spots where insulation is missing. made to accommodate movement.
THERMAL INSULATION
insulation cut to avoid Expanded metal should be fixed with
6.1 - S7 Thermal insulation shall be leaving uninsulated gaps
the correct side towards the wall (see
installed correctly
manufacturers’ literature). If metal lathing
A high standard of workmanship should be is used to bridge changes in background
maintained to minimise the risk of damp material, a separating strip, eg breather
lintel
penetration to the inside of the dwelling paper, should be fixed behind the lathing
where cavity insulation is used. so that the render does not bond at the
background joints. Lathing should be set
In particular:
reveal away from the wall so that rendering can
• mortar joints, including perpends, should blocks
be forced through the mesh to achieve a
be solidly filled with mortar
good bond.
• mortar droppings should be removed
from wall ties and the edges of
insulation materials
6.1

• excess mortar should be struck smooth

from the inside of the outer leaf.
separating strip used behind
Where insulation is built-in, manufacturers’ expanded metal when plastering
across dissimilar backgrounds
instructions should be followed. These fibres in
insulation
are normally printed on the insulation should be
parallel to
packaging and include a recommended the wall to (b) mix
avoid bridging
sequence of construction. the cavity The mix proportions should be checked
(full cavity fill)
against the specification, especially
Recessed joints should not be used where whether sulfate-resisting cement should
the cavity is to be filled with insulation. be used.
In Northern Ireland and the Isle of Man Mixes for rendering on brickwork using
it is not permissible to fill the cavity with Insulation boards for partial fill should be clay bricks with no limit on their soluble
pumped insulants, eg UF foam, at the time stored flat without bearers otherwise they salt content (F2,S1 or F1,S1 to BS EN 771)
of construction. may distort making them difficult to fix should be as follows:
In Scotland, it is not permissible to fill the against the wall. Warped boards should be
Exposure Undercoat mix Finishing coat
full width of the cavity with any thermal rejected.
conditions proportions mix
insulants at the time of construction. (by volume) proportions
RENDERING (by volume)
All retro-fill insulation materials (UF
foam, blown mineral fibre and expanded 6.1 - S8 Rendering shall be to the Parapets, rendering not recommended
correct mix, have a good bond and freestanding
polystyrene beads) should be installed by walls, pillars,
installers trained by the assessment holder be free from significant cracking and retaining
and approved jointly by the assessment crazing walls and
holder and the assessing organisation. Items to be taken into account include: chimneys
The installer should be a member of a All walls 1 : 5, sulfate- 1 : 5, ordinary
(a) preparation of backing surface
surveillance scheme acceptable to NHBC. other than resisting Portland
The surface to be rendered should be free
those above Portland cement : sand,
The first row of insulation boards or batts from dust, loose particles, efflorescence
cement : sand, dry dashing
should be supported on wall ties, two ties and organic growth. plus integral strongly
to each board or batt. waterproofer advised
Where necessary, surfaces should be
Wall ties should coincide with horizontal treated to provide an adequate key by:
For backing brickwork, it should be
joints in the insulation. • raking out joints

Page 14 Chapter 6.1 2013

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

ensured that sulfate-resisting cement Freshly laid mortar and render may fail if it It is cost effective to protect and store
which complies with Appendix 6.1-C is used freezes because the frozen water expands materials properly and maintain good
in the mortar. and forces apart the particles of mortar. quality control during construction.
If water-resisting properties are required, Admixtures which contain calcium chloride (b) handling
Portland cement with a waterproofing should not be used. The unloading of all bricks and blocks,
agent already incorporated may be especially facing bricks, preferably should
The use of air entraining agents in cold
available. Otherwise, a waterproofing be by mechanical means, directly onto a
weather gives better frost resistance to
agent should be used and added to the firm level surface. Bricks that are tipped
set mortar but does not aid the set. The
rendering mix in strict accordance with on delivery or moved about the site in
use of accelerating admixtures and other
manufacturers’ instructions. dumper trucks often have a high degree of
admixtures should not be relied on as an
wastage. Chipped or fractured bricks are
(c) application anti-freeze precaution.
not acceptable for facework.
The number and thickness of coats should
Check what effect additives have on
be in accordance with the design.
setting times. Cold weather slows setting,
as do retarders. If the set is retarded too
much, the next lift might squeeze out the
joints raked out
15mm to give mortar below.
key for 10mm
to 15mm thick
undercoat Brick and blockwork should not be built
nor rendering carried out when the air
temperature is 2°C and falling.

following 2ºC
coats thinner
and weaker
than undercoat 0ºC

render stopped
above dpc

Walls should be protected from frost until

the mortar has set sufficiently to resist

6.1
In Scotland, a spatterdash coat should be frost damage. Covers should be provided
applied before the first render coat if the to form a still air space to insulate the wall.
background is of Scottish common bricks (c) storage
Walling damaged by frost will not regain
and bricks to BS EN 771. Stacks of bricks and blocks should be
strength and should be taken down and
protected from rain, mud splashes, etc by
re-built when conditions improve.
Undercoats should be applied at least 3 covering with waterproof covers. Bricks
days before applying the following coat. and blocks that become excessively wet
cover weighted down
can suffer from:
If coloured pigments are specified,
• staining and efflorescence
batching should be undertaken with care
cover provides • increased drying shrinkage with a
to ensure colour consistency. a still air space
to insulate the greater risk of cracking
wall from frost
(d) cracking and crazing • lack of mortar adhesion to mud stained
Rendering should be free from significant surfaces.
cracking and crazing.
To avoid surface crazing:
• use properly graded sand (fine sand
increases the risk of crazing) Reference should be made to Chapter 1.4
• strong mixes should not be used as the ‘Cold weather working’ for more detailed
finishing coat advice.
• overworking, which causes laitance to be
drawn to the surface, should be avoided
• the finishing coat should be kept damp HANDLING AND
for at least 3 days. In warm dry weather, PROTECTION protection of bricks and blocks
spraying or protection by polyethylene
6.1 - S10 Materials shall be handled, Cement should be stored off the ground
sheet may be needed. Rendering should
stored, used and protected in such a and protected from weather. Sand should
not be carried out during hot weather or
in bright sunshine. way as to ensure that the construction be prevented from spreading and be
shall be neat, clean and undamaged upon protected so that it remains clean.
COLD WEATHER WORKING completion
The work place should be kept clean to
6.1 - S9 Precautions shall be taken to Items to be taken into account include: reduce mortar splashes to a minimum. Any
protect walls and rendering from damage (a) avoidance of damage accidental mortar smears should be lightly
by frost during construction

2013 Chapter 6.1 Page 15

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

brushed off the face after the mortar has

taken its first set. Appendix 6.1-A
(d) workmanship
Materials should be handled with care
during construction to avoid damage and Suitable wall constructions for use with full cavity insulation
staining. Badly chipped bricks should not
Minimum
be used for facework.
insulation thickness (mm)
Exposure Suitable wall construction Built-in Retro-fill UF
category insulation (other foam
than
UF
foam)
Very Any wall with impervious cladding 50 50 50
Severe
Fairfaced masonry with impervious cladding to 100 100 N/A
all walls above ground storey
Any wall fully rendered2 75 75 N/A

Fairfaced masonry 1
N/A N/A N/A

Severe Any wall with impervious cladding or render2 50 50 50

Fairfaced masonry with impervious cladding or 50 75 50

render2 to all walls above ground storey
Unless bricks have been blended by
the manufacturer, bricks from different Fairfaced masonry 75 75 N/A
batches should be mixed to avoid colour Moderate Any wall with impervious cladding or render 50 50 50
patching.
Fairfaced masonry with impervious cladding or 50 50 50
render to all walls above ground storey
Fairfaced masonry 50 75 75

Sheltered Any wall with impervious cladding or render 50 50 50

Fairfaced masonry with impervious cladding or 50 50 50

render to all walls above ground storey
Fairfaced masonry 50 50 50
6.1

N/A - not applicable

bricks from different
batches should be mixed
to avoid colour patching Notes
1 In Very Severe exposure locations fairfaced masonry with full cavity insulation is not
permitted.
To reduce the risk of efflorescence, newly 2 Render on an external leaf of clay bricks (F2,S1 or F1,S1 designation bricks to BS EN 771) in
erected masonry should be covered. This Severe or Very Severe exposures is not permitted where the cavity is to be fully filled with
also prevents the mortar being washed insulation.
out of the joints by rain and stops masonry 3 This table covers walls where the external leaf does not exceed 12m in height.
becoming saturated. 4 The exposure category of the dwelling is determined by its location on the map showing
categories of exposure to wind driven rain.
5 Fairfaced masonry includes clay, calcium silicate and concrete bricks and blocks and
dressed natural stone laid in an appropriate mortar (see Appendix 6.1-C) preferably with
struck or weathered or bucket handle joints. Cavity walls of random rubble or random
natural stone should not be fully filled.
6 Recessed mortar joints should not be used.
7 In Scotland, it is not permissible to fill the full width of the cavity with any thermal
insulation at the time of construction.
8 In Northern Ireland and the Isle of Man it is not permissible to fill the cavity with pumped
thermal insulants (for example, UF foam) at the time of construction.

Page 16 Chapter 6.1 2013

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

MAP SHOWING CATEGORIES OF EXPOSURE TO WIND DRIVEN RAIN

6.1
Exposure zones Exposure to wind driven
rain (litres/m² per spell)

very severe 100 or more

severe 56.5 to less than 100

moderate 33 to less than 56.5

sheltered less than 33

Note:
Variations to the exposure shown on
the map can only be made by site-specific
calculations using BS 8104 “Assessing
exposure of walls to wind driven rain”
and the table above.

Adapted from the map in the

BRE report “Thermal Insulation:
avoiding risks”

2013 Chapter 6.1 Page 17

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

Appendix 6.1-B

Areas of severe exposure to frost attack

The tinted areas have a frost incidence over 60 days a year, rainfall over 1000mm per year and an elevation over 90m above sea level.

KW

IV
PA

AB

PH

DD

PA
FK
KY
G

EH
ML
KA TD

DG NE

CA DH SR

DL TS
6.1

LA
HG YO
BD
Northern Ireland FY PR BB LS
From the available HX
HU
meteorological data, BLOL HD
WF
the three criteria for L WN
M DN
assessing severe WA S
exposure to frost SK
attack, as set out CH
CW LN
above, do not occur LL
simultaneously in any NG
ST DE
part of Northern Ireland
SY TF
WS LE
PE NR
WV
DY B
CV NN
LD WR IP
HR CB
SA MK
GL SG
NP OX LU CO
HP AL CM
CF HA EN
UB G
SN SL TW RM
SS
BS RG DB
SM BR DA
KT CR
BA ME
TA GU CT
SP RH TN
SO
EX
DT BH PO BN

PL
TQ

TR

Map reproduced by permission of Hanson.

Page 18 Chapter 6.1 2013

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

The following list identifies the postal areas within which the three criteria for severe exposure to frost attack are met.
Only in a few instances is the whole of the post code district within the area of severe frost exposure.

54
40
28
27
26
25
24
23 23
22 47 22
20 21 84 19
12 19 48 14 55 20 83 18
11 17 47 13 48 19 82 17
10 16 46 12 47 18 81 16 26
9 13 45 11 46 17 77 15 19
8 12 44 10 45 16 76 14 18
7 24 11 43 8 44 15 75 13 17
6 23 9 10 42 7 43 14 74 12 16
5 22 8 9 41 6 28 13 72 7 6
4 21 7 8 40 4 13 27 12 65 8 7 6 5
3 20 2 7 39 3 12 26 11 64 7 5 6 4 4
5 2 15 1 6 37 9 6 2 11 23 8 63 4 3 4 3 3
3 1 13 0 5 8 7 8 4 1 8 8 14 1 62 3 3 2 2 1 1
AA BB BD BL CA CF CH DD DE DG DH DL EH FK G HD HG HR HX IV KA

6.1
57
55 21
54 20
41 16 19 41
40 15 18 40
33 14 41 17 39
32 13 40 16 38
28 12 38 15 37 48
14 27 11 37 11 36 44 25
13 23 26 12 10 36 10 35 40 24
12 22 25 11 44 9 35 9 34 39 17 23
11 21 8 24 10 8 8 34 8 33 33 16 22
10 20 7 23 9 71 7 7 33 7 32 32 15 21
9 12 6 22 8 66 6 6 32 6 31 20 14 20 71
8 10 5 21 7 49 5 5 27 5 30 19 13 19 11
7 9 4 20 6 48 4 4 26 4 26 30 13 12 18 8 22
6 8 3 16 3 47 3 3 25 3 25 11 11 11 17 5 21
5 6 2 15 2 46 2 2 24 2 23 10 10 10 13 16 2 18
3 13 2 1 11 24 1 19 1 1 23 1 22 6 9 6 10 10 1 9 6
KW KY LA LD LL M ML NE NP OL PA PH S SA SK ST SY TD TS YO

partly within

wholly within

Reproduced by permission of the London Brick Company Ltd.

2013 Chapter 6.1 Page 19

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

Appendix 6.1-C

Mortar mixes
Unless recommended otherwise by the brick manufacturer, the mixes in the table below
should be used for clay bricks.
In the case of concrete or calcium silicate bricks, particular attention should be paid to
manufacturers’ recommendations.
Mortar mixes using ordinary Portland or sulfate-resisting cements where required (see
also Design clauses 6.1- D5(b) and (d)).

Recommended Recommended Recommended Mortar

cement: lime: cement: sand masonry cement: designation
sand mix mix with air- sand mix to BS EN
Location entraining 1996-1-1
plasticiser
General in areas of 1 : ½ : 4½ 1 : 3½ 1:3 (ii)
wall area Severe or
above Very Severe
dpc exposure - high
durability
other exposure 1 : 1 : 5½ 1 : 5½ 1 : 4½ (iii)
categories -
general use
Below - high durability 1 : ½ : 4½ 1 : 3½ 1:3 (ii)
dpc level
and in
chimney
stacks
Cappings, - low 1 : 0 to ¼ : 3 - - (i)
copings permeability
and sills

Air-entraining plasticiser can be incorporated in the following general use and high durability
6.1

mortars:
1 : 1 : 5½, cement : lime : sand, or
1 : 1 : 4½, cement : lime : sand.

Retarded mortar
Retarded mortar and most pre-mixed mortars can be used over a longer period of time than
site mixed, cement : lime : sand mortars. The timescale of use is defined by the manufacturer,
whose advice should be followed:
• protect retarded mortar against freezing prior to use
• do not use retarded mortar beyond the time for which it is effective
• because of delayed setting, temporary bracing of larger walls, for example gable peaks
and long walls, may be necessary.
Admixtures and additives
Where air-entraining plasticisers or other additives are to be used, follow manufacturers’
instructions:
• do not overdose, ‘more is not better’
• an air entraining agent can help reduce frost damage but it is not an anti-freeze
• do not use unauthorised additives.

Page 20 Chapter 6.1 2013

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

Appendix 6.1-D

Dpcs and cavity trays

Some positions where dpcs and cavity trays should be provided:

Location Provision of dpcs and cavity trays

Base of walls, piers, A dpc should be provided a minimum 150mm above adjoining surfaces and
etc linked with the dpm in solid floors.

dpc laps dcm

dpc

at least
150mm

ground

Base of partitions Dpc should be full width of partition.

built off oversite
where there is no
integral dpm
Base of wall built Detail to prevent entry of damp by driving rain.
off beam, slab, etc
Parapet (1) Beneath coping, and
(2) 150mm above adjoining roof surface to link with the roof upstand.
In cavity walls over A cavity tray should be provided to direct to the outside any water that enters
openings, air bricks the cavity. The cavity tray should fully protect the opening.
and the like
At the horizontal A cavity tray should be provided 150mm above the adjoining roof or balcony

6.1
abutment of all surface. The tray should be lapped over any roof upstand or flashing to ensure
roofs over enclosed water penetrating into the cavity does not enter the enclosed area.
areas and balconies
to walls
At sloping A stepped cavity tray should be provided above the roof surface and linked to
abutments of all any roof upstand or flashing to ensure any water penetrating into the cavity
roofs over enclosed does not enter the enclosed area.
areas to cavity
walls
Doorsteps A dpc should be provided behind a doorstep where it is higher than a wall dpc.

dpm behind
doorstep links
with dpc

level of
wall dpc

doorstep

Sills Where precast concrete or similar sills incorporate joints or are of a permeable
material, a dpc should be provided beneath them for the full length and be
turned up at the back and the end of the sill.
Jambs in cavity The reveal should be protected throughout its width by a continuous dpc. The
width of the dpc should be sufficient to be fixed to, or overlap, the frame and
fully protect the reveal.

For Severe and Very Severe exposure conditions: rebated reveal construction,
with or without closed cavity and dpc.

2013 Chapter 6.1 Page 21

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

Appendix 6.1-E

Durability classification of bricks

BS EN 771-1 classifies clay bricks according to their freeze/thaw resistance and active soluble
salts content as follows:

Durability Freeze/thaw resistance Active soluble salts content

F2,S2 Freeze/thaw resistant (F2), durable in Low (S2)

all building situations

F2,S1 Freeze/thaw resistant (F2), durable in Normal (S1)

all building situations

F1,S2 Moderately freeze/thaw resistant Low (S2)

(F1), durable except when saturated
and subject to repeated freezing and
thawing

F1,S1 Moderately freeze/thaw resistant Normal (S1)

(F1), durable except when saturated
and subject to repeated freezing and
thawing

F0,S2 Not freeze/thaw resistant (F0), Low (S2)

liable to be damaged by freezing and
thawing

F0,S1 Not freeze/thaw resistant (F0), Normal (S1)

liable to be damaged by freezing and
thawing

Calcium silicate and concrete bricks contain no significant active soluble salts. Information
on their durability is given in Materials clause 6.1 - M2(b).

Appendix 6.1-F
6.1

Protection of ancilliary components

Selection of ancilliary components in relation to material/coating specification
for use in buildings up to three storeys in a non-aggressive environment
(For the full range of product types, materials and details refer to Table 2 of PD 6697:2010)

Product type EN 845 Material/Coating specification

Ref * (The zinc coating masses are for one surface)

Wall ties 1 Austenitic stainless steel (molybdenum chrome nickel alloys)

conforming to
BS EN 845-1 3 Austenitic stainless steel (chrome nickel alloys)
8 or 9 Zinc coated (940 g/m2) steel wire or component

Tension straps 1 Austenitic stainless steel (molybdenum chrome nickel alloys)

and hangers
conforming to 3 Austenitic stainless steel (chrome nickel alloys)
BS EN 845-1 8 or 9 Zinc coated (940 g/m2) steel wire or component
Tension straps 10 Zinc coated (710 g/m2) steel component
and hangers
conforming to 11 Zinc coated (460 g/m2) steel component
BS EN 845-1 12.1 or Zinc coated (300 g/m2) steel strip or sheet with organic coating
(internal uses 12.2 over all outer surfaces of finished component
**)
13 Zinc coated (265 g/m2) steel wire
14 Zinc coated (300 g/m2) steel strip or sheet with all cut edges
organic coated
15 Zinc pre-coated (300 g/m2) steel strip or sheet
16.1 or Zinc coated (137 g/m2) steel strip or sheet with organic coating
16.2 over all outer surfaces of finished component
17 Zinc pre-coated (137 g/m2) steel strip with zinc coated edges

Page 22 Chapter 6.1 2013

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

Lintels L3 Austenitic stainless steel (chrome and nickel alloys)

conforming to
BS EN 845-2 L10 Zinc coated (710 g/m2) steel component
L11.1 or Zinc coated (460 g/m2) steel component with organic coating
L11.2 over all outer surfaces of finished component
L12.1 or Zinc coated (300 g/m2) steel strip or sheet with organic coating
L12.2 over all outer surfaces of finished component
L16.2 Zinc coated (137 g/m2) steel strip or sheet with organic coating
over all outer surfaces of finished component
Lintels L11 Zinc coated (460 g/m2) steel component
conforming
to BS EN L14 Zinc coated (300 g/m2) steel strip or sheet with all cut edges
845-2, where organic coated
used with a L16.1 Zinc coated (137 g/m2) steel strip or sheet with allorganic coating
separate dpc over all outer surfaces of finished component
Bed joint R1 Austenitic stainless steel (molybdenum chrome nickel alloys)
reinforcement
conforming to R3 Austenitic stainless steel (chrome nickel alloys)
BS EN 845-3

* Material /coating reference in accordance with the relevant part of BS EN 845.

** These products are not suitable for use in contact with the outer leaf of an external cavity
wall or a single leaf cavity wall.
It is an NHBC recommendation that components in contact with, or embedded in, an inner
leaf which is damp or exposed to periodic wettings (eg below dpc) should be protected in the
same way as components in contact with, or embedded in, an outer leaf.

6.1

2013 Chapter 6.1 Page 23

 6.1
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External masonry walls

INDEX

A F S
Abutment details 4 Fire resistance 4, 5 Setting out 9
Admixtures and additives 3, 8, 20 Flashings 8 Sound insulation 5
Ancilliary components 22 Frost attack 2, 18 Slates 8
B I Stone masonry 4, 7, 11
Background, rendering 6 Insulation, full fill 5, 16 Storage 15
Blockwork 5 Insulation, partial fill 5, 13 Structural support, lintels 4, 13
Bonding 1, 10 J Sulfate 3
Bricks and blocks 7, 22 Joints 3 T
C L Thermal insulation 5, 8, 14
Calcium silicate bricks 1, 7, 11 Lateral restraint 1 W
Cavity trays 3, 11, 12, Lintels 4, 13 Wall ties 4, 8, 12
13, 21 M Workmanship 16
Cavity walls 5, 9 Mortar 3, 8, 9,
Cement 8 20
Cladding 1, 5, 8 Movement joints 1, 8, 10
Cold bridging 4 O
Cold weather working 15 Openings 10
Condensation 4 P
Corbelling 2, 11 Parapet details 4
D Point loads 1
Damp proof courses 3, 8, 11, Protection 1, 15
13, 21 R
Dry linings 5 Rain penetration 2, 5
Durability 4, 22 Reclaimed bricks 7
E Render 5, 8, 14
6.1

Exposure 2, 18

Page 24 Chapter 6.1 2013

Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

Part 6 Superstructure (excluding roofs)

Chapter 6.2
 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

CONTENTS SCOPE

DESIGN Clause Page This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
Requirements and recommendations for external walls of
Design standards D1 1 timber framed dwellings, substantially timber framed dwellings
Statutory requirements D2 1 and wall panels (including relevant certification procedures).
Load bearing walls D3 1 This Chapter applies to timber framed walls up to seven
Moisture control and insulation D4 1 storeys high.
Preservative treatment D5 2
Exterior cladding D6 2
Control of fire D7 3
Provision of information D8, D9 3

MATERIALS
Materials standards M1 3
Timber M2 3
Timber preservation M3 4
Sheathing M4 4
Breather membranes M5 4
Cavity barriers and fire-stops M6 4
Holding down devices M7 4
Nails and staples M8 4
Vapour control layers M9 4
Wall ties and fixings M10 4
Wall Insulation M11 4

SITEWORK
Sitework standards S1 4
6.2

Construction S2 4
Breather membranes S3 5
Wall ties S4 6
Insulation S5 6
Vapour control layers S6 6
Cladding S7 6
Control of fire S8 6
Services S9 7

APPENDIX 6.2-A
Certification procedure 7
APPENDIX 6.2-B
Specimen certificate (England, Wales, 7
Northern Ireland and Isle of Man),
APPENDIX 6.2-C
Specimen certificate (Scotland) 8

INDEX 16
 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

DESIGN STANDARDS
not affect the stud spacing or where the MOISTURE CONTROL AND
supported loads are carried by a rim beam
or perimeter joist. INSULATION
6.2 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical
Additional studs may be required at 6.2 - D4 The design shall ensure that
Requirements
openings for fixing wall ties where the structure is adequately protected
Dwellings with a timber frame from the effects of moisture
masonry cladding is used.
superstructure require certification
Items to be taken into account include:
indicating that the design has been Multiple studs should be included to
checked by an NHBC timber frame certifier. support multiple joists and other point (a) provision of dpcs and dpms
See Appendix 6.2-A. loads unless otherwise specified by the Dpcs should be installed below the sole
designer. plates of all ground floor walls, including
Design that follows the guidance below will internal partitions, to protect timber from
be acceptable for external walls of timber The design should avoid narrow, rising damp and residual construction
framed dwellings, substantially timber inaccessible gaps between studs which are moisture.
framed dwellings and wall panels. This difficult to insulate.
Chapter applies to timber framed walls up Dpcs and trays should be fitted at openings
to seven storeys high. where needed to prevent rain penetration.

For guidance on the prevention of fire In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of
during construction see ‘Fire Prevention Man and other places where the exposure
lintel
on Construction Sites’ jointly published by to driving rain is Severe or Very Severe,
the Construction Federation and the Fire masonry should form a rebate at the
Protection Association (www.thefpa.co.uk) cripple reveals of openings to avoid a straight
stud
and guidance from the UKTFA under the through joint where the frame abuts the
‘Site Safety Strategy’ that presents fire risk masonry.
management publications such as the ‘16
Steps to Fire Safety’ and the ‘Design Guide
to Separation Distances’ (www.uktfa.com). dpc

STATUTORY
REQUIREMENTS
6.2 - D2 Design shall comply with all
relevant statutory requirements
load bearing lintel
Design should be in accordance with supported by cripple studs sealant
relevant Building Regulations and other
statutory requirements.

6.2
LOADBEARING WALLS (b) anchoring the frame JAMB - SHELTERED
Wall panels should be adequately fixed
6.2 - D3 Loadbearing timber framed to the sole plate which in turn should be
walls shall be designed to support and anchored to the substructure to resist all
transfer loads to foundations safely and the lateral and vertical forces acting at
without undue movement these junctions. Typical details are shown rain

Structural design of loadbearing timber in Clause S2.

framed walls should be in accordance with Where frames are fixed to masonry or dpc
BS EN 1995-1-1. The design should take into beam and block floors by shotfiring, the
account: blocks should be concrete blocks to BS weepholes
drain any
• wind loads EN 771 with a minimum crushing strength moisture
• roof loads of 7.3N/mm 2. Blocks in beam and block
• floor loads. floors should be grouted.
sealant to resist
Items to be taken into account include: driving rain
(c) joints between panels and other
(a) structural elements elements
All structural timber should be: Wall panels should be securely fixed together HEAD - SHELTERED
• of a suitable grade in accordance with and fixed to floor and roof framing where
BS EN 338 and BS EN 14081-1 appropriate. Appropriate measures should be
• dry graded and marked in accordance taken to prevent buckling.
with BS 4978. dpc
If head binders are not provided joists and
Sheathing and its associated fixings should roof trusses, including girder trusses and
be structurally adequate to resist racking other similar loads, should bear directly
due to wind and other forces. over studs.
Individual studs should be not less than At joints between wall panels, sole plates
37mm wide, at maximum 600mm centres, and head binders should be provided to
unless other adequate support is provided bind panels together. Joints in sole plates
for wall boards and fixings. and head binder should not coincide with
A lintel and cripple studs should be those between panels. Joints in head sealant

provided to any opening in load-bearing binders should occur over a stud.

panels except when the opening does JAMB - SHELTERED

2013 Chapter 6.2 Page 1

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

• a masonry cladding which is rendered or Insulated sheathing boards should be

clad with an impervious material. assessed in accordance with Technical
Requirement R3 and installed in
The cavity should be extended at least
accordance with the assessment.
rain 150mm below dpc, to allow drainage of
the cavity and should be kept clear. Open Wall insulation should be of a type which
brick perpends should be provided where ‘breathes’ eg, mineral wool (rock or glass).
dpc necessary to prevent water build up in the Other insulation materials should be
cavity. These openings can also provide assessed in accordance with Technical
weepholes
drain any
cavity venting. Requirement R3 for use in timber frame
moisture
dpc turned up inner
wall panels and installed in accordance
face of sole plate to with the assessment.
lap with vapour
control layer.
sealant to resist Seal between wall and Water and heating services within walls
driving rain floor barriers or seal should be on the warm side of the
gap between skirting
board and floor. insulation.
HEAD - SHELTERED lowest
timber (e) vapour control layers for walls
150mm
above
A vapour control layer should be fixed on
ground the warm side of the wall insulation.
level

weep holes The vapour control layer should cover the

dpc
external wall including bottom rails, head
rails, studs, lintels and window reveals.
Vapour control layers should be of 500
weep vents gauge (120 micron) polyethylene or vapour
lowest timber
control plasterboard.
not less than
sealant 75mm above All joints in sheet vapour control layers
ground
level 225mm min should have at least 100mm laps and
weep holes be located on studs or noggings and be
drainage adequately fixed to the frame.
medium
JAMB - EXPOSED next to
masonry
cladding PRESERVATIVE
(b) membranes
Breather membranes should be lapped so
Note: This detail is only acceptable in situations where the site is
not subject to a high water table or where the cavity will
TREATMENT
that each joint is protected and moisture not have standing water.
6.2 - D5 Timber and timber products
drains outwards and downwards as shown shall either be naturally durable or
6.2

The cavity should be vented to allow

in Clause S3. where necessary be treated with
some limited, but not necessarily through,
In areas of Very Severe exposure to wind movement of air. Where wall areas are preservative to give adequate resistance
driven rain (as defined in Appendix 6.1-A) divided by horizontal cavity barriers and against decay and insect attack
a high performance breather membrane openings should be provided to each Items to be taken into account include:
should be used (unless the alternatives section (see Clause 6.2 - D7). (a) timber framing
given in Clause D4(c) below are adopted). Timber framing should be treated in
The openings should be:
• equivalent to open brick perpends every accordance with the guidance in Chapter 2.3
(c) cavities in external walls
1.2m ‘Timber preservation (natural solid timber)’,
A drained and vented cavity should be
• located to prevent the ingress of rain, to which reference should be made.
provided to reduce the risk of rain penetrating
to the frame. The following minimum cavity or I-studs manufactured from timber of
widths, measured between the cladding and • below the lowest timber. durability class ‘moderately durable’ or
sheathing, should be provided: Proprietary perpend ventilators are lower should be preservative treated in
Cladding Minimum cavity width available. accordance with Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber
preservation (natural solid timber)’.
Masonry 50mm nominal These openings can also provide drainage
Renderon backed 25mm nominal of the cavity. (b) timber cladding
lathing Timber cladding should be treated in
Verticaltile hanging No vertical cavity (d) insulation accordance with the guidance in Chapter
without underlay required when a The BRE Report ‘Thermal insulation: 2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural solid
breather membrane is avoiding risks’ discusses aspects of timber)’.
fitted to the sheathing insulation relevant to external timber
Othercladding* 15mm framed walls. In England and Wales
account should be taken of Accredited
EXTERIOR CLADDING
* See Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and Details. 6.2 - D6 Exterior cladding shall be
cladding’. compatible with the timber frame
Insulation should normally be placed within
In areas of Very Severe exposure to wind the stud void. Partial fill cavity insulation, Items to be taken into account include:
driven rain (as defined in Appendix 6.1-A) with a 50mm residual cavity, between (a) cavity
the wall construction should include a it and any cladding may be needed but A drained and vented cavity between
50mm cavity between the sheathing and should be assessed in accordance with exterior cladding and the sheathing should
the cladding and: Technical Requirement R3 as an integral be specified as detailed inClause D4. This
• a high performance breather membrane, part of the wall system and installed in cavity should not contain electricity cables
or accordance with the assessment. other than meter tails.

Page 2 Chapter 6.2 2013

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

(b) wall ties (e) services and relevant specialist subcontractors and/
Wall ties should be: Differential movement should be allowed or suppliers.
• of a type which complies with BS EN 845 for services both within the timber frame
Where proprietary products are to be
and fully permits differential movement envelope or where they pass through it.
used, manufacturers usually have specific
between the timber frame and the Additional guidance is given in Appendix
requirements for fixing and/or assembly
cladding - see Clause D6(c) below 6.2-C or in the case of gas services
of their products. This information should
• fixed to studs, not sheathing publications from the Institution of Gas
also be made available for reference
• spaced at a maximum of 600mm Engineers and Managers (www.igem.org.uk).
on site so that work can be carried out
horizontally and 450mm vertically
satisfactorily in accordance with the design
• spaced at jambs of openings and at CONTROL OF FIRE and specification.
movement joints in masonry a maximum
of 300mm vertically within 225mm of 6.2 - D7 Walls and panels shall resist The fixing schedule should allow for every
the masonry reveal or movement joint. the spread of fire structural connection made on site including
In this case additional studs may be For guidance on the prevention of fire fixing details for framing, wall ties, breather
needed during construction see ‘Fire Prevention membrane, sheathing and vapour control
• spaced within 225mm of the top of a on Construction Sites’ jointly published by layers, and should show as appropriate:
masonry wall the Construction Federation and the Fire • number and spacing of nails and staples
• inclined away from the sheathing so Protection Association (www.thefpa.co.uk) • size and type of nail including material
that the slope is maintained following and guidance from the UKTFA under the and corrosion protection
differential movement. ‘Site Safety Strategy’ that presents fire risk • method of nailing (eg skew, end, etc.).
management publications such as the ‘16
(c) movement between the timber frame Where the wall design relies on
Steps to Fire Safety’ and the ‘Design Guide
wall and other elements. plasterboard to take racking forces those
to Separation Distances’ (www.uktfa.com).
walls should be clearly defined and the
Differential movement
All elements should have adequate fire type and centres of the fixings stated.
During the first two years after erection,
resistance.
the timber frame will reduce in overall Copies of the fixing schedule should be
height as it dries out. The anticipated Service mains should not pass through given to the person doing the job.
amount of shrinkage of the timber frame is separating wall cavities.
given in Appendix 6.2-C. 6.2 - D9 Design of the superstructure
In Scotland services are not permitted shall be checked by an NHBC timber
Movement between the timber frame and within a timber framed separating wall. frame certifier
other parts of the construction will occur at:
• door and window openings Service outlets should not impair the fire The superstructure design should be
• eaves and verges resistance of floors and walls. placed with an NHBC approved timber
• balconies (including Juliet balconies) frame certifier so that a certificate can be
Items to be taken into account include:
• openings for drive-throughs issued in accordance with Appendix 6.2-A.
(a) cavity barriers
• staircases and lift shaft enclosures

6.2
The design should detail the position and
(where they are not timber framed)
• service entries
materials for cavity barriers in accordance MATERIALS STANDARDS
with relevant Building Regulations.
• the interface of the timber frame with 6.2 - M1 All materials shall:
any other construction. Horizontal cavity barriers (except under (a) meet the Technical Requirements
eaves) should be protected with a dpc tray. (b) take account of the design
Appendix 6.2-C provides guidance on the
The tray should have a minimum upstand
anticipated amount of shrinkage of the Materials that comply with the design and
of 100mm. Alternatively polyethylene
timber frame and where it will occur between the guidance below will be acceptable for
encased cavity barriers providing a minimum
other parts of the structure. The extent of external timber framed walls including
upstand of 100mm should be used.
the differential movement increases with the wall panels and dwellings which are
number of storeys. Movement gaps should be Dpcs should be used to cover horizontal substantially timber framed.
filled with suitable materials to take up the and vertical cavity barriers and to shed
expected movement. The manufacturer of the moisture away from the sheathing. Typical Materials should comply with all relevant
material should be consulted on the suitability details are shown in Clause S8. standards, including those listed below.
for the extent of the movement expected. Where no standard exists, Technical
Vertical timber cavity barriers should be Requirement R3 applies (see Chapter
Where the movement gap is expected to protected from penetrating moisture by a 1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards and
be more than 35mm it should be protected dpc. Technical Requirements’).
by a cover strip.
(b) fire-stops References to British Standards and Codes
All claddings that are fixed direct to the The design should detail the position of Practice include those made under the
timber frame, should have a horizontal and type of fire-stops in accordance with Construction Products Directive (89/106/
movement joint at each floor level. See relevant Building Regulations. EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
Appendix 6.2-C European Technical Specifications
A typical fire-stop detail is shown in
Masonry claddings should not be approved by a European Committee for
Clause S8.
supported by the timber frame. Standardisation (CEN).

(d) prefabricated chimneys PROVISION OF TIMBER

Prefabricated chimneys should either be INFORMATION 6.2 - M2 All timber shall be of a grade
supported by:
• the masonry cladding, or 6.2 - D8 All relevant information shall suitable for the design
• the timber frame, including any roof be distributed to appropriate personnel
All structural timber should be:
construction supported by the timber Ensure that design and specification
• of a suitable grade in accordance with
frame. information is issued to site supervisors
BS EN 338 and BS EN 14081-1

2013 Chapter 6.2 Page 3

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

• dry graded and marked in accordance of providing adequate resistance to fire INSULATION
with BS 4978. and smoke
6.2 - M11 Insulation materials shall
I-studs should be assessed in accordance Materials specified in statutory provide the degree of insulation to
with Technical Requirement R3. requirements are acceptable. comply with the design and statutory
Other materials may be used if requirements
TIMBER PRESERVATION satisfactorily assessed in accordance with Wall insulation should be of a type that
6.2 - M3 Timber shall be either naturally Technical Requirement R3. ‘breathes’, eg mineral wool (rock or glass).
durable or preservative treated to Other insulation used in walls should be
provide adequate protection against rot HOLDING DOWN DEVICES assessed in accordance with Technical
and insect attack Requirement R3 for use in timber frame
6.2 - M7 Holding down devices shall be
wall panels.
Timber preservation should be in of durable material
accordance with Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber
Holding down devices should be
preservation (natural solid timber)’.
manufactured from: SITEWORK STANDARDS
I-studs manufactured from timber of • austenitic stainless steel to BS EN
10088-1, minimum grade 1.4301 6.2 - S1 All sitework shall:
durability class ‘moderately durable’ or
• galvanised mild steel with zinc coating (a) meet the Technical Requirements
lower should be preservative treated in
to BS EN ISO 1461, minimum coating 940 (b) take account of the design
accordance with Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber
g/m2 on each side. (c) follow established good practice and
preservation (natural solid timber).
workmanship
Sole plate anchors within the internal
SHEATHING envelope should be galvanised mild steel, All relevant information in a form suitable
minimum coating Z275. for the use of site operatives should be
6.2 - M4 Sheathing shall be durable available on site before construction starts
and capable of providing structural All holding down devices should be as including:
resistance to racking detailed in the design. • full set of drawings
The following materials are acceptable: • materials specification
• plywood in accordance with BS EN 636 NAILS AND STAPLES • fixing schedules
and BS EN 13986 table 7 • nailing details
6.2 - M8 Nails and staples shall be • manufacturers’ recommendations
• oriented strand board in accordance
durable and of the correct type to relating to proprietary items.
with BS EN 300 type OSB/3 or 4
provide adequate mechanical fixing
• moisture-resistant chipboard in
accordance with BS EN 312 type P5 or P7. Staples for fixing breather membranes
CONSTRUCTION
• medium board in accordance with BS EN should be austenitic stainless steel or 6.2 - S2 Construction shall ensure that
622-3 type MBH.HLS1 or MBH.HLS2. other material of similar strength and the building is structurally adequate
• impregnated soft board in accordance corrosion resistance.
6.2

(a) setting out

with BS EN 622-4 type SB.HLS.
Nails for fixing sheathing or timber should The substructure should be correctly set
Proprietary sheathing materials should be galvanised, sheradized or austenitic out to receive the timber frame which will
be assessed in accordance with Technical stainless steel. be manufactured to close tolerances. The
Requirement R3 and used in accordance timber frame should be checked to ensure
with the assessment. VAPOUR CONTROL that it is erected accurately both on plan
and vertically. The load from the frame
BREATHER MEMBRANES LAYERS should be supported as intended in the
6.2 - M9 Vapour control layers shall design. Where packing under sole plates is
6.2 - M5 Breather membranes shall be necessary it should be in accordance with
restrict the passage of water from
capable of allowing water vapour from Appendix 6.2-B.
within the dwelling to the timber frame
within the frame to pass out into the
cavity and protect the sheathing and Vapour control layers should be 500 gauge
frame from external moisture (120 micron) polyethylene sheet or vapour
control plasterboard.
Breather membranes should be:
• vapour resistant to less than 0.6MNs/g Vapour control products manufactured
when calculated from the results of tests from recycled materials should be
carried out in accordance with BS 3177 assessed in accordance with Technical 12mm maximum
overhang of
at 25 °C and relative humidity of 75% Requirement R3. frame over
• capable of resisting water penetration supporting
structure (20mm
• self extinguishing WALL TIES AND FIXINGS for 140mm wide
studs)
• durable
• adequately strong when wet to resist 6.2 - M10 Wall ties and fixings shall
site damage be capable of properly connecting
• Type 1 to BS 4016 in areas of Very Severe the cladding to the timber frame in
Ledges can form moisture traps. Where
exposure (unless the alternatives given in accordance with the design
these occur protection should be provided.
Design Clause D4(c) are adopted). Wall ties and their fixings should be of
austenitic stainless steel, comply with BS
CAVITY BARRIERS AND EN 845 and be capable of accommodating
FIRE-STOPS the anticipated differential movement
6.2 - M6 Materials used for cavity given in Appendix 6.2-C.
barriers and fire-stops shall be capable

Page 4 Chapter 6.2 2013

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

If head binders are not provided, joists and Masonry claddings should not be
roof trusses, including girder trusses and supported by the timber frame.
other similar loads, should bear directly
over studs. Individual studs should be not (g) prefabricated chimneys
ledge protected
by breather less than 37mm wide, at maximum 600mm Prefabricated chimneys should either be
membrane
centres, unless other adequate support is supported by:
provided for wall boards and fixings. • the masonry cladding, or
frame set back
12mm maximum • the timber frame, including any roof
from edge of A lintel and cripple studs should be construction supported by the timber
supporting structure
(20mm for 140mm provided to any opening in loadbearing frame.
wide studs) panels except when the opening does
not affect the stud spacing or where the (h) cavities
supported loads are carried by a rim beam A cavity should be provided to reduce
or perimeter joist. the risk of rain penetrating to the frame.
(b) anchoring the frame The following minimum cavity widths,
The frame should be anchored to resist Unless otherwise clearly specified by the measured between the cladding and
both lateral movement and uplift. Care designer, multiple studs should be included sheathing, should be provided:
should be taken to avoid splitting timber to support multiple joists.
plates or damaging the substructure.
Cladding Minimum cavity width
(d) supporting claddings
When shotfiring, care should be taken not Wall ties should be in accordance with the Masonry 50mm nominal
to spall edges of masonry or slabs. When design and fixed to studs. Render on backed 25mm nominal
shotfiring into masonry, solid concrete lathing
blocks with a minimum crushing strength Battens supporting lightweight cladding Vertical tile No vertical cavity
of 7.3N/mm 2should be used, positioned to should be fixed to studs. hanging without required when a breather
receive fixings. underlay membrane is fitted to the
(e) fixing plasterboard sheathing
Plasterboard should be fixed in accordance Other cladding* 15mm
with Chapter 8.2 ‘Wall and ceiling finishes’
(Sitework) unless the design specifies *See Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and
closer fixing centres cladding’.
dpc

Particular care should be taken at A clear cavity for at least 150mm below
the junction between walls and roofs. dpc should be maintained. Weep holes (eg
Reference should be made to Chapter 8.2 open perpends) should be provided where
‘Wall and ceiling finishes’ (Sitework). necessary to prevent water build up in the
FIXING TO PLATE cavity.
(f) movement between timber frame wall
and other elements BREATHER MEMBRANES

6.2
The timber frame will reduce in overall
height as it dries out. The anticipated 6.2 - S3 Breather membranes shall
amount of shrinkage of the timber frame where required protect the sheathing
and where it will occur between other from dampness
parts of the structure is given in Appendix Special attention should be given to the
6.2-C. following details:
Movement will occur at: • laps, which should be at least 100mm on
• door and window openings horizontal joints and 150mm on vertical
• eaves and verges joints as shown in the following diagram
• balconies (including Juliet balconies) • direction of laps - upper layers should
• openings for drive-throughs be fixed over lower layers to ensure rain
• staircases and lift enclosures (where runs away from the sheathing. Vertical
they are not timber framed) joints should be staggered wherever
• service entries possible
• the interface of the timber frame with • fixing should be at regular intervals to
FIXING TO STUDS any other construction. prevent damage by wind and should
be not more than 600mm centres
The extent of the differential movement horizontally, 300mm centres vertically
increases with the number of storeys. and 150mm centres around openings
Movement gaps should be filled with • marking the stud positions for wall tie
(c) fixing panels
suitable materials to take up the expected fixing
All fixings, including nailed joints and
movement. The manufacturer of the • shedding water away from the lowest
sheathing, should be as scheduled in the
material should be consulted on the timber
design.
suitability for the extent of the movement • use of self extinguishing grade
Wall panels should be securely fixed expected. membrane
together and to floor and roof framing. • use of high performance breather
Where the movement gap is expected to
membrane in areas of Very Severe
Sole plates and head binders should be be more than 35mm it should be protected
exposure to wind driven rain (as
provided to bind the panels together. by a cover strip.
defined in Appendix 6.1-A) (unless the
Joints in sole plates and head binders
All claddings that are fixed directly to the alternatives given in Design Clause D4(c)
should not coincide with those between
timber frame, should have a horizontal are adopted)
panels. Joints in head binders should occur
movement joint at each floor level. See • use of fixings described in Chapter 6.2
over a stud.
Appendix 6.2-C. (Materials).

2013 Chapter 6.2 Page 5

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

The cavity should be vented to allow

some limited, but not necessarily through,
movement of air. Where wall areas are
150mm
100mm divided by horizontal cavity barriers and
openings should be provided to each
section (see Design clause 6.2 - D7).
The ventilation openings should be:
• equivalent to open brick perpends every
staggered joints
1.2m.
• placed to prevent the ingress of rain or
should be below the lowest timber.
Proprietary perpend ventilators are
available.

membrane protects These openings can also provide drainage.

lowest timber • against studs or rails
• at corners The cavity should be kept clean, free of
• against noggings obstructions and be capable of draining
Damaged membranes should be repaired freely.
• at junctions with partitions
or replaced before proceeding with the • behind service panels. All proprietary cladding should be fixed
cladding.
in accordance with the manufacturer’s
When bitumen impregnated fibre building VAPOUR CONTROL recommendations.
board is used and a breather membrane
is not specified the joints of the boards LAYERS Masonry cladding should be constructed
in accordance with Chapter 6.1 ‘External
should be closely butted and horizontal 6.2 - S6 Vapour control layers shall be masonry walls’.
joints sealed to prevent water ingress. correctly installed
When a breather membrane is not required Before fixing a vapour control layer the CONTROL OF FIRE
the bottom frame members should be framing timbers should have a moisture
protected from water in the cavity. content of 20% or less. 6.2 - S8 Fire spread shall be controlled
as detailed in the design
The vapour control layer should be fixed on
the warm side of the insulation and frame. For guidance on the prevention of fire
during construction see ‘Fire Prevention
The vapour control layer should be the on Construction Sites’ jointly published by
material specified in the design. 500 the Construction Federation and the Fire
gauge (120 microns) polyethylene sheet Protection Association (www.thefpa.co.uk)
or vapour control plasterboard should be and guidance from the UKTFA under the
6.2

used. Where vapour control plasterboard ‘Site Safety Strategy’ that presents fire risk
is used joints between sheets should be management publications such as the ‘16
positioned on studs or noggings and the
Steps to Fire Safety’ and the ‘Design Guide
joints should be filled, taped and finished.
to Separation Distances’ (www.uktfa.com)’.
Where polyethylene is used all joints in the
vapour control layer should have at least CAVITY BARRIERS
100mm laps and be located on studs or Cavity barriers should be installed in
WALL TIES noggings. positions detailed by the design and
6.2 - S4 Wall ties shall be correctly relevant Building Regulations.
Vapour control layers should be fixed at
installed
250mm centres to the top and bottom of Cavity barriers should be formed of
• of the type specified in the design the frame, at laps and around openings. materials specified in the design. If no
• fixed to the studs not the sheathing specification is available the advice of the
When cutting vapour control plasterboard
• be sufficiently flexible or of a type that designer should be obtained.
care should be taken not to displace the
fully permits differential movement vapour control material.
• be kept clean and free from mortar Horizontal cavity barriers (except under
droppings Any holes made in a vapour control layer eaves) should be protected with a dpc tray.
• spaced at a maximum of 600mm should be made good. The tray should have a minimum upstand of
horizontally and 450mm vertically 100mm. Alternatively polyethylene encased
The vapour control layer should cover the cavity barriers providing a minimum
• spaced at jambs of openings and at external framed wall area including rails,
movement joints in masonry a maximum upstand of 100mm should be used.
studs, reveals, lintels and sills.
of 300mm vertically within 225mm of
the masonry reveal or movement joint The vapour control layer should lap with
• spaced within 225mm of the top of a the dpc.
masonry wall breather membrane

• inclined away from the sheathing so CLADDING lapped over dpc tray

that the slope is maintained following

6.2 - S7 Cladding and its fixings shall
differential movement.
not obstruct the cavity and shall allow
INSULATION for differential movement

6.2 - S5 Insulation shall be correctly Horizontal battens, which obstruct the dpc

installed drained and vented cavity, should not

be used to support cladding except tile
Insulation should cover the whole wall area hanging.
between studs. No gaps should be left:

Page 6 Chapter 6.2 2013

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

Vertical timber cavity barriers should be confirming that he has assessed the 2 Bedding of sole plate
protected from moisture by a dpc. structural adequacy of the timber frame bottom member
of wall panel
superstructure for a specific project.
The completed and signed certificate must
be given to the registered builder.
Certifiers must be suitably qualified civil sole plate
dpc
or structural engineers with at least
mortar bed
three years’ experience in timber frame
construction and Chapter 6.2 ‘External
timber framed walls’. The certifier must
not be the designer of the timber frame.
Where the design is four storeys or more
and the floor joists are solid timber the
design is to be submitted to NHBC. The sole plate is laid and levelled on a
FIRE-STOPPING Applications to become a timber frame continuous bed of mortar, prior to the
Fire-stops should be installed in positions certifier should be made to NHBC erection of the wall panels. The bedding
detailed in the design and relevant Building Standards and Technical. should extend the full width of the sole
Regulations. plate. Care is needed to ensure that the
Registered builders bedding is not disturbed during the fixing
Only those materials specified in the
Registered builders should ensure that of the sole plate.
design should be used for fire-stopping.
the completed timber frame certificate is
If details of fire-stop design, location and available on site for inspection by NHBC. 3 Doube sole plate ‘sandwich’
bottom member
materials are not available they should of wall panel
be verified with the designer before
construction commences. Appendix 6.2-B
fire-stop between
battens above
underlay Packing under sole plates
fire-stop below
The finished surface of the substructure sole plate
underlay supporting the timber frame should be permanent
packing
reasonably level. However, where packing under
temporary each stud
is required to ensure the timber frame spacers
or sole plate is level, the following three
alternative options are acceptable.

6.2
The options given are for packing up to
20mm. Packing exceeding 20mm should
be agreed between the timber frame
The lower sole plate is fixed to follow the
manufacturer’s engineer and NHBC.
contours of the supporting structure.
cavity barrier cavity barrier The upper sole plate is fixed on top and
of mineral wool or in wall between 1 Permanent structural packing under
fire-resisting board buildings levelled with temporary spacers inserted
in boxed eaves sole plate
bottom member between the sole plates. Once the first lift
of wall panel construction has been erected permanent
SERVICES packing is inserted under each load point
(e.g. stud or post).
6.2 - S9 Services shall not reduce sole plate
the fire resistance or stability of the Because this method introduces an
dwelling temporary additional sole plate the extra shrinkage
spacer
grout or permanent
should be taken into account. See
Service outlets should not impair the fire packing under Appendix 6.2-C.
resistance of floors and walls. each stud

Only those services shown in the design Notes

should be installed in separating walls. 1 Permanent packing should be designed
and approved by the timber frame
Notching or drilling of structural timber designer to suit the horizontal and
members should be carried out as detailed The sole plate is levelled on temporary vertical loads on the sole plate and
in the design. If these details are not spacers. Once the first lift construction - should be at least the same plan area
available the designer should be consulted wall panel and first floor floor structure (or as the load points (e.g. studs or posts).
before such operations are started. roof structure in a single storey building) Hollow plastic packing with reduced
- has been erected, permanent packing is bearing surfaces is not acceptable.
See Appendix 6.2 - C. placed under the sole plate. 2 Temporary spacers can remain in place
providing they are durable and non-
This permanent packing can be:
Appendix 6.2-A • free flowing non-shrinkable grout for the
degradable.
3 Grout and mortar are both unsuitable
full length and width of the sole plate, or
for gaps less than 5mm and in such
Certification • individual packers placed under each
cases permanent packing should be
load point (e.g. stud or post).
Certifiers used.
The timber frame certifier is required
to complete and sign a certificate

2013 Chapter 6.2 Page 7

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

Appendix 6.2-C

DIFFERENTIAL MOVEMENT
INTRODUCTION
During the first two years after erection the timber frame will reduce in overall height as it dries out. Movement will occur between the timber
frame and other parts of the structure.
This Appendix contains:
• guidance on differential movement of the timber frame, and
• common details for timber frame construction where differential movement will take place.
The sketches show examples of typical interfaces and illustrate general design principles.
In the absence of project specific calculations the gaps shown in the following table, are required:

Table of differential movement

Gap location Opening and Closing gaps(mm)
Floor joists
Solid timber (mm) Engineered I-joist (mm)
Eaves/verge Add 5mm to gap dimension at level below
Sixth storey Specialist calculations to be 61
submitted toNHBC
Fifth storey 53
Fourth storey 45
Third storey 45 35
Second storey 35 25
First storey 20 15
Ground storey* 5 5

*Ground storey or lowest level of timber frame.

Notes
6.2

The gap sizes are based on the following :

• timber joist and rim beam/header joist maximum depth 240mm
• timber frame floor cross section is as shown below with maximum 45mm deep timber plates/binders
• single head binder at the eaves. Maximum double sole plates
• calculations, where required, to be based on BS EN 1995-1-1
• timber components are not saturated and normal moisture contents at the time of construction (e.g. less than 20%) and tight jointed construction
• movement gaps in excess of 35mm should be protected by cover strips
• the table allows for a 2mm thickness of compressible material in closing gaps. Check the manufacturer’s product details
• outer leaf brickwork with expansion rates no greater than 2.5mm per storey
• brickwork up to 5 storeys with lightweight cladding above 5 storeys
• lightweight cladding - floor level joints to be 15mm for solid timber and 10mm for engineered I- joists.
• the ground floor is concrete. For ground floors of timber joists add 15mm for solid timber and 10mm for engineered I-joists

Stud

Bottom rail of panel

Sole plate
Structural decking

Movement

Joist Opening gap

Headbinder
Closing gap
Top rail of panel

Stud

As Built After Movement

Timber frame construction on which the
table of differential movement above is Location of opening and closing gaps at
based. windows.

Page 8 Chapter 6.2 2013

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

COMMON DETAILS
The following sketches show examples of
typical construction details and illustrate
general principles relating to differential
movement.
Further information is available from the
UKTFA document ‘Guidance on detailing
to accommodate differential movement
in timber frame buildings’. This UKTFA
publication includes guidance on: Sill not
built into Sill not
masonry built into
• the interface between a lift shaft and the Allow for masonry Allow for
movement
timber frame movement

• the interface between lightweight

cladding to the timber frame and
balconies
• the support of roofs above lift shafts etc.
constructed from masonry or concrete
• staircases within the timber frame
• services within the timber frame
• additional chimney details.
In the following sketches:- Normal reveal Check reveal

= downward movement of the timber

frame
= upward brick expansion (taken as
2.5mm per storey of clay masonry).
Allow for
movement Timber frame
The design should ensure that the material movement
used in movement joints will safely
accommodate the amount of expansion
or compression expected and, where
required, provide a weather resistant and
durable joint. See Clauses 6.2-D6 and S2.
As built After movement

6.2

2013 Chapter 6.2 Page 9

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

WINDOW HEADS WITH MASONRY CLADDING

(movement gaps in excess of 35mm should be protected by cover strips) (cavity trays omitted for clarity)

Timber frame
movement

Allow for
movement

As Built After movement

Allow for
movement
6.2

Timber frame
movement

Allow for
movement

As Built After movement

Timber frame
movement

Allow for
movement

As Built After movement

Page 10 Chapter 6.2 2013

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

WINDOW HEAD AND SILL WITH LIGHTWEIGHT CLADDING

(movement gaps in excess of 35mm should be protected by cover strips)

No differential movement No differential movement

Head with lightweight cladding Sill with lightweight cladding

ROOF TO CHIMNEY ABUTMENT

Allow
for
movement
75mm
minimum

6.2
Timber
frame
movement

As Built After movement

TIMBER FRAME INTERFACE WITH CONCRETE OR MASONRY STAIRS AND COMMON AREAS

Timber
Transition piece frame
movement

As built After movement (transition piece removed)

2013 Chapter 6.2 Page 11

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

EAVES
(movement gaps in excess of 35mm should be protected by cover strips)

Timber
frame
movement

Allow for
movement

As Built After movement

VERGE

Timber
Allow for frame
movement movement
6.2

As Built After movement

SERVICES

Timber
frame
Service passing through wall movement

Allow for
movement

As built After movement

Page 12 Chapter 6.2 2013

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

DRIVE THROUGH

Timber
frame
movement

Lintel/beam

Lintel/beam

6.2
Ceiling

Ceiling
Allow for
movement

As built After movement

Section A - A

Timber
frame
movement

Timber floor construction

Timber floor construction

Allow for
movement
Ceiling Ceiling

Drive through

Drive through

As Built After movement

Section B - B

2013 Chapter 6.2 Page 13

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

BALCONY ABUTMENTS
(movement gaps in excess of 35mm should be protected by cover strips)

Allow for
movement

Decking
Allow for
movement

Balcony structure
Decking Timber independant of timber frame
frame
movement

Balcony structure
independant of timber frame
Allow for
movement

Gap

Balcony - lightweight cladding As built After movement

Allow for
Timber movement
Allow for
frame
Allow for movement
movement
movement

Slotted
holes Slotted
holes
6.2

Balcony - masonry cladding As built After movement

Slotted hole joint

Fix to masonry cladding subject to

Sliding joint engineers details

Juliet balcony

Page 14 Chapter 6.2 2013

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

LIGHTWEIGHT WALL CLADDING - JOINT AT EACH FLOOR LEVEL

(with and without insulation in cavity)
Vertical batten

15mm*
Movement across
floor zone

Allow for
15mm*
15mm*
movement

Note: * 10mm for

engineered I-Joists

Cavity

As built After movement

LIGHTWEIGHT CLADDING AND MASONRY PLINTH

Timber
Allow for
frame
movement
movement

6.2
After movement
As built

WALLS TO FLAT ROOF ABUTMENT

75mm
Allow for minimum
movement

Timber
frame
movement

As built After movement

2013 Chapter 6.2 Page 15

 6.2
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

External timber framed walls

INDEX

A I T
Anchoring frame 1, 5 Information 3 Timber 3
B Insulation 2, 4, 6 Timber cladding 2
Balconies 14 J Timber framing 2
Breather membranes 4, 5 Joints 1 V
C L Vapour control layer 2, 4, 6
Cavities 2, 5 Loadbearing walls 1 Verge 12
Cavity barriers 3, 4, 6 M W
Certification 7 Membranes 2 Wall ties 2, 4, 6
Chimneys 11 Moisture 4 Window reveals 9
Cladding 5, 6, 10, 11, 15 Movement 3, 5 Window heads 10, 11
D N Window sill 11
Damp proof courses 1 Nails 4
Differential movement 7, 8 P
Drive through 13 Panels, fixing 5
E Plasterboard, fixing 5
Eaves 12 Preservative treatment 2, 4
Exterior cladding 2 Packing 7
F Prefabricated chimneys 3, 5
Fire control 3, 6 S
Fire-stops 3, 4, 7 Services 3, 7, 12
Fixings 4, 5 Setting out 4
Flat roof 15 Sheathing 4
H Stairs interface 11
Holding down devices 4 Staples 4
6.2

Structural elements 1
Sole plates 7

Page 16 Chapter 6.2 2013

Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Internal walls
Part 6 Superstructure (excluding roofs)

Chapter 6.3
 6.3
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Internal walls

CONTENTS SCOPE

DESIGN Clause Page This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
Requirements and recommendations for internal walls,
Design standards D1 1 including separating walls and compartment walls.
Statutory requirements D2 1
Loadbearing masonry walls D3 1
Loadbearing timber walls D4 2
Beams and lintels D5 2
Non-loadbearing internal partitions D6 2
Fire resistance D7 2
Movement joints D8 3
Sound insulation D9 3
Damp-proofing D10 4
Fireplaces and flues D11 4
Provision of information D12-D13 4

MATERIALS
Materials standards M1 4
Masonry materials M2 5
Wall ties and related items M3 5
Timber M4-M5 5
Plasterboard M6 5
Proprietary systems M7 5
Damp-proof courses M8 5
Sound insulation materials M9 5
Fire-stopping materials M10 6
Fireplaces and flues M11 6
6.3

SITEWORK
Sitework standards S1 6
Damp-proof courses S2 6
Masonry partitions S3 6
Timber stud partitions S4 7
Proprietary partitions S5 8
Separating walls S6 8
Partitions to rooms containing a WC S7 8
Walls providing fire resistance S8 9
Chimneys, flues and linings S9 9

INDEX 9
 6.3
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Internal walls

Height of Minimum compressive

DESIGN STANDARDS wall strength of brick or block unit
restraint type
joist hanger

1 or 2 storeys blocks - 2.9N/mm2

6.3 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical
Requirements bricks - 9.0N/mm2
Lowest blocks - 7.3N/mm2
Design that follows the guidance below will storey of a 3 bricks - 13.0N/mm2
be acceptable for internal walls, including storey wall
separating walls and compartment walls. or where (unless calculations show that
individual lower strengths are suitable)
storeys
STATUTORY exceed 2.7m
REQUIREMENTS Upper blocks - 2.9N/mm2
storeys of 3 bricks - 9.0N/mm2
6.3 - D2 Design shall comply with all storey wall
relevant statutory requirements
(c) lateral restraint
Design should be in accordance with
Loadbearing walls, including separating
relevant Building Regulations and other
walls should be provided with lateral
statutory requirements.
restraint:

LOADBEARING MASONRY • at each floor level, and

• at the ceiling level below a roof.
WALLS at least
Concrete floors provide adequate restraint 300mm
6.3 - D3 Loadbearing masonry internal long on
if: both joists
walls shall be designed to support and
• they have a minimum 90mm bearing
transfer loads to foundations safely and
onto the wall, or Where permitted, timber joists built into
without undue movement • they abut each side of the wall (provided separating walls may provide lateral
Structural design of masonry walls should that both floors are at, or about, the restraint but care should be taken to
be in accordance with BS EN 1996-1-1 same level). ensure that sound insulation and fire
Items to be taken into account include: Restraint straps should be provided at 2m resistance requirements are also met. See
centres to each floor when: Clauses D7 and D9.
(a) provision of foundations
Any loadbearing wall should be provided • floors are not at, or near, the same level, (d) bonding and tying
with either: and Where a separating wall abuts an external
• a foundation, or • the floor span is parallel to the wall, and wall they may be tied or bonded together.
• a means of support that transfers the • the floor is not built into the wall.
load safely to a foundation. at least 450mm
Tied joints should be formed using
expanded metal strip, wall ties or

6.3
Sleeper walls should be designed and restraint straps equivalent fixings, at maximum 300mm
at 2m centres
constructed as described in Chapter 4.4 to each floor vertical centres.
‘Strip and trench fill foundations’ (each
section). The external wall cavity should be closed
at least 450mm
at the junction with the separating wall
Where necessary, oversite concrete should with a flexible cavity stop, unless the cavity
be protected against sulfate attack by is fully filled with built-in insulation (where
the use of a polyethylene sheet dpm, not permitted).
less than 1200 gauge (0.3mm), (or 1000
Timber joists with a minimum of 90mm
gauge (0.25mm) if assessed in accordance (e) movement joints
bearing normally provide adequate lateral
with Technical Requirement R3) properly For guidance on the design of movement
restraint.
lapped. joints, reference should be made to Clause
Where timber joists are not built into a D8.
Loadbearing walls built off a concrete
masonry wall, restraint should be provided
groundbearing slab are acceptable only if (f) wall ties for cavity separating walls
at 2m centres by means of either:
the concrete forms part of a foundation Normally, the two leaves of a masonry
• restraint type joist hangers to BS EN
which is designed by an Engineer in cavity separating wall should be tied
845-1 with performance equivalent to a
accordance with Technical Requirement together to provide structural stability.
restraint strap, or
R5. The type of tie and spacing should limit
• restraint straps with a cross section of at
least 30mm x 5mm. the sound transmission across the cavity.
Foundation design should take account of
Reference should be made to Clause D9
any site investigation or ground hazards.
Where restraint is required and restraint- for details.
(b) structural elements type hangers are not used, straps should
be: In England and Wales, separating walls may
Bricks and blocks should be selected in be built in accordance with Robust Details
accordance with their intended use. The • at least 300mm long on each joist
• fixed with four fixings to each joist “Resistance to the passage of sound”.
table below gives recommended strengths
of bricks and blocks to be used in buildings • not more than 2m apart.
up to 3 storeys high:

2013 Chapter 6.3 Page 1

 6.3
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Internal walls

LOADBEARING TIMBER type of tie and spacing should limit sound (b) movement joints
transmission across the cavity. Reference should be made to Clause D8.
WALLS
To limit sound transmission, metal tie (c) method of supporting partition
6.3 - D4 Loadbearing timber internal straps should be: Walls and partitions should be supported
walls shall be designed to support and • not more than 3mm thick by the structural floor, not by a floating
transfer loads to foundations safely and • fixed below ceiling level floor that incorporates a compressible
without undue movement • spaced at least 1.2m apart horizontally. layer, unless the material is specifically
Structural design of loadbearing timber manufactured for that purpose.
Thicker ties, fixed at ceiling level or
walls should be in accordance with BS EN
more closely spaced will increase sound Preferably, masonry partitions should be
1995-1-1
transmission across the cavity. supported on:
Structural timber should be specified • other masonry partitions or walls
according to the strength classes in BS BEAMS AND LINTELS (wherever possible the design of
EN 338, eg C16 or C24. When using the dwellings should be such that first floor
BS 4978 grading rules, the timber species 6.3 - D5 Beams and lintels shall be
masonry partitions are a continuation of
should be in accordance with BS EN 1912 adequate for their purpose those on the ground floor)
or strength class specified. The strength Items to be taken into account include: • concrete floors
classes can then be determined from BS (a) loads and spans • steel or concrete beams.
EN 338 Loads and spans should be either Where steel or concrete beams are to be
Items to be taken into account include: in accordance with manufacturers’ used, it may be necessary to use padstones
recommendations or designed by an at bearings.
(a) provision of foundations
Engineer in accordance with Technical
Foundations should be provided as for
Requirement R5. Masonry partitions should not be
structural masonry walls (see Clause
supported by timber joists or beams,
D3(a)). (b) materials unless they have been designed by an
Concrete or steel lintels are suitable for Engineer in accordance with Technical
(b) structural elements
use in masonry walls. Timber lintels should Requirement R5.
Normally, individual studs, sills and
not be used to support masonry.
headplates should be 38mm x 75mm. The design should make allowance for the
Larger timber section sizes may be Lintels should extend beyond each end of relatively flexible nature of the timber and
required in order to achieve an adequate openings in masonry as follows: the relatively rigid nature of masonry.
level of fire resistance. Studs should be
spaced at maximum 600mm centres. Span [m] Minimum length of bearing Where stud partitions or proprietary
[mm] plasterboard partitions are supported by
A lintel and cripple studs should be Up to 1.2 100 a timber floor, extra noggings or joists
provided to any opening except when should be specified, unless it can be shown
Over 1.2 150
the stud spacing is unaffected. Normally, that the deck can transfer the load without
6.3

multiple studs should be provided to Where structurally necessary, padstones undue movement.
support multiple joists. should be provided under the bearings of
Allowance should be made for the
Where internal walls are made up of lintels and beams. Reference should be
possible deflection of floors at the head
panels, structural continuity should be made to Chapter 6.5 ‘Steelwork support to
of partitions to prevent the partition
maintained, for example by the use of a upper floors and partitions’.
becoming loadbearing.
continuous top binder.
NON-LOADBEARING
INTERNAL PARTITIONS
6.3 - D6 Non-loadbearing partitions
continuous
shall have adequate strength and be
top binder adequately supported floor deflects gap for
when loaded possible
Items to be taken into account include: deflection

(a) partition construction

The following constructions are
acceptable:
• partitions of brick or block construction
• timber stud partitions using studs,
sills and headplates nominally 63mm x
38mm. Studs should be spaced to suit
the thickness of plasterboard used, as
cripple studs support
loadbearing lintels follows:
-- not more than 450mm spacing for
9.5mm boards
FIRE RESISTANCE
-- not more than 600mm spacing for 6.3 - D7 Internal walls shall, where
10mm to 20mm boards necessary, have adequate resistance to
Framing joints should be secured with not the spread of fire
• proprietary partitions of plasterboard,
less than two nails per joint. strawboard or other material, detailed The guidance below applies in England,
and constructed in accordance with Wales, Northern Ireland and the Isle of
(c) wall ties for cavity separating walls
manufacturers’ recommendations. Man. In Scotland, reference should be
For timber framed separating walls, ties
made to statutory requirements.
should be specified in accordance with the
system designer’s recommendations. The

Page 2 Chapter 6.3 2013

 6.3
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Internal walls

Items to be taken into account include: made to Chapter 6.2 ‘External timber methods, where permitted, cannot enter
(a) fire resistance of internal walls framed walls’ for further information. the separating wall cavity.
In houses up to 2 storeys, the following
In masonry cavity separating walls, where
walls should be fire-resisting: MOVEMENT JOINTS the cavity is up to 75mm, flexible wall ties
• loadbearing walls (half-hour minimum)
6.3 - D8 Masonry walls shall, where should be used, such as:
• separating walls (one hour minimum)
necessary, be provided with movement • butterfly type ties, or
• walls between a house and an integral or
joints • ties assessed for the purpose.
attached garage (half-hour minimum).
Movement joints should be provided in Where structural design permits, the
In houses of 3 or more storeys, in addition
straight unbroken lengths of wall as shown omission of ties will enhance sound
to the above, the walls enclosing the
in the following table: insulation.
staircase should have half-hour fire
resistance. Type of brick Joint width Normal spacing
Ties should be spaced 900mm horizontally
or block [mm] and 450mm vertically. Closer spacing
For flats, the following walls should be
Clay brick 16 12m (15m max)
will increase sound transmission. Wider
fire-resisting:
spacing may impair structural stability.
• loadbearing walls within the flat (half- Calcium 10 7.5 to 9m
silicate brick
Rigid ties transmit sound more readily than
hour for up to 2 storeys, one hour for 3
flexible ties.
or more storeys) Concrete 10 6m
• separating walls, compartment walls and block and Chases for services should be kept to a
walls enclosing protected shafts, such as brick minimum and be well filled with mortar.
staircases (normally one hour)
• other walls enclosing hallways within Movement joints in foundations should be (c) flanking transmission
flats, half-hour. continued through the superstructure. The construction of the flanking wall,
including the position of openings in it, will
(b) fire-stopping SOUND INSULATION have an impact on sound transmission.
Fire-resisting walls should be fire-stopped The requirements of statutory regulations
or constructed to resist fire spread: 6.3 - D9 Internal walls shall, where should be followed.
• at their perimeter necessary, have adequate resistance to
• at junctions with other fire-resisting the transmission of sound (d) partitions to rooms containing a WC
walls, floors and roofs Items to be taken into account include: The guidance below applies in Scotland,
• where openings are formed for doors, Northern Ireland and the Isle of Man. In
(a) all separating walls
pipes, etc. England and Wales reference should be
In England and Wales, separating walls
made to statutory requirements.
The following details should be designed may be built in accordance with Robust
carefully: Details Part E “Resistance to the passage PARTITION PERFORMANCE
• the junction between a separating or of sound”. Any partition between a room containing
compartment wall and a pitched roof or For details of separating walls in timber a WC and a living room, dining room, study

6.3
a flat roof frame construction, reference should be or bedroom should have a weighted sound
• where pipes and cables penetrate a fire- made to Chapter 6.2 ‘External timber reduction index of not less than 38dB over
resisting wall (reference should also be framed walls’. the frequency range 100-3150Hz, when
made to Chapter 8.1 ‘Internal services’ tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 140-4.
(Design and Sitework)). To ensure an adequate level of sound This does not apply to a partition between
insulation for masonry separating walls: a WC and a bedroom where the WC forms
The wall dividing an integral or attached • statutory requirements may permit the
garage and the floor above should act an en-suite facility to the bedroom.
building in of joist ends into separating
together to provide adequate resistance to walls. Where permitted there should be The following methods of construction
fire spread. If there is either no ceiling or a mortar joint around the joist perimeter will achieve the performance level stated
no floor to the space above the ceiling to and the face of the joint pointed with above.
the garage, vertical fire separation may be silicone sealant
required. • all joints in the separating wall should be BLOCKWORK PARTITIONS
fully filled with mortar Blocks having a density of not less than
When fire-stopping against timber
• flexible cavity stops should be provided 600kg/m3 finished on both sides with
construction, it is important to specify
at the junction of separating walls with 13mm of plaster are acceptable.
compressible material, such as mineral
wool, to allow timber shrinkage to take external walls Blockwork should be tied in every course
place without affecting the fire-stopping. • avoid any reduction in the thickness of to adjoining walls, with the joints filled
masonry, but where this is unavoidable, solid.
(c) provision of cavity barriers eg to accommodate electrical sockets,
All internal walls of hollow or cavity positions on opposite sides of the For details of bonding and tying, reference
construction, whether fire-resisting or not, separating wall should be staggered. should be made to Sitework clause 6.3 -
should have cavity barriers installed at S3(d).
their perimeter and at junctions with fire- Care should be taken when specifying
resisting floors and walls. dry lining to masonry separating walls. TIMBER STUDWORK
The thickness of plasterboard layers, Timber studwork is acceptable if used
For cavity separating walls of masonry the method of fixing and sealing may be with one of the following combinations of
construction, the top of the wall needs to critical. For fixing details, reference should materials:
be closed for fire resistance. be made to BS 8212.
Timber framed separating walls should (b) cavity separating walls
be specified with cavity barriers of wire Cavity separating walls should be
reinforced mineral wool at junctions with constructed so that any external cavity
floors and ceilings. Reference should be wall insulation placed by blown or pumped

2013 Chapter 6.3 Page 3

 6.3
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Internal walls

cavity separating
wall FIREPLACES AND FLUES
6.3 - D11 Fireplaces and flues
membranes
and dpcs
See Chapter 6.8 ‘Fireplaces, chimneys and
linked flues’.
two layers one layer of
of 12.5mm 12.5mm protection to
vertical dpm
plasterboard
each side
+
plasterboard
each side
+
PROVISION OF
no insulation 25mm
mineral
wool quilt
INFORMATION
dpm
6.3 - D12 Designs and specifications
shall be produced in a clearly
concrete cavity
fill below dpc understandable format and include all
relevant information
Drawings should give full information,
including:
• wall layout, with all dimensions shown
• position and size of openings and lintels
Dpcs should be included below the • details at junctions, indicating fire-
following: stopping where applicable
5mm plaster
coat on one
one layer of
12mm • non-loadbearing partitions built off an • details of wall constructions and
layer of
9.5mm
panel board
each side in-situ ground slab with a dpm applied to materials, ties and restraints
plasterboard
each side
+
75mm the top of the slab • details of foundations where required.
+ mineral wool
25mm quilt
mineral wool 6.3 - D13 All relevant information shall
quilt
screed on be distributed to appropriate personnel
dpm above
partition on dpc slab
above polyethylene Ensure that design and specification
dpm
information is issued to site supervisors
and relevant specialist subcontractors and/
or suppliers.
Other forms of timber studwork
construction will be acceptable provided Where proprietary components are to be
the criteria given under PARTITION used, manufacturers usually have specific
PERFORMANCE is achieved and requirements for fixing and/or assembly
independent evidence of performance is of their products. This information should
available at the request of NHBC. also be made available for reference
on site so that work can be carried out
6.3

Where two thicknesses of board are used,

satisfactorily in accordance with the design
the joints should be staggered and the
and specification.
joints in the outer layer properly filled.
applied dpm
Top plates, bottom plates and end studs such as mastic

should be secured and sealed to the partition dpc

asphalt above
slab MATERIALS STANDARDS
adjoining structure so that sound paths
6.3 - M1 All materials shall:
cannot develop following shrinkage and/or dpc and
(a) meet the Technical Requirements
deflection of the timber. dpm linked
(b) take account of the design
PROPRIETARY PARTITIONS Materials that comply with the design and
Certain proprietary partition systems the guidance below will be acceptable for
meet the required standard. The partition internal walls, including separating walls
manufacturer should have independent and compartment walls.
test evidence of the system’s performance.
Materials for internal walls should comply
with all relevant standards, including those
DAMP-PROOFING • partitions that may be adversely listed below. Where no standard exists,
6.3 - D10 Internal walls shall be affected by residual damp (eg stud Technical Requirement R3 applies (see
designed to provide adequate resistance partitions) built off any type of concrete Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards
to moisture from the ground floor. and Technical Requirements’).
Loadbearing walls built off foundation References to British Standards and Codes
walls should have a dpc at their base at stud partition of Practice include those made under the
on dpc
least the width of the wall. The dpc should Construction Products Directive (89/106/
link with any adjoining dpm. EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
European Technical Specifications
Where steps are necessary in the ground
approved by a European Committee for
floor slab, a dpc should be incorporated as
Standardisation (CEN).
a continuous link between the upper and
lower dpcs. The vertical part of the dpc
should be protected from damage during
construction.

dpm below slab

Page 4 Chapter 6.3 2013

 6.3
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Internal walls

MASONRY MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified by the brick PLASTERBOARD

or block manufacturer, ordinary Portland
6.3 - M2 Masonry shall comply with cement to BS EN 197 may be used. Sulfate- 6.3 - M6 Plasterboard shall be of a
relevant standards resisting Portland cement should be used, suitable thickness for its intended use
Items to be taken into account include: where necessary (see Chapter 6.1 ‘External Plasterboard should be to BS 1230.
(a) precast concrete blocks masonry walls’ (Materials)). Plasterboard thickness should be:
Concrete blocks should comply with BS Admixtures, retarded mortars and pre- • 9.5mm for stud spacing up to 450mm
EN 771. mixed mortars may be used in accordance • 12.5mm for stud spacing up to 600mm.

When used in loadbearing partitions, with the manufacturer’s recommendations, For sound-resisting walls (separating
blocks should have the minimum provided those of the masonry walls and walls to WC compartments), the
compressive strength required by manufacturer agree. correct thickness, number of layers of
the design. The table below gives plasterboard sheets and sealing should be
recommended strengths of blocks to be WALL TIES AND RELATED specified (see Design clause 6.3 - D9).
used in specific cases: ITEMS Tapered edge boards should be used where
Height of wall Minimum compressive 6.3 - M3 Walls ties and related items the plasterboard is to be jointed only
strength of block unit shall be of the appropriate type and before decoration.
1 or 2 storeys blocks - 2.9N/mm2 strength and shall have adequate Dry lining systems should comply with
Lowest storey of blocks - 7.3N/mm2 durability BS 8212. Reference should be made to
a 3 storey wall or (unless calculations show Chapter 8.2 ‘Wall and ceiling finishes’ (each
where individual that lower strengths are WALL TIES FOR SEPARATING WALLS
storeys exceed
section) for further details.
suitable) Wall ties should either:
2.7m
• be butterfly type, or
Upper storeys of 3 blocks - 2.9N/mm2 • have been tested to show that PROPRIETARY SYSTEMS
storey wall their design meets with statutory 6.3 - M7 Prefabricated proprietary
requirements. partition systems shall be suitable for
Where buildings are more than 3 storeys their purpose
Wall ties for timber frame separating walls
in height, masonry should be designed in
should be not more than 40mm x 3mm in Proprietary partitions should be specified
accordance with Technical Requirement R5
cross section. in accordance with the manufacturer’s
using the block strength specified by the
recommendations.
designer. HANGERS, STRAPS, ETC
Joist hangers, restraint straps, bond ties,
The maximum loadbearing capacity
etc should be protected against corrosion.
DAMP-PROOF COURSES
of the wall should not exceed the
recommendations of the manufacturer. Ferrous metals with the following levels of 6.3 - M8 Materials for damp-proofing
protection are acceptable: shall adequately resist the passage of
In some partitions to WC compartments

6.3
• post-galvanizing to BS 729, or moisture
and all separating walls, blocks should have • pre-galvanizing to BS 2989. Materials which are acceptable for use as
at least the minimum density required by
Restraint straps for use in masonry dpcs include:
the design in order to achieve the required
construction should have a minimum cross • bitumen to BS 6398
sound insulation.
section of 30mm x 5mm. • polyethylene to BS 6515
Where special blocks/pipes are • proprietary materials assessed in
used for flues, the manufacturer’s accordance with Technical Requirement
recommendations should be checked.
TIMBER R3.
Special materials may be required around 6.3 - M4 Timber shall be of the
appropriate grades and sizes to support Dpcs should be not less than the width of
the blocks/pipes.
the imposed loads the wall or partition.
(b) bricks
Preferably, regularised timber should
Bricks should comply with the relevant
be used for stud partitions. Structural
SOUND INSULATION
British Standards:
• clay bricks should comply with BS EN timber should be specified according to MATERIALS
771-1 the strength classes in BS EN 338, eg C16 6.3 - M9 Materials used for sound
• calcium silicate bricks should comply or C24. When using the BS 4978 grading insulation shall be of a suitable
with BS EN 771-2 rules, the timber species should be thickness and density
• concrete bricks should comply with BS included in accordance with BS EN 1912 or
class strength specified. The strength class Normally, mineral wool quilt should be
EN 771-3.
can then be determined from BS EN 338. used for acoustic insulation in partitions.
When used in a separating wall, bricks The thickness and density should be as
should have at least the minimum density Finger joints should comply with BS EN required by the design.
required by the design. A lighter brick 385 and timber for dry lining with BS 8212.
may not provide a suitable level of sound 6.3 - M5 Timber shall have a suitable
resistance.
moisture content
For bricks suitable for use in chimneys To minimise drying shrinkage, timber
reference should be made to Chapter 6.8 should have a moisture content not
‘Fireplaces, chimneys and flues’. greater than 20%.
(c) mortar Structural softwood for internal use should
A mortar of 1 : 1 : 5½, cement : lime : sand, be dry graded to BS 4978 and marked
with plasticiser is suitable for both internal ‘DRY’ or ‘KD’.
and external walls.

2013 Chapter 6.3 Page 5

 6.3
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Internal walls

FIRE-STOPPING (b) construction sequence

Walling should be constructed in lifts/
MATERIALS stud partition stages to prevent distortion of wall panels
on dpc
6.3 - M10 Fire-stopping materials shall during construction.
be suitable to resist the passage of fire
(c) mortar mix and joints
Suitable fire-stopping materials include: MIX
• mineral wool Make sure the correct mix is used. A
• cement mortar mortar of 1 : 1 : 5½, cement : lime : sand,
• gypsum plaster with plasticiser is suitable for both internal
• intumescent mastic or preformed strip and external walls.
• proprietary sealing systems (particularly
those designed for service penetrations) Unless otherwise specified, ordinary
dpm below slab
assessed in accordance with Technical Portland cement may be used. Sulfate-
Requirement R3 to maintain the fire resisting Portland cement should be used,
resistance of the wall. A dpc should be provided below all internal where necessary (see Chapter 6.1 ‘External
walls where the dpm is applied to the top masonry walls’ (Sitework)).
FIREPLACES AND FLUES
surface of the slab. Mixers should be maintained and cleaned
6.3 - M11 Fireplaces and flues to function properly.
The dpcs should be at least the width of
See Chapter 6.8 ‘Fireplaces, chimneys and the partition. Where dpcs join, the lap Mortar should be used within 2 hours,
flues’. should be at least 100mm. unless it is a retarded mortar. Mortar
should not be re-tempered after setting
SITEWORK STANDARDS has commenced.
screed on
dpm above
6.3 - S1 All sitework shall:
partition on dpc
above polyethylene
slab RETARDED MORTAR
(a) meet the Technical Requirements
dpm Retarded mortar should not be used
(b) take account of the design beyond the time specified by the supplier.
(c) follow established good practice and Retarded mortar should not be used during
workmanship cold weather.
Sitework that follows the design and the
guidance below will be acceptable for ADDITIVES
internal walls, including separating walls Where plasticisers or other additives are to
and compartment walls. be used, the manufacturer’s instructions
should be followed. An air entraining agent
can help reduce frost damage but it is not
DAMP-PROOF COURSES
6.3

an anti-freeze. The recommended quantity

6.3 - S2 Damp-proof courses shall be of air entraining agent should be carefully
installed to prevent moisture entering MASONRY PARTITIONS measured for each batch in accordance
the building with the manufacturer’s instructions.
6.3 - S3 Construction of masonry
A dpc should be provided below all internal walls shall ensure adequate
MORTAR JOINTS
loadbearing walls built off foundation stability All bricks and blocks should be laid on a
walls. The dpc should be linked with any full bed of mortar.
Items to be taken into account include:
adjoining dpm.
(a) setting out and workmanship All perpends should be solidly filled.
The dpm may be either continuous or Partitions should be accurately set out in
formed by two separate overlapping accordance with the design. If walls are to be finished with wet plaster,
pieces. joints should be raked out square to a
All work should be reasonably plane and shallow depth to provide a key.
true. Walls should be plumbed and courses
dpc linked
levelled by using lines and spirit levels. For dry lining, mortar joints should be
with dpm struck off flush.
below partition Openings should be formed to the correct
size and shape. Templates should be used, For information on dry lining masonry
where necessary. walls, reference should be made to Chapter
8.2 ‘Wall and ceiling finishes’ (Sitework).

(d) bonding and tying

dpm
below slab
A regular bonding pattern should be
maintained. All masonry walls and
partitions should be fully bonded or tied,
as required by the design.
Dpcs should be provided below timber
partitions where directly fixed to floor Either:
slabs, even if there is a dpm beneath the • tooth every alternate course, or
slab. This is to prevent residual moisture in • tie with expanded metal or equivalent, at
the concrete affecting the timber. centres not exceeding 300mm vertically.

Page 6 Chapter 6.3 2013

 6.3
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Internal walls

(f) size, location and support of lintels

bonded and beams
connection
Lintels should be the correct size for the
opening and have the correct bearing at
each end:

Span [m] Minimum bearing [mm]

Up to 1.2 100
Over 1.2 150

Long lintels may require padstones. Lintels

should bear on a full block where possible
and be installed level on a solid bed of
mortar. Soft or non-durable packing should
tied
connection not be used.
Studs should be spaced at centres to
Small pieces of cut bricks or blocks suit the plasterboard thickness. Extra
should not be used around lintel bearings. studs should be provided at openings, as
Concrete lintels should be the right way up. required by the design.
reinforced concrete
lintel right way up (b) size of timber members
Loadbearing timber partitions should be
constructed in accordance with the design.
Unless designed otherwise, the minimum
lintel bearing
on full block, specification for all partitions should be:
Joist filling should be brick or blockwork, where possible
• sill and head plates 63mm x 38mm
without excessive mortar joints. Bricks and
• studs 63mm x 38mm at maximum
blocks should not be mixed.
600mm centres
To avoid cracking, bricks and blocks or • framing joints secured with not less than
blocks of different types should not be 2 nails per joint
mixed in the same wall. • blocking/nogging for support of
Where steel beams are to be used,
plasterboard 43mm x 38mm
different masonry types used to adjust coursing reference should be made to Chapter 6.5
• blocking/nogging for other purposes
‘Steelwork support to upper floors and
63mm x 38mm.
partitions’ (Sitework) for guidance on steel
beam sizes and the need for padstones. (c) support and fixings
Partitions should be firmly fixed to each

6.3
(g) restraint strapping other and to abutting walls. Noggings
Joists built into masonry walls provide or extra studs should be used, where
adequate lateral restraint. necessary.
Restraint straps may be required by the
incorrect use of different masonry types
design. If so, they should be fitted before
new masonry is built above.

(e) chasing for services

Chases can reduce the sound insulation
value of a wall and should be cut only
where required by the design. Impact extra stud

power tools that can damage the wall

should not be used.
The depth of horizontal chases should
not exceed one-sixth the thickness of the
single leaf, and vertical chases, one-third restraint strap
the thickness. Hollow blocks should not be at least 300mm
long on
chased, unless specifically permitted by both joists

the manufacturer.
Partitions should be fixed at head and base
TIMBER STUD PARTITIONS to noggings or joists.

horizontal 6.3 - S4 Construction of timber stud

chase no
deeper than internal walls shall ensure adequate
one-sixth
block stability
thickness
Items to be taken into account include:
(a) setting out and workmanship
Partitioning should be correctly positioned,
square and plumb.
vertical chase no deeper
than one-third block thickness

2013 Chapter 6.3 Page 7

 6.3
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Internal walls

fixing to
nogging
Fixing and finishing plasterboard partitions TIMBER SEPARATING WALLS
should be in accordance with Chapter 8.2 The design details should be carefully
‘Wall and ceiling finishes’ (Sitework). followed. There should be no gaps in the:
• mineral wool quilt
PROPRIETARY PARTITIONS • plasterboard layers
• fire-stopping.
6.3 - S5 Proprietary partitions
shall be erected in accordance with Services should not penetrate the
manufacturers’ recommendations plasterboard layers. They should be fixed
in front of the plasterboard.
Partitioning should be correctly positioned,
square and plumb. The manufacturer’s PARTITIONS TO ROOMS
recommended construction sequence
fixing to
nogging
should be followed.
CONTAINING A WC
6.3 - S7 Partitions to rooms containing
Timber or other additional fixings should a WC shall provide adequate sound
be provided for radiators, electrical outlets,
insulation, where required by the design
switches and the like.
The guidance below applies in Scotland,
Northern Ireland and the Isle of Man. In
SEPARATING WALLS England and Wales the design should be
6.3 - S6 Construction of separating checked to see how sound insulation is to
walls shall ensure adequate sound be achieved.
PARTITION PARALLEL TO JOIST insulation
A partition between a room containing
fixing to joist MASONRY SEPARATING WALLS a WC and a living room, dining room,
The correct density of block should be study or bedroom (except where the WC
used. Holes, voids, even hairline cracks, is en-suite) should have adequate sound
can significantly reduce the effectiveness insulation.
of a sound-insulating wall.
Most masonry partitions provide adequate
To maintain sound insulation: sound insulation without additional
• fully fill all mortar beds and perpends treatment.
• use only butterfly or other approved wall
Some methods of providing adequate
ties for cavities up to 75mm wide
sound insulation with a timber stud
• space wall ties 900mm minimum
partition are shown below:
horizontally and 450mm minimum
vertically
• stagger the positions of electrical socket
6.3

outlets on opposite sides of separating

walls
fixing to joist • tie in or tooth bond to adjoining walls to two layers one layer of
of 12.5mm 12.5mm
improve rigidity of separating wall plasterboard plasterboard
each side each side
PARTITION AT RIGHT ANGLES TO JOIST
• where joist ends are built into separating + +
no insulation 25mm
walls fully fill the spaces around the mineral
Internal partitions should not be wedged joists with mortar and point around the
wool quilt

against ceiling joists or roof trusses. This joist perimeter with silicone sealant as
does not allow for ceiling deflection/ required by the design
movement and can damage the ceiling • chases for services should be well filled
boards. with mortar.
Partitions should not be over-wedged at floor Solid separating walls should be taken
level. This could damage floor boarding. through the inner leaf of a cavity external
Noggings should be provided to support wall using metal ties to provide rigidity.
fittings, such as radiators, wall mounted However, if the same blocks are used for
boilers, sanitary fittings, kitchen units, etc. both walls, tooth bonding is acceptable.
5mm plaster one layer of
coat on one 12mm
layer of panel board
separating wall taken 9.5mm each side
through and tied to inner leaf plasterboard +
dense each side 75mm
block + mineral wool
separating 25mm quilt
wall mineral wool
quilt

nogging
supports
radiator
Where two layers of plasterboard are used,
the joints should be staggered and the
joints in the outer layer properly filled.
lightweight block inner leaf
Proprietary plasterboard partitions usually
need an additional layer of plasterboard
to one or both sides of the partition to
provide adequate sound insulation.

Page 8 Chapter 6.3 2013

 6.3
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Internal walls

WALLS PROVIDING FIRE

RESISTANCE
6.3 - S8 Internal walls shall, where
required, have adequate resistance to
fire spread
Items to be taken into account include:
(a) separating wall construction
Junctions between separating walls
and roofs should be firestopped to the
underside of the tiling to prevent fire
spreading between dwellings.
The separating wall should stop about
25mm below the top of adjacent roof
trusses.
Soft packing, such as mineral wool, should
be used above and below the roofing
underlay, to allow for movement in roof
timbers and prevent ‘hogging’ of the tiles.

6.3
It is important that a cavity barrier is
provided within boxed eaves. The cavity
barrier should be wire reinforced mineral
wool blanket, at least 50mm thick, nailed
to the rafter and carefully cut to shape to
fully seal the boxed eaves.

(b) penetration of fire-resisting walls by

services
Pipes, cables and ducting should be
firestopped where they pass through fire-
resisting walls, including:
• separating walls
• compartment walls
• walls to ducts serving flats.
The design requirements for firestopping
should be checked and making good
completed neatly.

CHIMNEYS, FLUES AND

LININGS
6.3 - S9 Construction of chimneys,
flues and linings
See Chapter 6.8 ‘Fireplaces, chimneys and
flues’.

2013 Chapter 6.3 Page 9

 6.3
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Internal walls

INDEX

A J S
Additives 6 Joints 6 Separating walls 1, 2, 3, 5
B Joist hangers 5 Services 7, 9
Beams 7 L Setting out 6, 7
Blockwork 3 Lateral restraint 1 Sound insulation 3, 5
Bonding 1, 6 Lintels 7 Studwork 3
Bricks 5 M Support 2, 7
C Masonry 5, 6, 8 T
Cavity barriers 3 Moisture resistance 4, 5, 6 Timber 5
Cavity walls 1, 3 Mortar 5, 6 Timber stud partitions 7
Chasing 7 Movement joints 1, 2, 3 Timber walls 2, 8
Chimneys 9 P Tying 1, 6
Concrete blocks 5 Partitions 2, 3, 4, 6 W
D Plasterboard 5 Wall ties 1, 2, 5
Damp proofing 4, 6 Precast blocks 5 WCs 3, 8
Durability 5 Proprietary systems 5 Workmanship 6, 7
F R
Fireplaces 4, 6 Restraint straps 5, 7
Fire stopping 3, 6
Fixings 4, 7
Flanking transmission, 3
sound
Flues 4, 6, 9
Foundations 1, 2
6.3

Page 10 Chapter 6.3 2013

Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Part 6 Superstructure (excluding roofs)

Timber and concrete upper floors

Chapter 6.4
 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

CONTENTS

DESIGN Clause Page APPENDIX 6.4-A

Design standards D1 1 Span tables for timber floor joists 13
Statutory requirements D2 1
Upper floor design D3 1 INDEX 16
Timber floor joists D4 1
Trimmer joists D5 2
Strutting of floor joists D6 2 SCOPE
Joist hangers D7-D8 2-3
Joist support at separating walls D9 3
This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
Restraint strapping D10 3
Requirements and recommendations for the construction of
Structural steel in floors D11 3 timber and concrete upper floors.
Fire spread D12-D13 3
Floor decking D14 4
Concrete floors D15 4
Floors between dwellings D16-D17 4
Provision of information D18-D19 4

MATERIALS
Materials standards M1 4
Timber floors M2-M4 4
Joist hangers and restraint straps M5 5
Strutting M6 5
Floor decking M7 5
Sound insulation M8 5
Structural steel in floors M9 5
6.4

Concrete and reinforcement M10 5

Proprietary systems M11 5

SITEWORK
Sitework standards S1 5
Timber floors S2 5
Joist hangers S3-S4 6
Trimmed and trimming joists S5-S6 6-7
Multiple joists S7 7
Strutting of floors S8 8
Notching and drilling S9 9
Restraint strapping S10-S12 9 - 10
Overlapping and butted joists S13 10
Floor decking: general S14-S16 10
Softwood boarding S17 11
Chipboard flooring S18-S19 11
Oriented strand board flooring S20 11
Plywood flooring S21 11
Other floor decking S22 12
Floors between dwellings S23 12
Concrete floors S24-S25 12
In-situ concrete S26 12
Precast concrete S27 12
Fire-stopping S28 13
 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

timber)’ (Design). I-joists and metal web

DESIGN STANDARDS I-joist
joists should not be built into solid external
walls.
6.4 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical
Requirements Concrete floors should normally have a
metal web minimum bearing of 90mm on masonry
Design that follows the guidance below
walls.
will be acceptable for timber and concrete
upper floors.
TIMBER FLOOR JOISTS
The support reaction due to dead and
STATUTORY imposed loads on the floor should not
6.4 - D4 Floor joists shall be adequate
for the spans and imposed loads
REQUIREMENTS exceed the recommended value specified
by the manufacturers of I-joists and metal Items to be taken into account include:
6.4 - D2 Design shall comply with all
web joists. (a) design
relevant statutory requirements
Where necessary, I-joists should have Structural timber for solid joists is
Design should be in accordance with normally specified as strength Class C16
web stiffeners at the locations of
relevant Building Regulations and other or C24. Tables giving the permitted clear
concentrated loads in accordance with the
statutory requirements. span for joists of strength Class C16 and
manufacturer’s recommendations.
C24 are given in the TRADA Technology
UPPER FLOOR DESIGN Ltd publication “Span tables for solid
timber members in floors, ceilings and
6.4 - D3 Upper floors shall be designed web
stiffeners
roofs (excluding trussed rafter roofs) for
to support and transmit loads safely to
dwellings” reproduced in Appendix 6.4-A.
the supporting structure without undue
deflection I-joists and metal web joists should
be specified in accordance with the
Items to be taken into account include:
manufacturer’s instructions and the
(a) dead and imposed loads following deflection limits based on total
The dead loads should include the weight dead and imposed loads for combined
of the following: intermediate bearing end bearing
bending and shear; 0.003 times the span
• floor structure, decking and finishes with a maximum deflection of 14mm if
• ceilings and applied finishes Metal web joists should have uprights at strutting is provided or 12mm if strutting is
• walls and partitions supported by the the supports between the flanges held in not provided.
floor place by punched metal plate fasteners.
• permanent fixtures such as boilers, I-joists and metal web joists should not be
Other support options are either top or
watertanks, etc. used in situations where any part of the
bottom chord (flange) support, designed by
joist is exposed to external conditions.
Imposed loads are the variable loads the manufacturer.

6.4
imposed when the building is in use. They (b) joist sizes
include the weight of furniture and people. Solid timber joist sizes are given in the
BS EN 1991-1-1 recommends an imposed span tables in BS 8103-3. Where the
loading allowance of 1.5kN/m2 for self tables do not apply or where there are
contained dwellings. concentrated loads, floor joists should be
designed by an Engineer in accordance
Where the design includes communal areas
with Technical Requirement R5.
serving flats or maisonettes, refer to BS EN uprights at
1991-1-1 for recommended imposed loads. end bearing
Regularised timber is recommended for
floor joists. The section sizes in the tables
Information concerning balconies is given
reproduced in Appendix 6.4-A should be
in Chapter 7.1 ‘Flat roofs and balconies’
regularised, or be ALS or CLS to enable
(Design and Sitework).
floors and ceilings to be level.
(b) supporting structure I-joists and metal web joists should
The floor structure should have an be specified in accordance with
adequate bearing on the supporting manufacturers’ instructions.
structure. Timber joists should normally
have a minimum bearing as shown in the (c) joist spacing
table. Joists should not be spaced at centres
Type of timber Minimum bearing [mm]
uprights at
intermediate bearing
greater than 600mm.
joist End support Intermediate When planning joist spacings, a clearance
support of 25mm to 75mm between the first joist
Solid joist on 90 (75) 90 (75) and the wall face should be allowed. This
masonry walls Joists may be supported on joist hangers helps when installing services and fixing
Solid joist on 75 75 or on internal load bearing walls. Where floorboards.
timber wall plate permitted they may be built into the inner
I-joist 90 (45) 90 leaf of an external cavity wall. Where joists (d) support of lightweight partitions
Metal web joist 90 (75) 90 are built into the inner leaf care should be Multiple solid timber joists supporting
taken to ensure air-tightness. Where solid lightweight non-loadbearing partitions
Note timber joists are built into solid external running parallel to the joists should be
Figures in brackets should only be used walls, they should be pre-treated with suitably fixed together (see Sitework
when the joist is not providing restraint to preservative in accordance with Chapter clause 6.4 -S7).
the wall. 2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural solid

2013 Chapter 6.4 Page 1

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

I-joists and metal web joists should either: TRIMMER JOISTS STRUTTING OF FLOOR
• be positioned centrally below a non-
loadbearing partition (if necessary 6.4 - D5 Adequately sized trimmer JOISTS
they can be doubled or tripled up in joists shall be provided around floor 6.4 - D6 Strutting shall be adequate
accordance with the manufacturer’s openings to distribute loads and limit movement
instructions), or Trimmed openings may be needed around within floors.
• support the weight of the non- staircase openings and chimneys. Solid
loadbearing partition by noggings or Herringbone strutting or blocking should
trimmed joists may be supported using
bearers to the two adjacent joists. be provided at the ends of solid joists
either:
Unless designed otherwise the noggings where they:
• joist hangers
should not be less than 38 x 90mm • bear onto steelwork
• notches
at 600mm centres and fixed with • bear onto intermediate walls
• support battens (light loading only)
metal clips.The sole plate of the non- • are supported on joist hangers.
• tusked tenon joints.
loadbearing partition should be fixed to Where solid joists span over 2.5m
the noggings. I-joists and metal web trimmed joists
additional strutting should also be
may be supported using joist hangers. If
specified as follows:
an I-joist is used as a trimmer to support
another I-joist, backer blocks should be Joist span [m] Rows of strutting
provided on both sides of the web of the
Under 2.5 none needed
trimmer.
I - joist 2.5 to 4.5 1 (at centre of span)
Over 4.5 2 (at equal spacing)

Herringbone strutting should be used

whenever possible as blocking can be
affected by shrinkage of both blocking and
joists.
non-loadbearing partition
supported by noggings
Metal strutting systems are also acceptable
for solid joists if assessed in accordance
with Technical Requirement R3.
Where required, strutting for I-joists should
be provided in accordance with the table
above.

backer blocks Where required, strutting for metal web

joists should be in accordance with the
6.4

following table;
metal web

Joist span [m] Rows of bracing

4.0 to 8.0 1 (at centre of span)
If a metal web joist is used as a trimming Over 8.0 2 (at equal spacing)
(e) support of masonry partitions joist to support another metal web joist,
Where first floor masonry partitions timber uprights should be provided For metal web joists, bracing (strongbacks)
cannot be built overground floor masonry between the flanges of the trimmer. should be provided.
walls, steel or reinforced concrete beams
should be specified to support the
partition to avoid the effects of shrinkage
and long term deflection which can occur single or double
with timber beams. It is not acceptable trimmer as required
by the design
bracing (strongback)

to support masonry partitions on joists

unless they are designed by an Engineer
in accordance with Technical Requirement JOIST HANGERS
R5.
timber upright 6.4 - D7 Joist hangers shall be suitable
(f) heavy loads for the joist type, width and depth, the
Bearers or additional joists should be strength of masonry and the required
specified under heavy loads. Where I-joists load
and metal web joists are used refer to the
For solid timber joists the hanger should
manufacturer’s detail. Trimmed openings should be designed in
be the full depth of the joists.
accordance with Technical Requirement R5
(g) adverse effects of shrinkage or other authoritative guidance. For I-joists:
andmoisture • the hanger should be the full depth of
Timber adjacent to heat sources, such Further information concerning staircases
the joists and restrain the top flange, or
as flues, boilers and hot water cylinders, is given in Chapter 6.6 ‘Staircases’ (Design
• be at least 0.6 x the depth of the joist
is more susceptible to drying shrinkage. and Sitework).
and full depth stiffeners should be fixed
Structural softwood for internal use should to both sides of the web.
be dry graded to BS 4978 (incorporating
BS EN 518) or BS EN 519 and marked ‘DRY’
or ‘KD’.

Page 2 Chapter 6.4 2013

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

For metal web joists: required. In buildings of not more than two Flanges of metal web joists should not
• the hanger should be the full depth of storeys where restraint type joist hangers, be notched. Joists can bear directly into
the joist and restrain the top flange or, assessed in accordance with Technical the steel beam if there is at least 75mm
• top flange restraint should be provided Requirement R3 are used or where joists bearing on the bottom flange of the steel
(see Sitework clause 6.4-S4). are built into a wall and bear at least beam. Timber uprights should be provided
90mm on the wall no restraint straps are between the flanges and 38mm x 97mm
A timber upright should be fixed between
required along the joists. noggings should be provided between the
the flanges of metal web joists.
uprights. If the bearing is less than 75mm
Joist hangers should meet with the STRUCTURAL STEELWORK metal web joists can be supported on their
requirements of BS EN 845-1 or be top flange and their bottom flange should
assessed in accordance with Technical
IN FLOORS be fixed to timber blocking supported on
Requirement R3. The manufacturers of 6.4 - D11 Steelwork in floors shall be the inside of the steel beam.
I-joists and metal web joists shouldbe designed by an Engineer
consulted about joist hangers suitable for
Structural steelwork should be in
their range of products.
accordance with Chapter 6.5 ‘Steelwork
If low strength masonry is used, the support to upper floors and partitions’
timber blocking
loading on the top flange of the joist (each section), or should be designed by to support metal
web joists
hanger should not be greater than the an Engineer in accordance with Technical
strength of the supporting masonry. Requirement R5.

6.4 - D8 Adequate end bearings shall be Where steelwork supports solid timber
provided for joists and joist hangers joists, the depth ofthe timber joists should
be such that they can be notched and
The design should detail the type of have 12mm/2mm projections to allow for
support to be used for joists, trimmers and shrinkage of the timber.
trimming joists. at least 12mm projection

The minimum bearing for joists on hangers

should be as follows: FIRE SPREAD
6.4 - D12 Floors shall be designed to
Type of timber joist Minimum bearing [mm]
provide the appropriate fire resistance
Solid joist 75
I-joist 45 All floors should have the fire resistance
required by the relevant Building
Metal web joist 75
Regulations.
The minimum bearing for hangers on I-joists and metal web joists may require a
masonry should be 75mm.

6.4
at least 2mm projection
different specification for the ceiling than
that for solid timber joists to achieve the
JOIST SUPPORT AT Structural continuity of the floor should be same fire resistance.
provided by the use of continuous decking
SEPARATING WALLS fixed to joists on both sides of a transverse Ceilings should not be perforated (e.g.
steel joist. for downlighters) unless it can be shown
6.4 - D9 Joists shall be correctly
that the floor construction achieves the
supported at masonry separating walls
Steel sizes should allow adequate bearing required fire resistance.
Joists built into separating walls may for timber joists, where required.
provide lateral support but it can conflict 6.4 - D13 Structural timber shall be
with sound insulation and fire resistance Where steelwork supports I-joists, the located away from heat sources
requirements in England & Wales. joists may bear directly into the steel beam
if there is at least 45mm bearing on the Combustible material should be kept
In Scotland joists should not be built into bottom flange of the steel beam. Noggings away from heat sourcesas described in
separating walls. (38mm x thickness of flange) should be Chapter 6.8 ‘Fireplaces, chimneys and
provided at the top and bottom flanges flues’ (Design and Sitework). In particular,
structural timber should be at least 40mm
RESTRAINT STRAPS of the I-joists. If the bearing is less than
from the outer surface of a masonry
45mm timber blocking should be fixed
6.4 - D10 Adequate restraint strapping to the steel beam to enable the I-joists to chimney or fireplace recess. Floorboards
shall be provided be face fixed using joist hangers to the may be closer than 40mm from the
blocking inside the steel beam. chimney wall.
Restraint straps and/or joist hangers
suitable for taking tensile forces may be
required to tie the walls and upper floors
= at least 40mm
together. Restraint straps at not more than
2m centres should be provided along the
walls that run parallel to the joists.
BS 8103-1 gives details of the connections
between structural elements.
The position and size of restraint straps
should be shown on drawings.
structural timber
Where joists are supported on hangers kept away from
chimney wall
restraint straps along the direction of the
joists at not more than 2m centres are

2013 Chapter 6.4 Page 3

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

FLOOR DECKING Design of in-situ or precast concrete

MATERIALS STANDARDS
floors should be in accordance with BS
6.4 - D14 Floor decking shall be suitable EN 1992-1-1 and Technical Requirement
for the intended use R5. Proprietary concrete elements will be 6.4 - M1 All materials shall:
acceptable, if assessed in accordance with (a) meet the Technical Requirements
Items to be taken into account include:
Technical Requirement R3. (b) take account of the design
(a) decking and joist centres
The correct thickness of decking should Materials that comply with the design and
be specified for the joist centres used. FLOORS IN AND BETWEEN the guidance below will be acceptable for
timber and concrete upperfloors.
Thicknesses should be not less than those DWELLINGS
shown in this table for normal domestic Materials for timber and concrete upper
loads, i.e. an imposed load of 1.5kN/m2. 6.4 - D16 Floors between dwellings shall
floors should comply with all relevant
be designed to provide adequate fire
standards, including those listed below.
Thickness of decking [mm]
resistance
Where no standard exists, Technical
Joist centres Materials and constructions should comply Requirement R3 applies (see Chapter
400mm 450mm 600mm with Technical Requirement R3 and 1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards and
T and G 16 16 19
statutory requirements. Technical Requirements’).
softwood
6.4 - D17 Floors between dwellings and References to British Standards and Codes
boarding
where appropriate floors within dwellings of Practice include those made under the
Chipboard 18 18 22
shall be designed to adequately limit Construction Products Directive (89/106/
Plywood 15 15 18 EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
sound transmission
Oriented 15 15 18/19 European Technical Specifications
strand board Materials and constructions should comply approved by a European Committee for
with Technical Requirement R3 and with Standardisation (CEN).
Note statutory requirements.
Oriented strand board should be laid with
the stronger axis at right angles to the PROVISION OF TIMBER FLOORS
supports. Other decking materials not 6.4 - M2 Structural timber shall be of
listed in the table should comply with
INFORMATION the appropriate grades and sizes to
Technical Requirement R3. The above 6.4 - D18 Designs and specifications support the imposed loads
thicknesses may not be adequate to shall be produced in a clearly
Structural timber should be specified
achieve a mass for floor decking of 15 kg/ understandable format and include all according to the strength classes in BS
m2 for sound insulation requirements of relevant information EN 338. It is insufficient to specify timber
floors in England & Wales.
The design should ensure compatibility using the BS 4978 (incorporating the
(b) resistance to moisture with other drawings, especially with requirements of BS EN 518) grading rules
Chipboard for flooring should be moisture- respect to services. (eg GS or SS) unless the timber species is
6.4

resistant flooring Type P5 to BS EN 312 also specified so that the strength class
For upper floors, the drawings should can be determined.
throughout the dwelling. Oriented strand show:
board should be Type OSB3 to BS EN300. • direction of floor span and size Finger joints should comply with BS EN
and spacing of joists or concrete 385.
(c) fixing
Adequate support and correct fixings components
Where possible, regularised timber should
should be specified in accordance with • size of trimmers and trimming joists
be used for joists.
the manufacturer’s recommendations. All • position of strutting
butt joints should be supported by joists or • openings in the floor I-joists and metal web joists should be
noggings. Nail length should be 2½ times • supporting walls below assessed in accordance with Technical
the thickness of the decking material. • walls and partitions above Requirement R3.
• positions of restraint straps
Some decking materials require their joints • positions of large service penetrations, 6.4 - M3 Structural timber shall be
to be glued together and glued to joists eg chimneys, SVPs of suitable durability, particularly in
(see Sitework clauses 6.4 - S19 and S20). • position of insulation conditions where it could become damp
• details at all junctions. Timber that is built into solid external
(d) sound insulation
Where the floor decking contributes to walls or embedded should be pre-treated
6.4 - D19 All relevant information shall
the sound insulation of a floor within a with preservative. Reference should be
be distributed to appropriate personnel
dwelling, the thickness of the decking made to Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber preservation
Ensure that design and specification (natural solid timber)’ (each section) for
given in (a) above may not achieve a
information is issued to site supervisors recommended methods of preservative
mass of 15 kg/m2. Alternatively the floor
and relevant specialist subcontractors and/ treatment.
construction may have been tested to
or suppliers.
show adequacy. Any timber treated with preservative and
Where proprietary components are to be cut after treatment should be given two
CONCRETE FLOORS used, manufacturers may have specific liberal applications of a suitable colour
requirements for fixing and/or assembly tinted preservative to the cut surfaces.
6.4 - D15 Concrete floors shall be of their products. This information should
designed to transmit loads to the also be made available for reference 6.4 - M4 Structural timber shall have a
supporting structure without undue on site so that work can be carried out suitable moisture content
movement satisfactorily, in accordance with the Structural softwood for internal use should
Design should be in accordance with design and specification. be dry graded to BS 4978 or BS EN 519
Clause D3. and marked ‘DRY’ or ‘KD’.

Page 4 Chapter 6.4 2013

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

JOIST HANGERS AND Some decking materials require their joints

SITEWORK STANDARDS
to be glued together and glued to joists
RESTRAINT STRAPS (see Sitework clauses 6.4 - S19 and S20).
6.4 - S1 All sitework shall:
6.4 - M5 Hangers and straps shall be of
(a) meet theTechnical Requirements
appropriate types and strength and shall SOUND INSULATION (b) take account of the design
have adequate durability
6.4 - M8 Materials and systems for (c) follow established good practice and
Joist hangers to BS EN 845-1 are floating floors,including insulation workmanship
acceptable. It is important that joist materials, shall be of a type that will Sitework that complies with the design and
hangers are the correct size for the timber provide adequate sound insulation the guidance below will be acceptable for
joist or trimmer.
Details of materials and systems for timber and concrete upper floors.
Where joist hangers are required to resist floating floors should be in accordance
tensile forces, they should comply with with Chapter 8.3 ‘Floor finishes’ (each TIMBER FLOORS
the requirements of BS EN 845-1 with section).
performance equivalent to restraint straps 6.4 - S2 Solid timber, I-joists and metal
Materials and systems should comply with web joists shall be selected, located and
at 2m centres or proprietary joist hangers
relevant Building Regulations. supported as detailed in the design
that have been assessed in accordance
with Technical Requirement R3. Items to be taken into account include:
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK (a) grades and sizes
Restraint straps should have a cross-
section of at least 5 x 30mm or be IN FLOORS Check materials on delivery to site
proprietary restraint straps assessed in for conformity with the drawings and
6.4 - M9 Steelwork shall be suitably
accordance with Technical Requirement specification.
durable and be of the appropriate section
R3 and be protected in accordance with to support the imposed loads Structural timber should be marked to
the requirements of BS 845-1. Appendix show its strength class (normally C16 or
6.1-F lists suitable materials and protective Structural steel should be in accordance with
Chapter 6.5 ‘Steelwork support to upper C24). Alternatively, evidence of species
finishes. The size of nails or screws should and grade should be available to determine
be specified for fixing restraint straps to floors and partitions’ (each section), or be
designed by an Engineer in accordance with the equivalent strength class.
joists.
Technical Requirement R5. Where timber is graded to BS 4978 or
BS EN 519, it should also be marked with
STRUTTING Steel beams should be protected by a
identification of the company responsible
suitably durable paint coating as detailed
6.4 - M6 Strutting shall ensure adequate for the grading.
in Chapter 8.5 ‘Painting and decorating’
rigidity of the floor structure
(each section). Intumescent paints should Storage time may be minimised by phasing
Timber strutting should be either: be compatible with paints providing deliveries to suit the work programme.
• herringbone strutting at least 38mm x corrosion protection. When storage is required, timber should

6.4
38mm, or be stored on bearers or in racks and be
• solid strutting at least 38mm thick and CONCRETE AND protected.
at least three-quarters the depth of the
joist. REINFORCEMENT
store timber off
Proprietary metal strutting should 6.4 - M10 Concrete shall have ground on bearers

have been assessed in accordance with appropriate reinforcement and be of

Technical Requirement R3. a mix design that is suitable for the
location and intended use
Thin metal strip is not acceptable as
For guidance on the specification and
strutting.
use of concrete, concrete additives and
reinforcement, reference should be
FLOOR DECKING made to Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its
6.4 - M7 The type and thickness of the reinforcement’ (each section).
decking material shall have adequate
strength and moisture resistance PROPRIETARY SYSTEMS I-joists and metal web joists should
The following materials are acceptable: 6.4 - M11 Proprietary concrete flooring be protected from adverse weather
• softwood boarding in accordance with systemsshall have adequate strength conditions during transport and storage.
BS 1297 and durability They should be stored clear of the ground
• moisture-resistant chipboard, Type P5 to and stacked vertically. Manufacturers’
Proprietary concrete flooring systems recommendations for handling, transport
BSEN 312. Ring shank nails (length 2½ x
should be designed in accordance with BS and storage should be followed. Damaged
decking thickness) or screws should be
EN 1992-1-1, or should have been assessed in joists should not be used.
specified for fixing chipboard
accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
• oriented strand board Type OSB3 to BS
(b) moisture content
EN 300
Structural softwood for internal use should
• plywood in accordance with BS EN
be dry graded to BS 4978 or BS EN 519
636. Fixings and support should be as
and marked ‘DRY’ or ‘KD’.
recommended by the manufacturer
• floor decking materials not covered by
a British Standard should have been
assessed in accordance with Technical
Requirement R3.

2013 Chapter 6.4 Page 5

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

(c) quality JOIST HANGERS joists cut accurately

so that gap is not
Timber should not be used if it: more than 6mm
• is excessively bowed, twisted or 6.4 - S3 Hangers shall be of the correct
cambered size and properly built in
• has large edge knots or shakes It is important that the joist hanger is the
• has a wany edge more than half the correct size for the joist or trimmer.
thickness
• has any sign of rot For solid timber joists and metal web joists
• has been damaged. the hanger should be the full depth of the
joists. A timber upright should be fixed
(d) bearing between the flanges of metal web joists.
Bearings for joists should be as follows;
For I-joists the depth of the hanger should
Type of timber Minimum bearing [mm]
be at least 0.6 x the depth of the joist. Full
joist depth stiffeners should be fixed to both notch to keep
End Intermediate ceiling line level

support support
sides of the web if the hanger does not
restrain the top flange of an I-joist. Flanges of I-joists should not be notched.
Solid joist on 90 (75) 90 (75)
masonry walls Where joist hangers are supported on Tabs of the hanger should be bent and
Solid joist on 75 75 lightweight blockwork, the suitability of the nailed to the bottom flange of the I-joist.
timber wall plate hanger should be checked. Joist hangers
I-joist 90 (45) 90 which meet BS EN 845 are stamped on
Metal web joist 90 (75) 90 the base or gusset with the minimum
compressive strength of block for which
Note they are suitable, eg 2.9N/mm2 or 3.6N/
Figures in brackets should only be used mm2. Where hangers are to BS EN 845-1
when the joist is not providing restraint to ensure the supporting masonry is that
the wall. specified in the design.

Bearings should be level. If joists are not Joist hangers should be supported on level
laid level, the floor will be springy and beds and should be tight to the wall.
uneven. Where bearings are uneven, joists
The masonry course to carry the joist
should be levelled using hard packing, eg
hangers should be checked for level and
tiles or slates bedded in mortar. Loose or
height. Hangers should not be cut into the
soft packing should not be used.
walling. tabs on hanger bent over
For further information concerning timber and nailed to flange
Where restraint type joist hangers
framed construction, reference should
are shown in the design do not use
6.4

be made to Chapter 6.2 ‘External timber

alternatives without checking with the
framed walls’.
designer.
(e) levelling
Where possible, regularised timber should Flanges of metal web joists should not
be used. be notched. When used with hangers the
timber to top flange of metal web joists should be
The floor should be levelled from the masonry hanger
restrained.
staircase trimmer and trimming joist.
spirit level

staircase
trimmer heavy duty hanger
timber to timber hanger

trimming
joists
6.4 - S4 Joists shall be properly cut to
length and fitted to joist hangers
joists levelled from staircase trimmer or trimming joist
Joists should be accurately cut to length
for a tight fit. Solid joists should be
(f) joist spacings notched into the hanger to keep the ceiling
Joist spacing should be as shown on the line level.
drawings. If the joist spacing is not shown,
the designer should provide spacing
details. Do not increase the spacing.
Joists should not be spaced at more than
600mm centres. The decking material to top flange restraint
be used should be taken into account.

(g) clearance from the wall All circular holes in the vertical sides of
When placing joists, a clearance of 25mm joist hangers should be fully nailed.
to 75mm should be allowed between the When joist hangers are used at both ends
first joist and the wall face. This helps of a joist, measuring, marking and cutting
when installing services and fixing floor should be accurate to ensure the joist fits
decking. properly at both ends.

Page 6 Chapter 6.4 2013

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

TRIMMED AND TRIMMING Flanges of I-joists should not be notched be fixed to the steel beam to enable the
and should be supported on trimmers I-joists to be face fixed using joist hangers
JOISTS by ‘timber-to-timber’ hangers. Timber to the blocking inside the steel beam.
6.4 - S5 Trimmed and trimming joists blocking should be used to face fix a joist
shall be properly supported to a trimmer joist.

Trimmed and trimming joists should be

used as detailed in the design.

opening timber blocking

in floor behind joist hanger
trimmer trimmed joists

trimming joist support wall

The thickness and depth of trimmed and

trimming joists should be as detailed in the
design.
Flanges of metal web joists should not
backer blocks
The ends of trimmed solid joists may be be notched. Joists can bear directly into
supported using joist hangers or notches. the steel beam if there is at least 75mm
When using hangers, ‘timber-to-timber’ bearing on the bottom flange of the steel
hangers should be used, not wall hangers. beam. Timber uprights should be provided
trimmer notched to
between the flanges and 38mm x 97mm
keep hanger flush
with top of joist
noggings should be provided between the
Flanges of metal web joists should not be uprights. If the bearing is less than 75mm
notched and ‘timber-to-timber’ hangers metal web joists can be supported on their
should be used to join a joist to a trimmer top flange and their bottom flange should
joist. be fixed to timber blocking supported
inside the steel beam.

single or double
trimmer as required
by the design
timber blocking

6.4
to support
metal web joists
TIMBER-TO-TIMBER JOIST HANGER

timber upright

6.4 - S6 Joists shall be properly

trimmed into steelwork
Joists trimmed into steelwork should be
NOTCHED TRIMMER
notched at both top and bottom and have MULTIPLE JOISTS
12mm/2mm projections respectively to 6.4 - S7 Multiple joists shall be securely
allow for timber shrinkage. fixed together
at least 12mm projection
Solid timber joists may be doubled up to
trimmer notched: support a non-masonry partition or to
-maximum half its depth
-maximum quarter its width form trimmers.
nails at approx
450mm centres

NAILED
For lightly loaded trimmed joists, support
nails at approx
battens (plates) may be used. 20mm from top
and bottom
of joist
lightly loaded
trimmed joist
at least 2mm projection

Flanges of I-joists should not be notched.

I-joists can bear directly into the steel
beam if there is at least 45mm bearing on
the bottom flange of the steel beam and
noggings (38mm x thickness of flange) bolts on centre lines
at approx 1m centres
SUPPORT BATTEN should be provided at the top and bottom
flanges of the I-joists. If the bearing is BOLTED
less than 45mm timber blocking should

2013 Chapter 6.4 Page 7

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

Fixings should be to the Engineer’s should not project beyond the top and (c) joists supported by hangers
specification and should be given a second bottom edges of joists. Solid blocking should be used at all joist
check for tightness just before fixing the bearings of solid timber joists where they
At the end of each run of strutting the last
ceiling. are not built into brickwork or blockwork.
joist should be firmly blocked to the wall.
This includes some forms of timber frame
Toothed plate, split ring and shear
construction. The blocking may be used for
plate connectors should be used in
fixing plasterboard and floor decking.
strict accordance with manufacturers’
recommendations. blocking

SPLIT RING
TOOTHED PLATE herringbone strutting

SHEAR PLATE

Where I-joists require strutting it should be

Washers, or single faced connectors, provided in accordance with the table for solid blocking where joists

should be used with bolts. Check whether solid timber joists. are not built into blockwork

toothed connectors are required between Where metal web joists require strutting it
the timber faces. Ensure that all washers, (d) I-joists and metal web joists
should be in accordance with the following
etc are provided. supported on walls
table:
Bolts should be checked for tightness Noggings should be provided for I-joists
Joist span [m] Rows of bracing and metal web joists at the top flange
(fixing bolts should not be used for
tightening). Make sure that timber is not 4.0 to 8.0 1 (at centre of span) along the wall to support the floor decking.
damaged by over-tightening. Over 8.0 2 (at equal spacing) Noggings at the bottom flange may be
required to support the plasterboard
I-joists can be doubled or tripled up For metal web joists, bracing (strongbacks) ceiling.
in accordance with manufacturer’s should be provided.
recommendations to support a lightweight
partition or to form trimmers. The design
should specify how the joists are fixed
together.
bracing (strongback)
6.4

(b) bearings onto steelwork

Strutting should be provided where solid
timber joists bear on, or are notched into,
steelwork to prevent rotation.

timber filler block

perimeter nogging

STRUTTING OF FLOOR
JOISTS
6.4 - S8 Appropriate strutting shall be
provided to joists, where required
solid strutting
Items to be taken into account include:
(a) span of the floor
Strutting should be provided where I-joists
Strutting for solid timber joists should be
bear directly onto the bottom flange of the
provided before laying floor decking as
steel beam. Noggings (38mm x thickness
follows:
of flange) should be provided at the top
Joist span [m] Rows of strutting and bottom flanges of the I-joists. Strutting
is not necessary when an infill timber perimeter nogging
Up to 2.5 none needed
blocking is fixed to the steel beam and
2.5 to 4.5 1 (at centre of span) joists hangers of full depth of the joists are
Over 4.5 2 (at equal spacing) used to face fix the joists to the blocking.

For solid timber joists either herringbone Strutting should be provided where metal
strutting (38mm x 38mm timber) or web joists bear directly on to the bottom
minimum 38mm thick solid strutting flange of the steel beam. Timber uprights
should be used, for not less than three- should be provided between the flanges
quarters the depth of the joist. Strutting and 38mm x 97mm noggings should be
provided between the uprights.

Page 8 Chapter 6.4 2013

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

NOTCHING AND DRILLING (c) metal web joists 2m maximum

spacing
In metal web joists service conduits
6.4 - S9 Notching and drilling shall be should run in the gaps between the metal
carried out within recognised limits webs. The maximum duct sizes should be
Items to be taken into account include: in accordance with the manufacturer’s
(a) solid timber joists recommendations. Large service ducts
Solid timber joists and studs should only may have to be inserted before fixing the
be notched and drilled within the limits joists as it may not be possible after the nogging

shown in the table below: joists have been fixed.

Item Location Maximum

size packing

Notching joists Top edge 0.1 0.15 x depth

up to 250mm to 0.2 of span of joist
depth
Drilling joists Centre line 0.25 x depth
up to 250mm 0.25 to 0.4 of joist
of span
services passing through
maximum diameter metal web joists
of hole should be maximum depth
0.25 x joist depth of notch should be
0.15 x joist depth

notches on top in a
zone between 0.1
and 0.2 x span
RESTRAINT STRAPPING noggings for I-joists

6.4 - S10 Restraint strapping shall be

provided where specified in the design
details
holes on centre line
in a zone between
0.25 and 0.4 x span When the external wall is to be stabilised
holes to be kept apart by at least by connection to the floor, straps may be
three times hole diameter
required. They may be fixed to the top or
bottom of the joist, depending on how the
masonry is coursed.
Notches and drillings in the same
joist should be at least 100mm apart Straps should have a cross section of
horizontally. 30mm x 5mm galvanised steel straps
noggings for metal web joists
or straps which have been assessed in

6.4
accordance with Technical Requirement
R3. (See clause 6.4 -S12 for fixing details).
Where joists run parallel to the wall, straps In buildings of not more than two storeys
should be supported on noggings fixed where joists are supported on walls,
between the three joists adjacent to the restraint straps will not normally be
wall. required at the ends of joists, if there is at
least 90mm bearing (eg if they are built
Solid timber joists should have noggings
into masonry).
at least 100mm between not less than 0.5 times the depth of the
notches and holes
joists if the strap is located on top of the Separate straps should be fitted along the
joists but the full depth if located beneath joists and at centres not more than 2m
the joists. unless the joist hangers are designed to
provide restraint.
I-joists should have solid timber noggings
not less than 0.5 times the depth of the
Special instructions should be obtained I-joists up to a maximum of 150mm, fixed
from the designer when notching and between the webs and located beneath
drilling: the top flange of the I-joists when 30mm joist hanger
• is required in joists deeper than 250mm x 5mm galvanised straps are used. Where
• does not meet the above guidelines, or straps which have been assessed in
• is needed close to heavy loads, such as accordance with Technical Requirement
those from partitions, cisterns, cylinders R3 are used the noggings should be short
and stair trimming. lengths of I-joist or solid timber noggings restraint strap
held tight
against blockwork
If structural strength is impaired by to the full depth of the I-joists.
notching or drilling, the element should be Metal web joists should have solid timber
replaced or correctly repaired. noggings, size 35mm x 97mm, used
beneath the top flange of the metal web
(b) I-joists
joists and twice nailed to the joists.
In I-joists pre-formed holes are provided
in the timber webs for pipes and cables. Straps should be placed at a maximum of
Other holes or notches should not be cut 2m apart and carried over the three joists.
without the approval of the manufacturer. Packing should be provided between the
However, restraint straps can be slotted into wall and the first joist.
webs immediately below the top flange.

2013 Chapter 6.4 Page 9

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

OVERLAPPING AND
BUTTED JOISTS
6.4 - S13 Joists shall be properly fixed
at intermediate load bearing walls
Items to be taken into account include:
(a) solid timber joists
Where joists overlap on load bearing
intermediate walls, they should be
nailed together and cut so that they
will not project beyond the supporting
wall by more than 100mm. This is to
prevent the floor decking being pushed
up or the ceiling being cracked when intermediate support for
metal web joists
the cantilevered part of the joist moves
I-joist with restraint strap upwards.

6.4 - S11 Straps shall be located to overlapping joists

nailed together
FLOOR DECKING :
provide adequate restraint for the GENERAL
masonry
6.4 - S14 Flooring shall only be fixed
Straps should bear on the centre of bricks at the appropriate time during the
or blocks, not on mortar joints. construction process
Timber based materials can swell if they
become wet and may twist and bow
producing large gaps when drying out.
If timber decking is installed before the
dwelling is substantially watertight the
100mm maximum overhang
manufacturer should confirm that it is
suitable for that situation.
When floor decking has to be stored, it
(b) I-joists should be stored on a hard base, under
Where I-joists are supported on load cover, if possible indoors.
bearing intermediate walls they should be
strap centred on 6.4 - S15 Floor decking shall be securely
6.4

block and tight to wall fixed as follows:

fixed to the floor joists
Before fixing floor decking, a check should
be made that all noggings, blocking and
6.4 - S12 Straps shall be fixed with strutting are in place and fixed securely.
suitable screws or nails
The length of nails should be 2½ times the
Straps may be fixed on the side, top or
thickness of the decking.
bottom as appropriate for all joist types.
I-joists and metal web joists should not be The ends of adjacent boards should be
notched. square. Joints should be staggered and
supported on noggings or joists. Reference
Straps to walls which run parallel to the
should be made to Clause S23 for fixing
joists should extend over at least three
floating floors.
joists. They should be fixed with 2 screws
or nails into each joist. The fixings should Temporary wedges and packings at the
be 3.75mm x 30mm square twisted nails perimeter should be removed after the
for all joist types. Noggings should be floor decking is complete.
provided to receive two additional nails.
Alternatively for solid joists two 4.76mm 6.4 - S16 Completed floor decking shall
diameter x 50mm long wood screws (No. not be overloaded and shall be protected
10) or 4mm diameter x 75mm round nails intermediate support for I-joist against damage
(8 SWG) can be used in each joist. Floors should not be overloaded, especially
When nailing into Laminated Veneer with materials stored during construction.
Lumber flanges of I-joists, care should (c) metal web joists Where necessary, fixed flooring and/or
be taken to prevent the splitting of the Where metal web joists are supported floor decking should be protected against
flanges. Nails should be driven in at an on load bearing intermediate walls they damp (for example from plaster splashes)
angle (not horizontally) and should not require a minimum bearing of not less and damage.
protrude from the flanges. than 90mm. Joists should be overlapped.
Blocking is required between the joists
unless walls are built up to the underside
of the floor.

Page 10 Chapter 6.4 2013

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

SOFTWOOD BOARDING 6.4 - S19 Chipboard flooring shall be Projecting ends of boards should be cut
securely fixed back to form a butt joint on a joist.
6.4 - S17 Softwood boarding shall be
securely fixed ALL TYPES OF CHIPBOARD To reduce squeaking, tongued and grooved
Chipboard should be supported and joints between boards should be glued and
End (butt) joints should be made on joists the boards should be glued to the joists. A
fixed in accordance with manufacturers’
and staggered, ie the joints of adjacent suitable polyvinyl acetate (PVAC) adhesive
instructions, using either:
boards should not be on the same joist. should be used.
• flat-headed ring shank nails minimum
3mm diameter and of length 2½ times
the thickness of the chipboard, or
• screws, to BS 1210 with a minimum
length of twice the board thickness and
not less than size no. 8.
Edges at room perimeters should be
supported on joists or noggings.
Fixings should be spaced at centres
not more than 300mm apart along the
joist continuously supported edges and the joist or nogging

intermediate supports.
Expansion gaps should be not less than
10mm wide where boards abut a rigid
Board thickness should not be less upstand. For larger areas of boarded floor
than the following for the joist spacings a wider gap may be needed at upstands ORIENTED STRAND BOARD
indicated: and intermediate expansion gaps equal to
2mm per linear metre of floor provided.
FLOORING
Board thickness Maximum joist centres 6.4 - S20 Oriented strand board flooring
[mm] [mm] shall be securely fixed
16 450
Oriented strand board should be laid over
19 600
supports in the direction indicated on the
boards. The stronger axis should be laid at
Boards should be cramped up and either expansion gap at least 10mm right angles to the supporting joists.
double nailed or secret nailed to each joist.
Nails should be of a length 2½ times the All square edges should be supported. All
thickness of the decking and should be short edges should be supported on the
punched well below the surface. centre line of the joist. It is not necessary

6.4
to support the long edges of tongued and
The above thicknesses may not be
grooved boards, except at room perimeters
adequate to achieve a mass for floor
where all board edges should be fully
boarding of 15 kg/m2 for sound insulation
supported.
requirements of floors in England & Wales.
No boards less than two joist spacings long
CHIPBOARD FLOORING should be used.

6.4 - S18 Chipboard flooring shall be of Nails should be flat headed, annular
SQUARE EDGED BOARDS AND BOARDS grooved nails 3mm in diameter.
the type and thickness specified
WITH LOOSE TONGUES
Only moisture-resistant, Type P5 chipboard Boards should be supported on all sides on Expansion gaps should be not less than
to BS EN 312 should be used for flooring. joists or noggings. 10mm wide where boards abut a rigid
This can be recognised by the green stripe upstand. For larger areas of boarded floor
on the chipboard edge and an identifying a wider gap may be needed at upstands
marking. and intermediate expansion gaps equal to
2mm per linear metre of floor provided.
Board thicknesses should be not less
than the following for the joist spacings To reduce squeaking, tongued and grooved
indicated: joints between boards should be glued and
the boards should be glued to the joists. A
Board thickness Maximum joist centres suitable polyvinyl acetate (PVAC) adhesive
[mm] [mm] should be used.
18/20 450
22 600 nogging PLYWOOD FLOORING
The above thicknesses may not be 6.4 - S21 Plywood decking shall be
adequate to achieve a mass for floor securely fixed
decking of 15 kg/m2 for sound insulation Plywood should be laid with the face grain
requirements of floors in England & Wales. at right angles to the supports. All butt
TONGUED AND GROOVED BOARDS
Boards should be laid with long edges at joints and joints with loose tongues should
right angles to joists. be supported on joists or noggings. All
end joints should occur over joists (38mm
Short edges should be supported on joists minimum thickness) or noggings.
or noggings.

2013 Chapter 6.4 Page 11

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

Board thickness should be not less CONCRETE FLOORS Beam layout drawings should always be
than the following for the joist spacings followed. Doubled beams usually support
indicated: 6.4 - S24 Concrete upper floors shall be concentrated loads, such as partitions.
constructed/erected in accordance with
Board thickness Maximum joist centres the design. (d) propping of beams and planks during
[mm] [mm] construction
Care should be taken to ensure that
12 450 Where floors rely on structural topping or
concrete floors are reasonably level and
16 600 in-situ make-up sections, propping may
smooth. Particular care should be taken at
be needed until the in-situ concrete has
doorways and junctions.
The above thicknesses may not be reached its design strength.
adequate to achieve a mass for floor 6.4 - S25 Appropriate measures shall be
(e) grouting of joints
decking of 15 kg/m2 for sound insulation taken when concreting or screeding in
Most precast floors rely on a grout to
requirements of floors in England & Wales. cold weather
ensure composite action of the units and
Nails for fixing plywood should be either: Reference should be made to Chapter 1.4 provide adequate strength, as well as fire
• plain wire nails - minimum diameter ‘Cold weatherworking’. and sound resistance.
3.35mm
The manufacturer’s specification should be
-- minimum length 65mm IN-SITU CONCRETE checked for the grout mix.
-- with penetration not less than 40mm,
or 6.4 - S26 Reinforced concrete upper
(f) restraint straps and ties
• annular-ring shank nails - minimum floors shall be constructed in accordance
Restraint straps should be shown on the
diameter 3mm with design details
drawings. They are usually necessary
-- minimum length 50mm All concrete work should be in accordance where the beams run parallel with the wall.
-- penetration not less than 32mm. with Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its
reinforcement’ (each section).
Fixings should be at 150mm centres (max)
around the perimeter and 300mm centres The Builder should not depart from the
(max) on intermediate supports. design without the Engineer’s written
consent.
An expansion gap of at least 1.5 - 2mm at least 450mm straps at not more
should be allowed between each panel. than 2m centres

PRECAST CONCRETE
OTHER FLOOR DECKING 6.4 - S27 Precast concrete upper floors
shall be erected in accordance with
6.4 - S22 Proprietary flooring materials
design details
shall be securely fixed strap tight
to blockwork
precast beam

Items to be taken into account include:

Proprietary floor decking should be
(a) manufacturer’s assembly
6.4

assessed in accordance with Technical

Requirement R3 and be fixed in instructions
accordance with any certification A copy of the manufacturer’s assembly
requirements. instructions (and BBA Certificate, if Metal ties may be required to provide
applicable) should be on site and the a structural link across internal and
recommendations should be followed. separating walls.
FLOORS BETWEEN
DWELLINGS The Builder should not depart from the (g) position of holes for services
design without the Engineer’s written Where holes are required for services,
6.4 - S23 The floating part of a floor consent. blocks should be omitted or cut where
shall be completely separated by a necessary. Infill blocks should be cut
resilient layer from the main structure (b) bearings
carefully and neatly without damage. Using
and surrounding walls Bearings onto masonry should be 90mm
a hammer and bolster to cut blocks may
minimum. Bearings onto steelwork should
The structural component of floors cause significant damage.
be 75mm minimum.
between dwellings may be concrete, steel,
timber or a combination of these materials. Bearings should be solid and level. Any (h) trimmed openings
open frogs in brickwork should be filled. Large openings for staircases and
The floor finish should be isolated from chimneys may require openings to be
walls and skirtings. (c) setting out of beams trimmed. Specifications and drawings
When setting out beam and block floors, should be followed.
Proprietary floating floor materials
use the infill blocks as spacers to ensure
and systems should be fixed strictly in Steel trimmer shoes may be used to trim
correct spacing between beams.
accordance with the manufacturer’s and openings.
any relevant certification requirements
and Building Regulations. Doubled beams are common around
trimmed openings, and should be propped
Where board materials are laid loose, all until all voids have been solidly concreted
joints in tongued and grooved boards and the concrete has reached its design
should be glued. strength.

(i) cracked or broken components

Beams, planks or infill blocks that are
infill blocks used as cracked should not be used.
spacers to make sure beams
are positioned correctly

Page 12 Chapter 6.4 2013

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

(j) clips for suspended ceiling

Some designs include metal ceiling clips Appendix 6.4-A
inserted between the planks or blocks so
that timber battens can be fixed below. Span tables for solid timber
planks marked with
position of clips floor joists
Tables 1 and 2 in this Appendix are
derived from the TRADA Technology Ltd.
publication “Eurocode 5 span tables for
solid timber members in floors, ceilings
and roofs for dwellings (3rd edition)”.
The section sizes of the floor joists given
in Tables 1 and 2 should be regularised, or
clips inserted as planks
are being laid be ALS or CLS to enable floors and ceilings
to be level.
FIRE-STOPPING For upper floors with a 22mm thick
chipboard decking and 12.5mm
6.4 - S28 Penetrations in floors between
plasterboard ceiling, a dead load of
dwellings shall be fire-stopped.
between 0.25kN/m2 and 0.5kN/m2 may be
The specified method of fire-stopping assumed. Use the centre three columns
should be carried out. There should be no from the tables.
holes or gaps for smoke to penetrate once
the fire-stopping has been installed. Where For timber floors between dwellings, the
downlighters are incorporated in a ceiling dead load of the construction to meet
they should be installed inaccordance with acoustic performance is likely to be within
the manufacturer’s instructions the range 0.6kN/m2 to 0.7kN/m2, therefore
use the three right-hand columns.
Floors based on these tables require
strutting in accordance with Sitework
clause 6.4 - S8.
Lightweight non-loadbearing partitions
which weigh no more than 1.0kN (101.9kg)
per metre run and are parallel to the joists
may be supported by one or two additional
joists placed immediately beneath

6.4
them. The partitions should be fixed
through the floor decking into the joist(s)
beneath. In tables 1 and 2, one additional
joist is generally sufficient. Where two
additional joists are needed, the spans
are markedwith an asterisk (eg 1.76*). For
similar lightweight partitions which run
at right-angles to the joists, the maximum
spans in Tables 1 and 2 should be reduced
by 10%. For all other additional loads, joist
sizes should be designed by an Engineer
in accordance with Technical Requirement
R3.

2013 Chapter 6.4 Page 13

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

Table 1 - Permissible clear spans for domestic floor joists - strength class C16
Imposed load not exceeding 1.5 kN/m2
Service Class 1 or 2

Dead Load gk [kN/m2] excluding self-weight of joist

gk not more than 0.25 gk not more than 0.50 gk not more than 1.25
Size of joist Spacing of joists [mm]
400 450 600 400 450 600 400 450 600
Breadth [mm] Depth [mm] Maximum clear span [m]
38 97 1.76* 1.66* 1.43 1.64* 1.55* 1.35 1.43 1.35 0.71
38 120 2.36* 2.23* 1.94 2.18* 2.07* 1.80 1.86 1.77 1.55
38 145 2.85* 2.74* 2.48 2.68* 2.58* 2.32 2.33 2.22 1.96
38 170 3.33* 3.20* 2.90 3.14* 3.02* 2.73 2.74 2.63 2.37
38 195 3.81* 3.67* 3.32 3.59* 3.45* 3.12 3.14 3.01 2.71
38 220 4.29* 4.13* 3.74 4.05* 3.89* 3.52 3.53 3.39 3.06

44 97 1.89* 1.78* 1.54 1.76* 1.67* 1.45 1.53 1.45 1.27

44 120 2.48* 2.39* 2.08 2.33* 2.21* 1.94 1.98 1.88 1.66
44 145 2.99* 2.88* 2.61 2.82* 2.71* 2.45 2.46 2.36 2.09
44 170 3.50* 3.37* 3.05 3.30* 3.17* 2.87 2.88 2.77 2.50
44 195 4.00* 3.85* 3.49 3.78* 3.63* 3.29 3.30 3.17 2.86
44 220 4.51* 4.33* 3.94 4.25* 4.09* 3.71 3.72 3.57 3.23

47 97 1.95* 1.84* 1.60 1.81* 1.72* 1.50 1.57 1.49 1.31

47 120 2.54* 2.44* 2.15 2.39* 2.27* 2.00 2.04 1.94 1.71
47 145 3.06* 2.94* 2.67 2.88* 2.77* 2.51 2.52 2.42 2.15
47 170 3.58* 3.44* 3.12 3.37* 3.24* 2.94 2.95 2.83 2.56
47 195 4.09* 3.94* 3.57 3.86* 3.71* 3.36 3.38 3.24 2.93
47 220 4.60* 4.43* 4.02 4.34* 4.18* 3.79 3.80 3.65 3.30

50 97 2.00* 1.89* 1.65 1.87* 1.77* 1.54 1.61 1.53 1.34

50 120 2.59* 2.49* 2.22 2.44* 2.34* 2.05 2.09 1.99 1.75
50 145 3.12* 3.00* 2.72 2.94* 2.83* 2.56 2.57 2.47 2.21
50 170 3.65* 3.51* 3.19 3.44* 3.31* 3.00 3.01 2.89 2.61
50 195 4.17* 4.02* 3.65 3.94* 3.79* 3.44 3.45 3.31 3.00
50 220 4.70* 4.52* 4.11 4.43* 4.26* 3.87 3.88 3.73 3.38

63 97 2.23* 2.11* 1.84 2.07* 1.97* 1.72 1.78 1.70 1.50

63 120 2.80* 2.69* 2.44 2.64* 2.54* 2.28 2.30 2.19 1.94
63 145 3.37* 3.24* 2.95 3.18* 3.06* 2.78 2.79 2.68 2.42
6.4

63 170 3.94* 3.79* 3.45 3.72* 3.58* 3.25 3.26 3.13 2.84
63 195 4.50* 4.33* 3.94 4.25* 4.09* 3.72 3.73 3.58 3.25
63 220 5.06* 4.87* 4.44 4.78* 4.60* 4.18 4.20 4.04 3.66

75 120 2.96* 2.85* 2.59 2.79* 2.69* 2.44 2.45 2.35 2.09
75 145 3.56* 3.43* 3.12 3.37* 3.24* 2.94 2.95 2.84 2.57
75 170 4.16* 4.01* 3.65 3.93* 3.79* 3.44 3.45 3.32 3.01
75 195 4.75* 4.58* 4.17 4.49* 4.33* 3.94 3.95 3.80 3.45
75 220 5.34* 5.15* 4.70 5.05* 4.87* 4.43 4.45 4.28 3.88
ALS/CLS
38 140 2.75* 2.64* 2.39 2.59* 2.49* 2.21 2.24 2.13 1.88
38 184 3.60* 3.46* 3.14 3.39* 3.26* 2.95 2.96 2.84 2.56
38 235 4.58* 4.40* 3.99 4.32* 4.15* 3.76 3.77 3.62 3.27

89 184 4.74* 4.57* 4.17 4.48* 4.32* 3.94 3.95 3.80 3.45
89 235 5.99* 5.78* 5.29 5.68* 5.48* 5.00 5.01 4.83 4.39
* Two additional joists required Normal bearing of 40mm to be doubled

Page 14 Chapter 6.4 2013

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

Table 2 - Permissible clear spans for domestic floor joists - strength class C24
Imposed load not exceeding qk = 1.5 kN/m2 or Qk = 0.90 kN
Service Class 1 or 2

Dead Load gk [kN/m2] excluding self-weight of joist

gk not more than 0.25 gk not more than 0.50 gk not more than 1.25
Size of joist Spacing of joists [mm]
400 450 600 400 450 600 400 450 600
Breadth [mm] Depth [mm] Maximum clear span [m]
38 97 2.05* 1.94* 1.68 1.91* 1.80* 1.57 1.64 1.56 1.37
38 120 2.63* 2.53* 2.26 2.48* 2.38* 2.09 2.13 2.02 1.78
38 145 3.17* 3.05* 2.77 2.99* 2.87* 2.60 2.61 2.51 2.25
38 170 3.71* 3.57* 3.24 3.50* 3.36* 3.05 3.06 2.94 2.65
38 195 4.25* 4.08* 3.71 4.00* 3.85* 3.49 3.50 3.36 3.04
38 220 4.78* 4.60* 4.17 4.51* 4.33* 3.93 3.95 3.79 3.42

44 97 2.19* 2.07* 1.81 2.04* 1.93* 1.69 1.75 1.66 1.46

44 120 2.77* 2.66* 2.41 2.61* 2.50* 2.24 2.26 2.15 1.90
44 145 3.33* 3.20* 2.91 3.14* 3.02* 2.74 2.75 2.64 2.38
44 170 3.90* 3.75* 3.40 3.67* 3.53* 3.20 3.22 3.09 2.79
44 195 4.46* 4.29* 3.90 4.21* 4.04* 3.67 3.68 3.54 3.20
44 220 5.01* 4.82* 4.39 4.73* 4.55* 4.13 4.15 3.98 3.61

47 97 2.26* 2.14* 1.87 2.10* 1.99* 1.74 1.80 1.71 1.51

47 120 2.83* 2.72* 2.47 2.67* 2.56* 2.31 2.32 2.21 1.96
47 145 3.40* 3.27* 2.97 3.21* 3.09* 2.80 2.81 2.70 2.44
47 170 3.98* 3.83* 3.48 3.76* 3.61* 3.28 3.29 3.16 2.86
47 195 4.55* 4.38* 3.98 4.30* 4.13* 3.75 3.77 3.62 3.27
47 220 5.12* 4.93* 4.48 4.83* 4.65* 4.23 4.24 4.08 3.69

50 97 2.32* 2.20* 1.92 2.15* 2.04* 1.79 1.85 1.76 1.55

50 120 2.88* 2.77* 2.52 2.72* 2.62* 2.37 2.38 2.27 2.01
50 145 3.48* 3.34* 3.04 3.28* 3.15* 2.86 2.87 2.76 2.50
50 170 4.06* 3.91* 3.55 3.83* 3.69* 3.35 3.36 3.23 2.92
50 195 4.64* 4.47* 4.07 4.38* 4.22* 3.38 3.85 3.69 3.35
50 220 5.22* 5.03* 4.58 4.93* 4.75* 4.32 4.33 4.16 3.77

63 97 2.52* 2.43* 2.14 2.38* 2.26* 1.99 2.03 1.94 1.72

63 120 3.11* 2.99* 2.72 2.94* 2.83* 2.57 2.57 2.47 2.22
63 145 3.74* 3.60* 3.28 3.54* 3.40* 3.09 3.10 2.98 2.70

6.4
63 170 4.37* 4.21* 3.84 4.13* 3.98* 3.62 3.63 3.49 3.17
63 195 5.00* 4.81* 4.39 4.72* 4.55* 4.14 4.15 4.00 3.62
63 220 5.61* 5.41* 4.94 5.31* 5.12* 4.66 4.68 4.50 4.08

75 120 3.29* 3.17* 2.88 3.11* 2.99* 2.72 2.73 2.62 2.38
75 145 3.96* 3.81* 3.48 3.74* 3.60* 3.28 3.29 3.16 2.87
75 170 4.62* 4.45* 4.06 4.37* 4.21* 3.83 3.85 3.70 3.36
75 195 5.27* 5.08* 4.64 4.99* 4.81* 4.38 4.40 4.23 3.85
75 220 5.92* 5.71* 5.22 5.61* 5.41* 4.93 4.95 4.76 4.33
ALS/CLS
38 140 3.07* 2.95* 2.67 2.89* 2.77* 2.51 2.52 2.42 2.15
38 184 4.01* 3.86* 3.50 3.78* 3.63* 3.29 3.31 3.17 2.87
38 235 5.10* 4.90* 4.46 4.81* 4.62* 4.20 4.21 4.04 3.65

89 184 5.25* 5.07* 4.63 4.98* 4.80* 4.38 4.39 4.23 3.85
89 235 6.64* 6.41* 5.87 6.30* 6.08* 5.56 5.57 5.37 4.89
* Two additional joists required Normal bearing of 40mm to be doubled

2013 Chapter 6.4 Page 15

 6.4
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Timber and concrete upper floors

INDEX

B J S
Bearings 3, 6, 8, 12 Joist hangers 2, 5, 6, 8 Separating walls 3
Boarding 10, 11 Joist sizes 1 Shrinkage 2
C Joist spacing 1, 4, 6 Sound transmission 4, 5
Chimneys 3 L Span 1, 8
Chipboard 11 Levelling 6 Strength class 1
Clearance 6 Lightweight partitions 1 Structural steel 3, 5, 7
Concrete 4, 5, 12 M Strutting 2, 5, 8
D Masonry partitions 2 Supporting structure 1
Dead loads 1 Metal web joists 7, 8, 9, 10 T
Decking 4, 5, 10, 11 Moisture 4, 5 Timber floors 4, 5
Drilling 9 Multiple joists 7 Timber joists 9, 10
E N Trimming joists 2, 6
End bearings 3 Notching 9
F O
Fire spread 3 Oriented strand board 11
Fire-stopping 13 Overlapping joists 10
Fixings 4 P
Floating floors 12 Plywood 11
Flooring 3 Pre-cast concrete 12
I Proprietary systems 5, 12
Imposed loads 4 R
In-situ concrete 12 Reinforcement 5, 12
I-joists 7, 8, 9, 10 Restraint strapping 3, 5, 9, 12
6.4

Page 16 Chapter 6.4 2013

Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Steelwork
Part 6 Superstructure (excluding roofs)

Chapter 6.5
 6.5
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Steelwork

CONTENTS SCOPE

DESIGN Clause Page This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
Requirements and recommendations for steelwork to support
Design standards D1 1
masonry partitions, timber floors and to trim floor voids.
Structural design D2 1
Padstones D3 1

MATERIALS
Materials standards M1 1
Steelwork M2 1
Padstones M3 1
Connections M4 1

SITEWORK
Sitework standards S1 2
Steelwork S2-S3 2

APPENDIX 6.5-A
Design tables for support of masonry 2
partitions (no floor loads)
Table 1 - Load of partition to be 2
supported
Table 2 - Size of steel beam supporting 2
partition
Table 3 - Size of padstone 3

APPENDIX 6.5-B
6.5

Design tables for support of floors (no 3

masonry partition loads)
Table 4 - Size of steel beam supporting 4
floor
Table 5 - Size of padstone 4

APPENDIX 6.5-C
Connection of beams supporting 5
floors

INDEX 5
 6.5
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Steelwork

DESIGN STANDARDS
(d) steelwork to steelwork connection STEELWORK
Connections between steel beams should
be designed. 6.5 - M2 Steelwork shall be of sufficient
6.5 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical strength and durability
Requirements Where appropriate, steelwork beam-to-beam
connections should be in accordance with Steelwork will be acceptable if it complies
Design that follows the guidance below will with Clause M1 above and is based on:
Appendix 6.5-C.
be acceptable for steelwork supporting
either masonry partitions or floors. Appendix 6.5-C uses bolted connections BS 4 Part 1 Structural steel sections :
(using black bolts) or welding. Connections Specification for hot-rolled
STRUCTURAL DESIGN requiring the use of other forms of sections, or
connection (such as high strength friction
6.5 - D2 Steelwork shall be designed grip bolts) should be designed by an BS 4848 Specification for hot-rolled
to support and transmit loads to the Engineer in accordance with Technical structural steel sections.
supporting structure without undue Requirement R5.
movement or deflection To ensure durability, steelwork should be
(e) durability given a protective coating system. For
Steelwork (including its support and any steelwork which is to be bolted (using black
Steelwork should be given a protective
connections) should be either: bolts) or not connected, an acceptable
coating system to ensure durability. For
• designed by an Engineer in accordance coating system is one coat of high build
details, refer to Sitework clause 6.5-S3.
with Technical Requirement R5, or zinc phosphate primer and one coat of
• where appropriate, detailed according to (f) fire resistance bituminous paint. Where welding is to be
the designs shown in this Chapter. Steelwork should be provided with the carried out, use the protective coating
The designs shown in this Chapter are in level of fire resistance required by Building system specified by the designer.
accordance with BS EN 1993-1-1 using grade Regulations.
S275 steel and therefore meet statutory PADSTONES
requirements. PADSTONES 6.5 - M3 Padstones shall distribute point
It should be noted that the information 6.5 - D3 Padstones shall distribute point loads safely to the supporting structure
given in this Chapter has been prepared loads safely to the supporting structure
Details of padstones are given in Table 3,
primarily to assist builders in providing
Where a steel beam is supported by Appendix 6.5-A and Table 5, Appendix 6.5-B.
proper support to masonry partitions and
masonry, a padstone may be required to For the design of padstones see Design
floors. The designs given will not always be
spread the load over a sufficiently large area section, clause D2.
the most economic and an engineer may be
of the masonry to prevent overstressing.
able to design a smaller section beam for a
particular situation.
A padstone may be necessary (see Table 3, CONNECTIONS
Appendix 6.5-A and Table 5, Appendix 6.5-B
Items to be taken into account include: for sizes). 6.5 - M4 Connections shall be chosen to
be capable of supporting and transmitting

6.5
(a) support of masonry partitions Where the inner leaf is used to provide a the intended loads
Where appropriate, masonry partitions major contribution to the thermal insulation
may be supported by steelwork selected in of a cavity wall, any padstone that is needed Connections should comply with the design.
accordance with Appendix 6.5-A. should have similar thermal properties to the Bolts will be acceptable if they comply with
masonry used for the rest of the inner leaf the design and are based on the relevant
Care should be taken during construction to
or precautions should be taken to prevent British Standards, including:
avoid the problem of out-of-true masonry
being only partly supported by steelwork. cold bridging.
BS 4190 Specification for ISO metric
(b) support of floors black hexagon bolts, screws
Timber floors can be supported by steelwork. MATERIALS STANDARDS and nuts

Where appropriate, steelwork should be in BS 4395 Specification for high strength

6.5 - M1 All materials shall:
accordance with Appendices 6.5-B and 6.5-C. friction grip bolts and
(a) meet the Technical Requirements
associated nuts and washers
The timber floor should be in accordance (b) take account of the design
for structural engineering
with Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete Materials that comply with the design and
upper floors’ (each section), including proper BS 4604 Specification for the use of
the guidance below will be acceptable
allowance for shrinkage of timber joists high strength friction grip bolts
for steelwork supporting either masonry
supported by steelwork. in structural steelwork.
partitions or floors.
at least 12mm projection Welded connections should comply with:
Materials for steelwork supporting either
masonry partitions or floors shall comply
with all relevant standards, including those BS 5135 Specification for arc welding of
listed below. Where no standard exists, carbon and carbon-manganese
Technical Requirement R3 applies (see steels.
Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards
at least 2mm projection
and Technical Requirements’).

(c) support of steelwork References to British Standards and Codes

of Practice include those made under the
Steelwork may need to be supported on Construction Products Directive (89/106/
padstones to distribute loads safely. EEC) and, in particular, appropriate European
Masonry should be in accordance with Technical Specifications approved by a
Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ (each European Committee for Standardisation
section) or Chapter 6.3 ‘Internal walls’ (each (CEN).
section), as appropriate.

2013 Chapter 6.5 Page 1

 6.5
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Steelwork

SITEWORK STANDARDS Appendix 6.5-A

6.5 - S1 All sitework shall:
(a) meet the Technical Requirements
DESIGN TABLES FOR SUPPORT OF MASONRY PARTITIONS
(b) take account of the design (no floor loads)
(c) follow established good practice and Steel beams in accordance with the Tables 1, 2 and 3 in this Appendix will be acceptable to
workmanship NHBC for the support of masonry partitions, if:
Construction that follows the design and • the masonry partition is not more than 2.7m in height, and
the guidance below will be acceptable • steel beams only support the weight of the masonry partition and self weight, and
for steelwork supporting either masonry
• steel beams span no more than 4.0m, and
partitions or floors.
• the masonry partition is built centrally on the steelwork beam, and
• the masonry partition is of one of the types detailed in Table 1, and
STEELWORK • padstones are provided, where required, and
6.5 - S2 Steelwork shall be installed • the masonry supporting the steel beam is of at least 2.8N/mm2 blockwork (workface
to achieve the required structural size 440mm x 215mm) or brickwork and the beam supports do not occur over a door or
performance window opening.

Items to be taken into account include: If any of the above limitations are not met, steelwork should be designed in accordance with
(a) the section size and grade detailed in Technical Requirement R5.
the design Method of applying tables
When materials are delivered to site, check
that they conform with either: 1 Check that the situation is within all the limitations detailed above.
• the Engineer’s design, or 2 Identify the masonry partition construction and thickness.
• the steelwork sizes given in the 3 Use Table 1 to establish the load per metre run.
Appendices to this Chapter. 4 Check the span of the beam(s).
5 Use Table 2 to determine a suitable steel section size.
(b) bearings 6 Check whether padstones are required - see Table 3.
Bearings for steelwork should be:
• at least 100mm, and (To help in applying the tables, a worked example is given at the end of this Appendix.)
• clean, dry and level.
Padstones may be required in accordance
Table 1 - Load of partition to be supported
with: Type of masonry for supported Maximum masonry density Structural thickness [mm]
• the Engineer’s design, or partition (not more than 2.7m high [kg/m3]
100 90 75
• the guidance given in Table 3, Appendix and plastered both sides)
6.5-A and Table 5, Appendix 6.5-B. Load [kN/m run]
6.5

(c) connections Dense masonry 2000 6.8 6.2 5.4

Where steelwork-to-steelwork connections Medium masonry 1400 5.1 4.8 4.2
are required, follow either: Lightweight masonry 800 3.5 3.3 2.9
• the Engineer’s design, or
• the guidance given in Appendix 6.5-C.
Table 2 - Size of steel beam supporting partition
Only weld, cut or drill steelwork if it is
required by the design. Partition load (from Table 1) Clear span of beam Smallest suitable Universal Beam size
[kN/m run] [m] [mm x mm x kg/m]
6.5 - S3 Steelwork shall be protected to Less than 3 up to 4 127 x 76 x 13
achieve the required durability over 4 see Note 2
To ensure durability, steelwork should be 3 to 5 up to 3 127 x 76 x 13
given a protective coating system. 3 to 3.5 152 x 89 x 16
3.5 to 4 178 x 102 x 19
For steelwork which is to be bolted over 4 see Note 2
(using black bolts), or not connected, an
5 to 7 up to 2.5 127 x 76 x 13
acceptable coating system is one coat of
2.5 to 3 152 x 89 x 16
high build zinc phosphate primer and one 3 to 4 178 x 102 x 19
coat of bituminous paint. over 4 see Note 2
Where steelwork is to be protected by
intumescent paint for fire purposes, Notes to Table 2
manufacturers’ recommendations should 1 For spans up to 4m, Universal Column 152mm x 152mm x 23kg/m, which is the smallest
be followed. size available, may be used.
2 For spans over 4m, beams should be designed by an Engineer in accordance with
STEELWORK - UNGALVANIZED Technical Requirement R5.
Internal and external steelwork that has
not been galvanized should be protected
with at least:
• two coats of zinc phosphate primer, and
• a suitable decorative finish where required.
STEELWORK - GALVANIZED
Unless steelwork is galvanized to a rate
of 460g/m2, it should be protected as
described for ungalvanized.

Page 2 Chapter 6.5 2013

 6.5
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Steelwork

Table 3 - Size of padstone Appendix 6.5-B

Type of masonry for Thickness of wall supporting beam [mm]
Minimum
supported partition (not
more than 2.7m high and 100 125 140 150 190 215 depth of DESIGN TABLES FOR
plastered both sides) Min length of padstone [mm]
padstone [mm]
SUPPORT OF FLOORS
Dense masonry 215 190 185 180 165 155 150 (no masonry partition loads)
Medium masonry 155 140 135 130 120 110 150 Limitations
Lightweight masonry 95 85 80 75 70 70 150 Steel beams in accordance with Tables 4
and 5 in this Appendix will be acceptable to
Notes to Table 3 NHBC for the support of floors, if:
1 Padstones are not necessary where the flange dimension of the beam exceeds the length • the floor construction is of decking
of the padstone given in this table. (softwood boarding, chipboard, oriented
2 When steelwork is in line with the wall supporting it (ie when acting as a lintel over an strand board or plywood) on timber
opening): joists with a plasterboard ceiling
• the flange dimension of the beam should not be more than 50mm greater than the underneath which is given either a
thickness of the supporting wall, and plaster skim coat or a plastic finish
• the minimum length of padstone should be 200mm, and (Artex or similar), and
• the padstone depth should match the coursing of adjacent masonry, and • allowance has been made of 0.5kN/m2
• the web of the beam should be over the centre of the wall. for self weight (floor and ceiling load)
3 The minimum length of steel bearing onto padstone should be 100mm. and
4 Padstones can be formed from: • the floor does not support masonry
• in-situ concrete partitions, and
• precast concrete • any lightweight partition (such as
• concrete blocks plasterboard on timber studwork or
• clay bricks. proprietary product) is non-loadbearing,
and
Padstones should be formed in one unit with a minimum compressive strength of 10N/mm2. • padstones are provided, where required,
and
For padstone sizes less than 215mm x 100mm, engineering bricks will be suitable.
• clear span of beam does not exceed
Worked Example wall supported by steel beam 4.4m, and
-75mm thick
-medium density (1200kg/m3) • connections between steelwork beams
-plastered both sides
-2.6m high are in accordance with Appendix 6.5-C
or are designed by an Engineer, and
• the floor support is one of the methods
shown in Figure 1.

6.5
outer
padstone If any of the above limitations are not
met, steelwork should be designed by an
inner
Engineer in accordance with Technical
100mm steel beam
padstone Requirement R5.
-opening 3.8m
-min 100mm bearing
at each end
100mm Method of applying tables
Procedure 1 Check that the situation is within all the
1 Using information about the supported wall and Table 1: limitations detailed above.
• load per metre run = 4.2kN/m. 2 Using Figure 1, determine the area
2 Using the load per metre run, the span of the beam and Table 2: supported by the beam(s).
• suitable section size = 178 x 102 x 19 UB (The alternative 152 x 152 x 23 UC is not suitable 3 Check the span of the beam(s).
as it is too wide for the inner padstone/wall.) 4 Use Table 4 to determine a suitable steel
3 Using information about the wall supporting the beam (100mm thick), the walls supported section size.
by the beam (medium density block) and Table 3: 5 Check whether padstones are required
• minimum padstone size = 155mm long by Table 5.
6 If steel beam-to-steel beam connections
= 150 mm deep
are required, use Appendix 6.5-C.
• outer padstone (beam at right angles to wall):
- minimum length = 155mm
(as this is greater than the flange dimension of the steel section obtained in 2 above -
102mm - a padstone is required to distribute the load)
- minimum depth = 150mm
- thickness = 100mm, to match blockwork
(The actual length and depth of a padstone could be greater to suit masonry coursing.)
• inner padstone (beam in line with the wall):
- minimum length = 200mm (see Note 2 to Table 3)
- minimum depth = 150mm
- thickness = 100mm, to match blockwork.

Note
Beam supports should not occur above window or door openings

2013 Chapter 6.5 Page 3

 6.5
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Steelwork

Figure 1 - Effective areas supported by Table 4 - Size of steel beam supporting floor
steel beams Effective Effective Smallest suitable steel section size
If any area shown as ‘void’ contains a staircase, add 2m2 to the area trimmer span (mm x mm x kg/m)
supported = clear span +
effective area supported by any beam which supports (partially or Universal beam Universal column
(m2) 100mm (m)
fully) that staircase.
0 to 20 0 to 2.0 127 x 76 x 13 152 x 152 x 23
B
0 to 20 2 to 2.5 127 x 76 x 13 152 x 152 x 23
20 to 30 152 x 89 x 16 152 x 152 x 23
0 to 10 2.5 to 3 127 x 76 x 13 152 x 152 x 23
10 to 20 152 x 89 x 16 152 x 152 x 23
A A
20 to 30 178 x 102 x 19 152 x 152 x 23
wall wall
under under
B 0 to 10 3 to 3.5 127 x 76 x 13 152 x 152 x 23
A A 10 to 30 178 x 102 x 19 152 x 152 x 23
30 to 40 203 x 133 x 25 152 x 152 x 30
0 to 10 3.5 to 4 152 x 89 x 16 152 x 152 x 23
Beam Effective area Beam Effective area 10 to 20 178 x 102 x 19 152 x 152 x 23
AA AA +
20 to 30 203 x 102 x 23 152 x 152 x 23
30 to 40 203 x 102 x 30 152 x 152 x 30
BB 40 to 50 see Note 1 152 x 152 x 37
0 to 10 4 to 4.5 203 x 102 x 23 152 x 152 x 23
10 to 20 203 x 133 x 25 152 x 152 x 23
20 to 30 203 x 133 x 30 152 x 152 x 30
30 to 40 see Note 1 152 x 152 x 37
40 to 50 see Note 1 203 x 203 x 46

Note to Table 4
A A A A
B B 1 Beams should be designed by an Engineer in accordance with
void void Technical Requirement R5.
B B

Beam Effective area Beam Effective area

Table 5 - Size of padstone
AA + AA Effective area Minimum padstone size [mm]
BB BB supported
(as used in Table 4) Thickness of wall supporting steel beam [mm]
B C B C [m2] Up to 105 105 to 155 156 to 216
6.5

length depth length depth length depth

Up to 10 95 150 80 150 70 150
10 to 20 185 150 160 150 140 150
20 to 30 275 150 240 150 210 150
A A A A
30 to 40 365 215 320 150 280 150
void void
B C B C 40 to 50 455 300 400 215 345 215

Beam Effective area Beam Effective area

Notes to Table 5
AA AA
1 See limitations listed at the beginning of this Appendix.
BB + BB
2 Padstones are not necessary where the flange dimension of the
CC + CC beam exceeds the length of the padstone given in this table.
3 Where the steelwork is in line with the wall supporting it (ie
acting to form a lintel over an opening):
• the steel flange dimension should not be more than 50mm
greater than the thickness of the supporting wall, and
• the minimum length of padstone should be 200mm, and
• the padstone depth should match the coursing of adjacent
masonry, and
• the web of the beam should be over the centre of the wall.
4 Padstones can be formed from:
• in-situ concrete
• precast concrete
• concrete blocks
• clay bricks.
Padstones should be formed in one unit with a minimum
compressive strength of 10N/mm2.
For padstone sizes less than 215mm x 100mm, engineering bricks
will be suitable.

Page 4 Chapter 6.5 2013

 6.5
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Steelwork

Appendix 6.5-C
INDEX
Connection of beams B M
supporting floors Beams 2, 4 Masonry partitions, support 1, 2
The connection methods shown in this Bearings 2 P
Appendix (determined using Appendix Bolted connections 1 Padstones 1, 3, 4
6.5-B) are suitable for connecting steel C Partitions 2
beams used to support floor loads
Clear span 4 Point loads 1
25mm Coatings 1, 2 S
Cold bridging 1 Section size 2
maximum 170mm

cleats from 70 x 70 x 6 rolled

= steel angle (one each side)
at least Connections 1, 2, 5 Staircase 4
80mm cleats joined to beams with
= 3 No M20 bolts with washers D Support 1, 2, 3
or 6mm fillet weld all round
Design, structural 1 T
maximum 10mm Durability 1, 2 Timber floors 1
JOINT BETWEEN BEAMS OF SIMILAR SIZE
(neither beam deeper than 170mm)
E V
Effective areas 4 Voids 4
25mm F W
Fire resistance 1 Welding 1, 2
35mm Floors, support 1, 3
170mm to 230mm

cleats from 70 x 70 x 6 rolled

steel angle (one each side)

50mm cleats joined to beams with G

6 No M20 bolts with washers
or 6mm fillet weld all round Galvanized steel 2
35mm
Grade 2
I
maximum 10mm
Intumescent paint 2
JOINT BETWEEN BEAMS OF SIMILAR SIZE
(beams 170mm to 230mm deep)

Limitations
Limitations on the use of this method are:

6.5
• neither beam is to support masonry
partitions, and
• both beams have been chosen from
Table 4 of Appendix 6.5-B, and
• beams do not differ in depth by more
than 40mm.
The following connections should be
designed by an Engineer in accordance
with Technical Requirement R5:
• between steel sections which differ in
depth by more than 40mm, or
• between steel sections, one of which
carries floor loads and one of which
carries a masonry partition, or
• between steel sections which have not
been derived using Appendix 6.5-B, or
• between steel sections which both carry
masonry partitions.

2013 Chapter 6.5 Page 5

Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Staircases
Part 6 Superstructure (excluding roofs)

Chapter 6.6
 6.6
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Staircases

CONTENTS SCOPE

DESIGN Clause Page This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for staircases.
Statutory requirements D2 1
Safe transmission of loads D3 1
Staircase width and headroom D4 1
Design of steps D5 1
Landings D6 2
Handrails D7 2
Guarding D8 2
Fire Precautions D9 2
Lighting D10 2
Provision of information D11-D12 2

MATERIALS
Materials standards M1 3
Staircase units M2 3
Timber and wood-based products M3 3
In-situ and precast concrete M4 3
Fixings M5 3

SITEWORK
Sitework standards S1 3
Location and fixing S2 3
Timber staircases S3-S4 3-4
Concrete staircases S5-S7 4
Steel staircases S8-S9 4
6.6

Handrails and balustrades S10-S11 4

Protection of finished work S12 5

APPENDIX 6.6-A
Design aid for rise and going 6

INDEX 7
 6.6
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Staircases

DESIGN STANDARDS STAIRCASE WIDTH AND The dimensions of the rise (R) and the
going (G) should usually be related so that
HEADROOM 2R+G is between 550mm and 700mm.
6.6 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical
6.6 - D4 Staircase design shall ensure A design aid giving the relationship
Requirements
adequate provision for: between rise and going is given in
Design that follows the guidance below will
(a) headroom Appendix 6.6-A.
be acceptable for staircases.
The minimum headroom above stairs Further information on staircase design
should be measured vertically from the
STATUTORY pitch line. The clear headroom (h) over
may be found in BS 5395.

REQUIREMENTS the entire length and width of a stairway, (b) consistent rise and going
including landings, should be 2.0m. In each flight of stairs all the steps should
6.6 - D2 Design shall comply with all
relevant statutory requirements have the same rise and going.

Design should be in accordance with The thicknesses of screeds and floor

relevant Building Regulations and other finishes should be taken into account.
statutory requirements. h

landing
SAFE TRANSMISSION OF
h
LOADS unequal rises
do not comply

6.6 - D3 Design shall ensure that

pitch
loads are properly supported and line

transmitted to the supporting structure

without undue movement, deflection or (c) tapered treads and winders
deformation The rise of tapered treads should be the
Generally, all stairs and staircases should (b) minimum unobstructed width same as that of adjacent parallel treads.
comply with BS 5395 : Parts 1 and 2. No recommendations are given for The going should be uniform and not less
minimum widths in England, Wales and the than the going of the associated straight
Items to be taken into account include: Isle of Man. Where staircases form part flight. The going should be measured from
(a) timber staircase construction of means of escape, reference should be the centre line of the straight flight (as
Timber domestic staircases with straight made to the relevant Building Regulations. shown below).
flights and quarter- or half-landings should
Dimensions for stair widths in Scotland and
comply with BS 585. Particular attention
Northern Ireland should be in accordance
should be paid to the performance
with relevant Statutory Requirements.
requirements for strength, deflection and equal
going

6.6
centre
vibration under load, given in BS 585 : line
Part 2. DESIGN OF STEPS
The method of fixing flights to the 6.6 - D5 The design of steps shall allow
surrounding structure should be specified. safe use of the staircase g

Items to be taken into account include:

(b) concrete staircase construction
(a) pitch
Reinforced concrete staircases should
The maximum angle of pitch of a stairway
be designed to BS EN 1992-1-1 and centre
should not exceed: line
comply with Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its
• 42° for private stairs
reinforcement’ (each section) and, where
• 38° for common or access stairs.
appropriate, designed by an Engineer in Minimum going (g) [mm]
accordance with Technical Requirement R5. England and Wales 50

(c) steel staircase construction Scotland 50

Steel staircases should be designed to BS pitch Northern Ireland 50
line
EN 1993-1-1. Isle of Man 50

(d) proprietary staircase construction angle (d) safe foothold

of pitch
Proprietary staircases should: All steps should have level treads.
• comply with an assessment in
accordance with Technical Requirement Stairs with open risers should have treads
R3 that overlap 16mm minimum.
• be suitable for their required use and
The dimensions for maximum rise and
location.
minimum going should be:
overlap
(e) differential movement all gaps
Maximum Minimum less then
When considering differential movement in Type of stairs 100mm
rise [mm] going [mm]
relation to setting out, levels and finishes,
allowances should be made for: Private stairs 220 220
• casting tolerances Common stairs 190 250
• deflection under load (not Scotland)
Where stairs are open to the weather or
• foundation settlement Access stairs 190 250
may otherwise become wet, a non-slip
• creep and shrinkage (Scotland)
finish or an insert to each tread should be
• storey height.
specified.

2013 Chapter 6.6 Page 1

 6.6
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Staircases

LANDINGS • that handrail ends do not project to should comply with the relevant Building
catch clothing, etc. Regulations.
6.6 - D6 Landings shall be designed to
allow safe use of the staircase Ventilation of staircases serving flats in
GUARDING buildings of three or more storeys should
Landings should be provided at the top comply with BS 5588.
6.6 - D8 Guarding shall be designed to
and bottom of every flight. The width and
prevent accidents by falling
depth of landings should be at least the
same as the width of the stair. Items to be taken into account include: LIGHTING
(a) resistance to loads 6.6 - D10 Lighting shall be provided to
Landings should be properly framed to
Guarding should be: ensure safe use of the staircase
provide full support and secure fixings for
• capable of resisting a horizontal force
flights, nosings, newels, etc. Artificial light sources should be provided
of 0.36kN/m at its minimum required
to all staircases and landings. Within
Where pivot windows are being used, they height
dwellings, lighting to stairs should be
should not obstruct the landing area or • a solid wall or balustrading.
controlled by two way switching.
stair flight when in the open position.
Where guardrails or balustrades are long,
Where the Public Lighting Authority
Generally, door swings should not obstruct the newel posts may not be sufficient to
specify and maintain control of entrance
landings. However, a door may open across transfer horizontal forces to the structure
lighting, their requirements should be
the bottom landing of a flight of private and intermediate posts may be needed.
met. Otherwise, landings and staircases
stairs if the swing is at least 400mm from in common areas to dwellings should be
The method of fixing newels should be
the first tread and the dwelling is not over provided with adequate artificial lighting.
specified (eg through-bolted to joists).
two storeys high. Manual two way switching, controlled by
Any glazing in the guarding should be people using these areas is acceptable.
bottom
landing
toughened or laminated glass, or glass Automatic light sensitive controls may be
blocks. Wired glass is not regarded as safe used, provided lights can also be switched
for this purpose and should not be used. two way manually.
at least
400mm (b) dimensional requirements Reference should be made to Chapter
Guarding should be provided along the 8.1 ‘Internal services’ (Design) for further
full length of the open sides of all stairs details on lighting.
and landings when the drop is more than
600mm at any point. To comply with Where staircases are lit by glazing, any
HANDRAILS relevant Building Regulations, guarding glass below the minimum height of
may be required where a stair abuts an guarding (see Table to Clause D8(b))
6.6 - D7 Handrails shall be designed to
opening window. should be:
provide a safe handhold
• protected by a balustrade or railing, or
A handrail is required to all flights of stairs Guarding is not needed when the rise is • glass (toughened or laminated), or
6.6

that rise over 600mm. less than 600mm and when the stair or • constructed of glass blocks.
landing is not a means of escape.
Where winders are used, Building
Regulations (Northern Ireland) require Balustrading should be designed so that it PROVISION OF
a handrail to be fitted on the side where is not easily climbed by children. INFORMATION
tapered treads have the greater going.
No opening in the balustrade should 6.6 - D11 Designs and specifications
be large enough for a 100mm diameter shall be produced in a clearly
sphere to pass through. understandable format and include all
relevant information
Type of stairs Minimum guarding
height [mm] Usually, staircase drawings and
specifications should show:
flights landings • layout of stairs
Private stairs 900 900 • dimensions covering width, rise and
(England, going, handrail height, etc
Wales, Northern • fixings of stairs, treads, risers, strings,
Ireland
and the Isle of Man)
balustrades, newel posts and handrails,
at least
as appropriate
Private stairs 840 900
25mm
(Scotland)
• the length of time before formwork can
be removed from in-situ concrete stairs
Common stairs 900 1100
• whether precast concrete or steel
staircases can be used immediately
after erection or whether time should be
FIRE PRECAUTIONS allowed to cure grouted connections.
Handrails should be at a height between
6.6 - D9 Staircases shall provide the
900mm (840mm in Scotland) and 6.6 - D12 All relevant information shall
necessary means of escape in case of
1000mm. be distributed to appropriate personnel
fire
Design should ensure: Ensure that design and specification
Timber staircases are acceptable within
• a firm handhold information is issued to site supervisors
a single family dwelling where there are
• that trapping or injuring the hand is and relevant specialist subcontractors and/
no more than four storeys, excluding the
prevented or suppliers.
basement.
• a minimum 25mm clearance at the back
of the handrail Houses of three or more storeys and
• secure fixing flats in buildings of three or more storeys

Page 2 Chapter 6.6 2013

 6.6
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Staircases

(b) plywood the entire length and width of a stairway,

MATERIALS STANDARDS Plywood should be used only for risers and including landings, should be 2.0m.
should comply with BS EN 636.
6.6 - M1 All materials shall:
(a) meet with Technical Requirements (c) chipboard
(b) take account of the design Chipboard should comply with Type P5 of
Materials that comply with the design and BS EN 312. h

the guidance below will be acceptable for (d) oriented strand board landing
staircases. Oriented strand board should comply with
h
Materials for staircases should comply Type OSB3 of BS EN 300.
with all relevant standards, including those
(e) medium density fibreboard
listed below. Where no standard exists, pitch
Fibre building boards should comply with line
Technical Requirement R3 applies (see
BS 1142 : Part 2.
Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards
and Technical Requirements’). (f) laminated timber
References to British Standards and Codes Glued laminated timber structural (b) overall vertical rise
of Practice include those made under the members should comply with BS 4169. Staircases are normally manufactured off
Construction Products Directive (89/106/ site so the floor-to-floor dimensions should
EEC) and, in particular, appropriate IN-SITU AND PRECAST be accurate. An allowance should be made
European Technical Specifications for floor finishes to structural floors or
approved by a European Committee for
CONCRETE staircase treads.
Standardisation (CEN). 6.6 - M4 Concrete shall be of the
mix proportions to achieve adequate (c) pitch
strength as required by the design Staircases should be accurately located
STAIRCASE UNITS and fixed with the string at the correct
6.6 - M2 Proprietary staircases Reference should be made to Chapter 2.1 angle so all treads are horizontal.
‘Concrete and its reinforcement’ (Design
and associated components shall
and Materials) for guidance on concrete, (d) landings
comply with the design and Technical
reinforcement and additives. Landings, where required, should be
Requirements
properly framed to provide full support
Where proprietary staircases or FIXINGS to and secure fixings for flights, nosings,
associated components are proposed, newels, apron linings, etc.
they should meet the statutory and design 6.6 - M5 Fixings shall be of adequate
requirements for stairs, as detailed in the strength and durability and comply with (e) floor finishes
drawings and/or specification. the design Allowance should be made for stair and
Fixings should be checked for compliance floor finishes to ensure that all risers are

6.6
Manufacturers of staircases and equal.
balustrading, etc should be sent all with the design and whether they are
relevant drawings and other information provided by the supplier, especially for:
to ensure their products meet the design • timber and steel staircases stair
requirements. • newel posts finish

• handrails
Allowance should be made for tolerances • guarding and balustrading. all risers
or actual site dimensions. equal

TIMBER AND WOOD-BASED SITEWORK STANDARDS

PRODUCTS 6.6 - S1 All sitework shall: floor
finish

6.6 - M3 Timber and wood-based (a) meet the Technical Requirements

materials shall be of sufficient quality (b) take account of the design
and durability for use in staircases (c) follow established good practice and
workmanship
Items to be taken into account include:
Construction that follows the design and TIMBER STAIRCASES
(a) timber
the guidance below will be acceptable for 6.6 - S3 Timber staircases shall:
Timber for joinery should:
staircases. (a) have secure component parts,
• comply with BS 1186 : Part 1
• be Class 3 or better, and including strings, treads and risers,
• be free of resinous knots, splits, shakes LOCATION AND FIXING newel posts, balusters and handrails
and wanes. 6.6 - S2 Staircases shall be correctly (b) be securely fixed to the supporting
located and fixed structure
Fits of joints, construction of joints, moving
parts, glueing, laminating, construction of Items to be taken into account include: Strings should be glued to newel posts and
finger joints and surface finish should be to secured with dowels or screws. Particular
(a) headroom
BS 1186 : Part 2. attention should be given to winders;
The overall floor opening should be
remedying problems, such as deflection
Timber which is to be exposed to the checked for size to accept the stairs and to
and/or squeaking, can be difficult,
weather should be suitably durable or allow sufficient headroom.
especially if the soffit covering has been
be pre-treated with preservative against The minimum headroom above stairs fixed.
fungal attack in accordance with Chapter should be measured vertically from the
2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural solid Landings should be framed to provide full
pitch line. The clear headroom (h) over
timber)’. support and solid fixings for the tops of
flights, nosings, newels, apron linings, etc.

2013 Chapter 6.6 Page 3

 6.6
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Staircases

Newel posts should be plumb and fixed Minimum

securely. cover [mm]

The top nosing should be level with the Internal staircases 25

floor decking and should be fixed firmly. Staircases open to the weather 50

nosing securely seated

and fixed level with
(b) allowance for nosings and any cast-in
floor decking finishes
Allowance should be made for pre-formed
nosings or non-slip finishes, if specified
(see also Clause S5).

(c) correct striking of formwork at least

25mm
Formwork should be struck in accordance
with the design, normally:
• side formwork - after 24 hours
string securely
fixed to wall • soffit and support formwork - after 28
days.

6.6 - S7 Appropriate measures shall be 6.6 - S11 Balustrading shall be securely

taken when concreting in cold weather fixed and constructed to reduce the risk
6.6 - S4 Finished joinery shall be free of it being climbed up or fallen through
from unsightly blemishes Reference should be made to Chapter 1.4
‘Cold weather working’ when concrete, Statutory regulations require that
Finished joinery should be free from splits, mortar, grout or other materials containing balustrading:
knocks and other damage which would water are used. • is fixed securely
impair its structural performance or finish. • cannot be easily climbed, and
• has no gaps which would allow a 100mm
Handrails should have a smooth finish, free STEEL STAIRCASES diameter sphere to pass through.
from rough edges. No handrail bracket or
6.6 - S8 The supporting structure shall
screw head should present a sharp edge.
be accurately set out to receive steel
Nails should be punched below the surface staircases
of the wood and stopped. The supporting structure should be
constructed within the tolerance limits
CONCRETE STAIRCASES set for the steel staircase. Treads should
6.6 - S5 The structure shall be set be checked for level. The correct fixings
out and constructed to ensure that should be available.
6.6

staircases are correctly located and 6.6 - S9 All work shall be carried
levelled out strictly in accordance with
100mm diameter spheres
PRECAST CONSTRUCTION manufacturers’ instructions cannot pass through gaps

When setting out levels, account should Manufacturers’ assembly and erection
be taken of the thickness of finishes to the instructions should be available and
floor or landing, as well as any finish to be followed.
applied to the stair treads. Particular care In concrete staircases, balustrading may be:
is needed at the top and bottom of each HANDRAILS AND • grouted into pre-formed holes or
flight. pockets
BALUSTRADES • bolted or screwed into pre-drilled holes
Precast units should be accurately located
and levelled. 6.6 - S10 A handrail shall be correctly • bolted to brackets cast into the concrete.
located and fixed to provide a safe
handhold Fixing methods for balustrading should
IN-SITU CONSTRUCTION
allow a degree of tolerance. It may be
Shuttering for in-situ concrete elements A handrail should be provided for any flight preferable to take measurements from
or connections should be accurately that rises 600mm or more. The handrail the completed staircase, whether of
constructed to ensure a consistent rise should be fixed between 900mm (840mm in-situ or precast construction, before
and going. in Scotland) and 1000mm vertically above manufacturing the balustrading. This will
the pitch line. ensure that the fixings are positioned
FLOOR FINISHES
For both precast and in-situ staircases, The ends of the handrail should be shaped correctly and allow for variations in the
allowance should be made for the or returned to the wall to prevent clothes surrounding structure.
thickness of finish at the top and bottom catching on projections. Design details on the spacing of bolt
of flights. fixings for balustrades or handrails should
Throughout its whole length the handrail
should be: be followed.
6.6 - S6 Concrete staircases shall be
constructed to provide satisfactory final • fixed securely
performance • continuous
• smooth and unobstructed
Items to be taken into account include: • at least 25mm from any surface.
(a) correct placing of reinforcement to
give the required cover Check that fixing and location are in
Chairs or spacing blocks should be used accordance with the design.
to give the following minimum cover to
reinforcement:

Page 4 Chapter 6.6 2013

 6.6
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Staircases

Care should be taken when using

expanding fixings near the edges of
concrete (whether in-situ or precast).

dimensions
should be
sufficient to
avoid fracture

PROTECTION OF FINISHED
WORK
6.6 - S12 On completion, staircases
shall be undamaged, fixed properly and
suitable for handover
When stored, staircases should be stacked
on bearers. Wood staircases should be
stored under cover and be fixed in place
only when the building is weathertight.
Staircases, stair treads, nosings,
balustrades and handrails may be protected
with timber strips, plywood or building
paper. Plastic sheeting should not be used
to protect stairs because it gives a slippery
surface which is not safe to walk on.

6.6
treads and
nosings protected

2013 Chapter 6.6 Page 5

 6.6
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Staircases

Appendix 6.6-A

Design aid for rise and going

Rise and going which intersect within the relevant shaded areas meet the criteria 2R+G between 550mm and 700mm.

220
244

210

200
198
243
190

187
180

170

Rise
160
[mm]

150

140

130

120
6.6

110

100
220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380

Going
[mm]

Key
Private stairs - whole of shaded area
Common stairs - hatched area only
Based on Figure 11 in BS 5395 : Part 1.

Page 6 Chapter 6.6 2013

 6.6
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Staircases

INDEX

B I R
Balusters 3, 4, 5 In-situ concrete 3, 4 Reinforcement 4
C J Rise 1, 3, 6
Chipboard 3 Joinery 4 S
Concrete 3 L Steel staircases 1, 4
Concrete staircases 1, 4, 5 Landings 1, 2, 3 Steps 1
D Lighting 2 Straight flights 1
Differential movement 1 Location 3 Strings 3
Doors 2 M T
Durability 3 Means of escape 2 Timber 3
F Medium density fibreboard 3 Timber staircases 1, 3
Finish 4 Movement 1 Treads 1, 3, 4
Fire precautions 2 N W
Fixings 1, 3, 4, 5 Nosings 3, 4, 5 Width 1, 3
Floor finishes 3, 4 Newel posts 3 Winders 1
Formwork 4 O
G Oriented strand board 3
Going 1, 6 P
Guarding 2 Pitch 1, 3
H Plywood 3
Handrails 2, 3, 4 Precast concrete 3, 4
Headroom 1, 3 Proprietary staircases 1, 3
Protection 5

6.6

2013 Chapter 6.6 Page 7

Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Doors, windows and glazing

Part 6 Superstructure (excluding roofs)

Chapter 6.7
 6.7
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Doors, windows and glazing

CONTENTS SCOPE

DESIGN Clause Page This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
Requirements and recommendations for doors, windows and
Design standards D1 1 glazing, including where coupled door and window frame
Statutory requirements D2 1 assemblies are contained within a single storey.
Environmental factors D3 1 Coupled door and window frame assemblies which are:
Security D4 1
• one storey or more in height, or
Inservice performance D5 2
Resistance to decay D6 2 • not contained between a structural floor and ceiling
Glazing D7 2 should be designed in accordance with Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain
Provision of information D8 3 walling and cladding’.

MATERIALS
Materials standards M1 3
Timber doors and windows M2-M4 3
Non-timber doors and windows M5 3
Ironmongery M6 3
Glazing M7 4

SITEWORK
Sitework standards S1 4
Protection against damp S2 4
Location and fixing S3 4
Glazing S4-S5 5
Protection S6 6

INDEX 6
6.7
 6.7
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Doors, windows and glazing

broken, would permit release of the snib by with visitors, without opening their door,
DESIGN STANDARDS hand or arm entry should be laminated. should be considered in place of opening
limitation devices.
6.7 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical DWELLINGS - with an alternative means
Requirements of escape via a door (c) view outside main entrance door
Design that follows the guidance below Lock(s) should provide initial security There should be a means of giving a wide
will be acceptable for doors, windows, and by use of a latch operable with a key angle view of the area immediately outside
glazing. externally and a handle/thumb turn the main entrance door of individual
release internally. The full deadlocking dwellings. Acceptable ways include:
facility should be engaged and be operable • a through-door viewer
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS with a key externally and a handle/thumb • clear glazing either to part of the door
6.7 - D2 Design shall comply with all turn release internally. Locks which comply or a convenient window
statutory requirements with BS 8621, meet these requirements. • closed circuit camera and display, which
External handles on multi-point locking is not linked to television sets.
Design should be in accordance with
relevant Building Regulations and other systems should be twin or split spindle to
(d) secondary external access doors
statutory requirements. avoid operating the latch.
The door should be held closed on a latch
Enhanced security can also be achieved and operable by use of a handle both
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS by providing the facility to deadlock the internally and externally. A deadlocking
internal/thumb turn when leaving the facility should be operable by use of a
6.7 - D3 Design and selection of doors,
dwelling un-occupied. Locks which comply key both internally and externally. Locks
windows and glazing shall take account with BS 10621, meet these requirements. complying with BS 3621 meet these
of location and planning requirements requirements. Alternatively a thumb turn
Items to be taken into account include: DWELLINGS - opening direct to outside may be used internally in place of key
without an alternative means of escape operation. Locks complying to BS 8621
(a) noise control via a door meet these requirements.
Where noise levels are very high, for example The door should be held closed by use of a
near airports or motorways, it may be latch operable with a key externally and a In addition bolts should be fixed securely
advisable to install sound-insulating windows, handle/thumb turn release internally. The at both top and bottom of the door on the
usually of special design and construction. full deadlocking facility should be engaged internal opening edge.
and be operable with a key externally and Where multi-point locking systems are
(b) planning requirements a handle/thumb turn release internally.
Local planning authorities may impose used bolts may be omitted.
Locks which comply with BS 8621, meet
limitations on the shape, size and choice these requirements. External handles on External sliding doors should be secured
of materials for windows and doors, for multi-point locking systems should be by way of multi-point locking system
example in conservation areas. twin or split spindle to avoid operating the with a minimum of three locking points
latch. incorporating mushroom headed bolts,
(c) climatic conditions

6.7
hookbolts or shoot bolts. Where shoot
Climatic conditions, especially wind speed,
DWELLINGS - opening onto a communual bolts are fitted they should engage into the
together with the required level of window
access without an alternative means of head and sill of the door frame. An anti-lift
performance (eg in relation to air tightness),
escape device should also be fitted so that doors
may govern the size of glass panes and
The door should be held closed either cannot be lifted from their frame from the
opening lights in exposed locations.
on a latch operable with a handle both outside.
internally and externally or a roller bolt
SECURITY so that the door cannot slam shut locking
Connections between door and/or frame
components which can be easily released
6.7 - D4 Doors, door frames, windows the homeowner out without a key. The full
from outside should not be used. This
and locks shall be designed and specified deadlocking facility should be engaged
includes accessible screw connections.
so as to improve their resistance to and be operable with a key externally and
unauthorised entry a handle/thumb turn release internally. (e) fittings for windows
Locks which comply with BS 8621, meet Ironmongery for windows should be
Items to be taken into account include: these requirements. supplied as follows:
(a) locks to main entrance doors of Timber or light steel frame walls, should • hinges and fastenings of opening lights
dwellings (including houses, flats and incorporate one of the following: of windows should be of a type which
maisonettes) • timber sheathing minimum 9mm thick, prevents them from being opened from
or the outside when in the closed position
DWELLINGS - all
• expanded metal. • opening lights on all ground floor
All entrance doors of individual dwellings
windows and others which are readily
should be fitted with one (or more) The material should be the full height accessible from the outside may be
securely fixed lock and keep or multi-point of the door and not less than 600mm fitted with lockable devices which cannot
locking system, which has: measured from the lock(s). be released without a key
• at least 1000 differs, and
• where the windows are required by
• a fixing which, if burst open, would not (b) opening limitation devices to main Building Regulations to have background
pull out without breaking the door or its entrance doors ventilation they may be fitted with
frame, and A securely fixed opening limitation device trickle ventilators or some other
• a hardened steel bolt or inserts to should be fitted to main entrance doors means of providing ventilation which is
prevent sawing, and in houses and the entrance doors of controllable and located to avoid undue
• latch and deadlocking facility. individual flats and maisonettes. draughts. Windows with ‘night vent’
Locking devices fitted to entrance doors In sheltered accommodation opening positions are not accepted as meeting
should permit emergency egress without limitation devices should be not inhibit these recommendations.
the use of a key when the dwelling is emergency access. Alternative methods
occupied. Any glazing which, if open or for residents to identify and communicate

2013 Chapter 6.7 Page 1

 6.7
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Doors, windows and glazing

IN SERVICE PERFORMANCE (b) thermal break For detailed information, reference

Where metal windows are to be used, designs should be made to Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber
6.7 - D5 Doors, windows and glazing should incorporate a thermal break. preservation (natural solid timber)’ (each
shall be designed and specified to ensure section).
adequate performance in service (c) ventilation control
Trickle ventilation is covered in Clause D4.
Items to be taken into account include: GLAZING
Mechanical ventilation is covered in
(a) weather resistance 6.7 - D7 Glass and the method of glazing
Chapter 8.1 ‘Internal services’ (Design).
Windows and external doors exposed shall be selected to:
to wind-driven rain may need particular (d) fire safety (a) resist wind loads
protection to ensure they remain Fire resisting doors and positive self- The quality and thickness of normal
weathertight. closing devices should be fitted where window glass should be specified to suit
required by Building Regulations. the design wind load for the location, in
BS 6375 contains recommendations for
the classification of window components accordance with BS 6262 and relevant
(e) strength
according to their resistance (under test data sheets issued by the Glass and
Door frames and windows and their
to air and water penetration, and wind Glazing Federation.
fittings should be adequate to withstand
pressure. A similar classification is used by operational loads. Structural loads should (b) minimise risk of injury
BBA for certification of windows. be carried on lintels, beams or some other Where there is a high risk of accidental
Water penetration may occur not only structural element. If frames are required breakage, the glazing should be designed
between frame and opening leaf or light, but to carry structural loads, they should be and selected to comply with the safety
also between the frame and the surrounding designed accordingly. recommendations for risk areas specified
structure. Vertical and horizontal dpcs in Approved Document N for England,
(f) resistance to movement, shrinkage
should be provided around the frame in Wales and the Isle of Man, Technical
and the effects of moisture
accordance with Chapter 6.1 ‘External Booklet V in Northern Ireland and BS 6262
Doors and windows should be designed
masonry walls’ (Design and Sitework). in Scotland. Where there is a particular
and selected to avoid significant distortion,
risk, such as at door side panels, ‘low level’
In Scotland, Northern Ireland and other such as twisting and bowing during use.
glazing and where fully glazed panels
locations of Very Severeexposure, rebated Timber shrinkage should be allowed for.
can be mistaken for doors, toughened
reveal construction should be sealed with or laminated glass, or other materials,
To reduce twisting, doors should be hung
an appropriate sealant. such as acrylic or polycarbonate, may be
on hinges as follows:
Reference should be made to Chapter 6.1 needed.
‘External Masonry Walls’ Appendix 6.1-A for Type of door Hinges
(c) ensure adequate performance
categories of exposure to wind driven rain. External 1½ pairs x 100mm
DRAINED AND VENTED SYSTEMS
In all locations where weathertightness Fire door 1½ pairs* x 100mm
• These systems should allow any moisture
is likely to be a problem, additional Airing or cylinder 1½ pairs x 75mm
6.7

that enters the glazing channel between

precautions may be needed, such as: cupboard
the frame and the edge seal of the
• setting the frame back from the facade Other internal 1 pair x 75mm insulating glass unit to be drained away.
• fixing the frame behind a rebate in the The system should prevent long term
* 1 pair where rising butts are used
structural opening (sometimes known as moisture contact with the edge seal.
a ‘check’ reveal)
Window boards may be wetted by
• fixing weather boards and water bars to A gap of at least 5mm should be
condensation. Materials other than natural
external doors but ensuring threshold is provided between the frame’s lower
timber should be moisture-resistant.
accessible where appropriate rebate and the edge seal of the
(g) emergency access insulating glass unit. Adequate drainage
Minimum 12mm
overlap of masonry Where doors to rooms containing a bath or and ventilation should be provided by
(or render) to frame
WC have a securing device, it should be of holes, slots or channels.
sealant
a type capable of being opened from the
25mm
outside in an emergency. Insulating glass units 1m2 or greater in
area should have a drained and vented
sealant In sheltered accommodation, additional
glazing system, whether they are factory
special provisions may be needed for all
glazed or site glazed.
water bar and weatherboard ’rebated‘ or ‘check‘ reveal door locks, limiters and other fasteners, to
provided for external doors in areas of Very Severe exposure
enable wardens to gain access to dwellings Suitable systems and installations are
when necessary. shown in the relevant parts of BS 8000,
• building a projecting porch
• rain check grooves to inward opening BS 6262 and BRE Digest 453. The system
external door frames RESISTANCE TO DECAY should provide adequate protection of the
• a combination of the above. edge seal of the insulating glass unit.
6.7 - D6 Joinery for external doors and
Joints between multiple frames should be windows shall be adequately protected FULLY BEDDED SYSTEMS
engineered as part of the manufacturer’s against decay • Factory glazed methods should be in
system to ensure satisfactory in-service The following elements of timber doors accordance with the relevant parts of BS
performance. and windows should be of naturally 8000, BS 6262 and BRE Digest 453.
Coupled door and window frame assemblies durable timber or timber pre-treated
against fungal decay: Fully bedded systems (acceptable for
one storey or more in height or not contained factory glazing only) rely on no gaps
between a structural floor and ceiling, • external door frames
• windows being left around the perimeter of the
should be designed in accordance with insulating glass units. Moisture that can
Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and cladding’. • timber surrounds to metal windows
• external doors, other than flush doors. reach these areas will lead to the

Page 2 Chapter 6.7 2013

 6.7
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Doors, windows and glazing

breakdown of the edge seal. (a) classification and use Preservative treatment is required for the
Site glazing may incorporate fully bedded All timber and wood-based materials following:
systems on the top and sides of the should comply with the relevant • external door frames
insulating glass unit but the rebate platform requirements of BS EN 942 as follows: • windows
requires a drained and vented bottom bead. • glazing beads - European • timber surrounds to metal windows
• window casements/sashes - ‘J’ classes • external doors, other than flush doors.
INSULATING GLASS UNITS • all other elements - (see table 1 of
• Insulating glass units should comply with BS EN 942). (b) priming
the requirements of BS EN 1279, be CE Material to be painted should be primed
marked and the subject of a third party In England, Wales, Northern Ireland and before fixing. For further guidance on
certification scheme (e.g. Kitemarking). the Isle of Man, planted stops are not preparing elements for painting, see
permitted on frames to external doors. Chapter 8.5 ‘Painting and decorating’
Insulating glass units should normally (each section).
Storey-height frames should be of a section
have a dual seal, or single seal if of hot appropriate to their height and function.
melt butyl, together with desiccant in at (c) staining
least one long and one short section of External doors should be not less than Material to be stained should have the first
the spacer bar. 42.5mm (44mm nominal) in thickness. coat applied before delivery to site.

Wood windows should comply with the 6.7 - M4 Glazing compounds and timber
BEADS
relevant requirements of BS 644 and have stains shall be compatible
In external situations the bottom bead
a minimum rebate depth of 15mm where Compatibility of glazing, sealants and
should project slightly over the rebate
double glazed units are to be installed. finishes should be checked with relevant
edge, and be bedded to the rebate platform.
Medium density fibreboard for window manufacturers.
PROVISION OF boards should be moisture resistant grade.
INFORMATION NON-TIMBER DOORS AND
(b) drying shrinkage
6.7 - D8 All relevant information shall be To minimise drying shrinkage, the moisture WINDOWS
distributed to appropriate personnel content of joinery, when fixed, should not 6.7 - M5 Doors and windows of materials
exceed the following: other than timber shall be in accordance
Ensure that design and specification
Joinery items Moisture content (%)* with appropriate standards
information is issued to site supervisors
and relevant specialist subcontractors Windows and frames 17 Relevant standards include the following:
and/or suppliers. Internal joinery in: BS 4873 Specification for aluminium
- intermittent heating 15 alloy windows

MATERIALS STANDARDS - continuous heating 12 BS 6510 Specification for steel windows,

- in close proximity to 9 window boards and doors
6.7 - M1 All materials shall: a heat source

6.7
BS 7412 Plastics windows made from
(a) meet the Technical Requirements * on delivery, the moisture content should be PVC-U extruded hollow profiles
(b) take account of the design within 2% either side of the values specified.
BS 7413 White PVC-U extruded hollow
Materials that comply with the design and profiles with heat welded
the guidance below will be acceptable for corner joints for plastics
(c) workmanship
windows: materials type A
doors, windows and glazing. All prefabricated items should be
constructed to a good standard of BS 7414 White PVC-U extruded hollow
Joints between door and window frame profiles with heat welded
workmanship, including:
assemblies should be formed with corner joints for plastics
• fit and construction of joints
suitable materials to ensure durability and windows: materials type B.
• construction of finger joints
satisfactory in-service performance.
• glueing and laminating
Third party certification is also required
Materials for doors, windows and glazing • construction of moving parts
for PVC-U windows. Windows which
should comply with all relevant standards, • surface finishes.
are Kitemarked will meet with the
including those listed below. Where no Performance Standard.
Prefabricated components should comply
standard exists, Technical Requirement R3
with the relevant parts of BS 1186 : Part 2.
applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the Doors and windows to which the above
Standards and Technical Requirements’). (d) surface finish British Standards do not apply should
Any surface finishing defects should be have been assessed in accordance with
References to British Standards and Codes Technical Requirement R3.
of Practice include those made under the such that they would not be apparent with
Construction Products Directive (89/106/ a matt paint finish, whether the surface is
EEC) and, in particular, appropriate to be stained or painted, gloss or matt. IRONMONGERY
European Technical Specifications 6.7 - M6 Ironmongery shall be of the
6.7 - M3 Timber for doors and windows
approved by a European Committee for type and material required by the design
shall be of a naturally durable timber
Standardisation (CEN).
species or preservative treated and Items to be taken into account include:
primed
TIMBER DOORS AND (a) relevant standards
Items to be taken into account include: Ironmongery should be provided
WINDOWS in accordance with the design and
(a) preservation
6.7 - M2 Timber and wood-based specification. For critical functions,
Non-durable timbers used externally
materials shall be of the quality and materials should comply with appropriate
should be treated, see Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber
dimensions required by the design standards, including the following:
preservation (natural solid timber)’ (each
Items to be taken into account include: section) for details.

2013 Chapter 6.7 Page 3

 6.7
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Doors, windows and glazing

BS EN Building hardware - single axis Permanent marking of safety glass (including Doors and windows should be installed
1935 hinges - Requirements and test glazed shower/bath screens) is required. correctly so they perform satisfactorily
methods in use.
Glazing materials should be compatible with
BS 3621 Thief resistant lock assembly. Key the required levels of safety and security. The Dpcs should be correctly installed.
egress requirements for critical locations with a high
The dpc should extend approximately
BS 8621 Thief resistant lock assembly. risk of accidental breakage should comply
25mm into the cavity. If a thick block is
Keyless egress with the safety requirements of Approved
used to close the cavity and form the
BS 10621 Thief resistant dual mode lock Document N in England, Wales and the Isle of
reveal, a wider dpc will be required.
assembly Man, Technical Booklet V in Northern Ireland
and BS 6262 in Scotland. Vertical dpcs should extend continuously
BS 4951 Specification for builders’
hardware: lock and latch furniture to the full height of the frame.
(doors)
SITEWORK STANDARDS In Scotland, Northern Ireland and areas of
BS 5872 Specification for locks and Very Severe exposure in England, Wales
latches for doors in buildings 6.7 - S1 All sitework shall: and the Isle of Man, ‘check’ reveals should
BS 6459 Door closers. (a) meet the Technical Requirements be used. Additionally, an appropriate
(b) take account of the design sealant is required between doors and
(b) security (c) follow established good practice and windows and masonry.
Security items for doors and windows are workmanship Minimum 12mm
overlap of masonry
contained in Clause D4. (or render) to frame
Sitework that complies with the design and
(c) door hinges the guidance below will be acceptable for
sealant
The requirements for door hinges are doors, windows and glazing. ’rebated’ or
25mm ’check’ reveal
contained in Clause D5(f). in areas of Very

PROTECTION AGAINST sealant

Severe exposure

GLAZING DAMP
6.7 - M7 Glazing shall be as required by Joints between multiple door and window
6.7 - S2 Door and window components
the design frame assemblies should be part of an
shall, where necessary, be adequately
engineered system and formed using
protected against damp
(a) relevant standards suitable materials in accordance with the
Insulating glass units and glazing materials Items to be taken into account include: manufacturer’s recommendations.
should comply with appropriate British
Standards, including the following: (a) priming (b) fixing
Material to be painted should be primed Window frames and linings should be fixed
BS 5516 Code of Practice for patent
before fixing. Material to be stained should solidly, level and plumb and should be either:
glazing have the first coat applied before delivery • secured by door/window cramps, or
to site. Any material delivered untreated
6.7

• plugged and screwed.

BS 6262 Code of Practice for glazing of should be treated promptly.
buildings Fixings should be not more than 600mm
BS EN Glass in buildings - insulating Neither primer nor the first coat prevent apart and not more than 150mm from
glass units. joinery from taking in moisture. top or bottom. Alternative locations and
1279
fixings are acceptable as long as they
(b) storage provide the same structural stability.
(b) materials When joinery is stored on site, precautions
Glazing components should be compatible should include: When driving wedges or other fixings,
with the frame finishes. Manufacturers’ • avoiding wetting during unloading frames or other components should not
recommendations should be taken into • stacking external joinery on bearers be distorted.
account. Materials from different off the ground and covering with
manufacturers should not be used together Frames and linings should fit tightly into
waterproof material
unless both have agreed in writing. openings and be blocked or packed out at
• storing internal joinery in a weather-
fixing points, where necessary.
Linseed oil based putty should never be protected condition.
used for the installation of laminated glass Frames for external elements should
or insulating glass units. be located in openings so that the head
of the frame is protected by the lintel,
(c) glass and throatings in sill members are not
Glass used in insulating glass units for obstructed by the wall face.
windows and doors should comply with throating
clear of
appropriate British Standards including the wall face
following:
sealant
• Annealed glass - BS EN 572 Joinery which is not properly stored sealant
• Laminated glass - BS EN 14449 or protected may not meet Technical dpc turned up
• Toughened glass - BS EN 12150 Requirement R3. at back and
ends of sill
• Wired glass - BS EN 572
• Low-e coated glasses, including both LOCATION AND FIXING In Scotland, Northern Ireland and areas of
hard and soft coated - BS EN 1096.
6.7 - S3 Doors and windows shall be Very Severe exposure in England, Wales
(d) safety and security and the Isle of Man, it is not acceptable
correctly located and securely fixed
The glass supplier should provide to fix window frames in the outer leaf of
documentation to confirm the properties of Items to be taken into account include: external walls.
the various glasses used and conformance
(a) weathertightness
with the appropriate British Standards.

Page 4 Chapter 6.7 2013

 6.7
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Doors, windows and glazing

(c) bay windows Locks should not be fitted in mortices too GLAZING
To prevent sagging and bowing, bay and tightly and keyholes should be aligned and
bow type windows should be adequately locks should turn easily. The clearance 6.7 - S4 Glass and glazing shall be
supported and secured to the structure to between a door handle and a door stop installed upon delivery or shall be
prevent casements becoming twisted. should be at least 25mm. adequately stored and protected until
required
Bay windows should be properly linked to (h) door hinges
dpcs at reveals. Glass and insulating glass units should be
To reduce twisting, doors should be hung
inspected for visual defects and defects
on hinges as follows:
which could lead to premature failure.
Type of door Hinges Often, defects are caused by:
bay windows External 1½ pairs x 100mm • water accumulating between sheets,
adequately
supported
Fire door which may cause surfaces to become
1½ pairs* x 100mm
marked, and
Airing or cylinder 1½ pairs x 75mm • edge damage or scratching.
cupboard
Other internal 1 pair x 75mm 6.7 - S5 Glazing shall be carried out in
* 1 pair where rising butts are used accordance with relevant standards
Items to be taken into account include:
(i) security (a) size of insulating glass units/sheets
(d) cut ends Security items for doors and windows are
Where pre-treated joinery is cut or Sufficient space should be provided
contained in Clause D4. between the glass edge and the frame to
adjusted on site, the affected surfaces
should be re-treated with two flood brush (j) workmanship allow for thermal expansion of the glass.
coats of appropriate preservative. Internal door frames and linings should be A gap of 3mm is recommended, except for
of the correct widths to match the wall or drained systems where at least 5mm is
partition thickness, including finish. required for drainage at the bottom bead.
Insulating glass units should not be cut or
Frames and linings should be blocked off punctured in any way on site.
walls, wherever possible, to allow for full
architraves. When cutting single sheets of glass or
plastics for windows, an allowance should
be made for thermal movement of the
pane, taking into account:
• the material being used, and
• the size of the pane.
full architrave
(e) window boards This allowance is especially important

6.7
The top surface of window boards should when window rebates are shallow, allowing
be flat and level. Boards should be fixed limited tolerance for expansion of the
All timber trim should be:
close to the frame and adequately secured glazing.
• sufficiently wide to mask joints, and
against twist and other movement,
• fixed so as to minimise movement and
particularly any back slope towards the (b) rebates
shrinkage.
frame. Before glazing, rebates should:
Architraves should be: • have been primed (for timber frames),
Medium density fibreboard should be
• parallel to frame and lining arrises • be rigid and true, and
moisture resistant grade.
• accurately mitred or scribed to fit tightly • be of the correct size for the glazing.
(f) hanging doors and opening lights and neatly
Insulating glass units should be properly
Opening lights and door leaves should • fixed with an equal margin to each
protected by the frame from sunlight. The
hang square within the frame or lining frame member
spacer bar of the insulating glass unit
and fit neatly with minimum gaps, • fixed securely together with linings to
should always be below the level of the
subject to the requirements of effective prevent curling.
frame’s sightline.
weatherstripping. Doors to bathrooms and Nails should be punched below the surface
WCs with mechanical ventilation should be Setting and location blocks should be of
of the timber and holes stopped. Nails
hung with a gap at the bottom or be fitted a suitable resilient material. In drained
should not be driven home with the hammer
with a ventilation grille. and ventilated frames the drainage
head. Damage should be avoided where
channels in the rebate should be free
Where a standard flush door is reduced in easing is necessary. Any damage should be
from obstructions that prevent effective
height, the bottom rail should be replaced made good.
drainage. The dimensions of holes and
if necessary. The leading edges of doors slots should be checked to ensure that
(k) finish upon completion of work
should be protected with timber lipping, effective drainage can occur.
Work should be left in a clean state and
where necessary.
brought to an appropriate level of finish
(c) bead glazing
(g) general ironmongery for other trades.
Beads and linings should be used for:
Where required, hinges and other Finishing trades should not be relied upon • all internal glazing
ironmongery should be housed neatly to correct untidy work. • other locations where shock
flush with the surface. absorptionproperties are required.
The full complement of matching screws Beads should be used:
should be provided and properly screwed • where doors or windows are to be
home. finished with water-borne stains

2013 Chapter 6.7 Page 5

 6.7
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Doors, windows and glazing

• where fully bedded systems are used to be checked to ensure that they comply PROTECTION
install insulating glass units with the design. The insulating glass
• where glazing takes place on site, the units should carry a CE mark to BS EN 6.7 - S6 Completed work shall be free
bottom bead should be drained and 1279 and have a third party assessment from damage
vented. certificate such as the BSI Kitemark. The Keep internal doors covered with
glass type, gas filling, edge seal type and polyethylene or original wrapping.
Beads should be fixed at not more than
dimensions should be checked against the
150mm centres. Door frames and linings should be
documentation and the insulating glass
unit itself. protected with timber strips or plywood to
(d) glazing compounds
at least 1m above skirting level. Thresholds
All materials should be compatible
(f) doors and windows of materials other and window sills should be covered.
and used in accordance with the
than wood Scaffolding and walkways should be kept
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Where doors and windows of materials away from frames.
Materials from different manufacturers
other than timber are delivered to the
should not be used together unless both Joinery should be protected from paint
site unglazed, the glazing should be
have agreed in writing. splashes and other damage.
carried out in strict accordance with the
(e) insulating glass units manufacturer’s instructions. All temporary coverings should be
Unless factory glazed, insulating glass Appropriate fixing and sealing systems removed after all other work has been
units should be installed in accordance should include: completed, before handover.
with the design. In timber frames where • distance pieces, unless load bearing
solid bedding methods are to be used on tapes are used
site, the bottom bead should be drained • setting blocks
and vented. • location blocks where required
Insulating glass units and any • appropriate beads
accompanying documentation should • glazing compounds, sealants, gaskets
and/or capping.

INDEX
6.7

A G S
Aluminium doors and windows 3 Glazing 2, 3, 5 Secondary external access 1
doors
B Glazing compounds 5
Security 1, 3, 4
Bay windows 4 I
Steel doors and windows 3
C Ironmongery 3, 4
Storage 4
Compatibility 3 L
Strength 2
D Locks 1, 3
T
Door hinges 2, 5 M
Timber doors and windows 3
Drained and vented systems 2 Main entrance doors 1
V
Durability 2 P
Ventilation control 2
E Performance 1, 2
W
Emergency access 2 Preservation 2, 3, 4
Weather resistance 1
Environmental factors 1 Priming 3, 4
Weathertightness 1, 4
Escape windows 1 Protection 4, 5
Wind loads 2
F PVC-U doors and windows 3
Workmanship 3, 4
Finish 5 R
Fire safety 2 Rebates 5
Fixing 4
Flats and maisonettes 1
Fully bedded systems 2

Page 6 Chapter 6.7 2013

Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

Part 6 Superstructure (excluding roofs)

Chapter 6.8
 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

CONTENTS

DESIGN Clause Page APPENDIX 6.8-D

Design standards D1 1 Flue outlet positions for solid fuel 15
Statutory requirements D2 1 appliances
General considerations D3 1 APPENDIX 6.8-E
Fireplaces and hearths (solid fuel) D4 1 Flue outlet position for gas appliances 16/17
Walls near appliances (solid fuel) D5 1 APPENDIX 6.8-F
Flue pipes (solid fuel) D6 1 Flue outlet positions for oil appliances 18
Chimneys and flues (solid fuel) D7 2
Chimney terminals (solid fuel) D8 2 INDEX 19
Fireplaces and hearths (gas) D9 3
Flue pipes (gas) D10 3
Chimneys (gas) D11 3
SCOPE
Fireplaces and hearths (oil) D12 4
Flue pipes (oil) D13 4 This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
Chimneys (oil) D14 4 Requirements and recommendations for fireplaces,
Timber frame construction D15 5 chimneys and flues.
Provision of information D16-D17 5

MATERIALS
Materials standards M1 5
Bricks M2 5
Concrete blocks M3 5
Stone masonry M4 6
Mortar M5 6
Flue liners M6 6
Flue pipes M7 6
6.8

Flue terminals M8 6
Flue blocks for gas appliances M9 6
Twin wall flue systems M10 6
Flashings M11 6
Damp proof course M12 6

SITEWORK
Sitework standards S1 6
Fireplaces and hearths S2 6
Flues S3 7
Chimneys S4 7
Terminals S5 9
Provision of combustion air S6 9
Testing S7 9

APPENDIX 6.8-A
Provision of combustion air 10
APPENDIX 6.8-B
Minimum sizes for flues contained in 10
chimneys
APPENDIX 6.8-C
Typical construction details 11/14
 solid non-combustible
material at least 75mm thick

6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.
less than
150mm
at least
150mm at least
1.2m
Fireplaces, chimneys andhearth
flues

to comply with statutory requirements and

DESIGN STANDARDS manufacturers’ recommendations. Reference
should be made to Appendix 6.8-A.
6.8 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical
at least
Requirements (b) provision of hearths and recesses 300mm

Design that follows the guidance below will HEARTHS

t
be acceptable for fireplaces, chimneys Constructional hearths of sufficient x
t
and flues. dimensions should be provided for open x

fires or closed combustion appliances to appliance

In this Chapter a number of terms are comply with statutory requirements and
used. Details are given in Appendix 6.8-C. manufacturers’ recommendations. The t = thickness of solid non-combustible material as follows:
dimensions shown in Clause S2 are for if x is 50mm or less, t = at least 200mm

STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS a concrete hearth at least 125mm thick

if x is 50mm to 150mm, t = at least 75mm

6.8 - D2 Design shall comply with all below an open fire. FLUE PIPES
relevant statutory requirements The hearth for a freestanding appliance
6.8 - D6 Flue pipes shall be correctly
Design should be in accordance with should have minimum dimensions of
designed to safely connect an appliance
relevant Building Regulations and other 840mm. The following diagram shows the
to a flue
statutory requirements. minimum dimensions from the appliance
to the edge of the hearth. Items to be taken into account include:

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS at least

(a) size
6.8 - D3 Chimneys and flues shall enable
150mm Flue pipes should be equal to the cross-section
efficient operation of the appliance for
hearth of the outlet of the appliance they serve.
which they are designed while protecting appliance (b) direction
the fabric of the building Flue pipes for solid fuel appliances should
front of
The design of dwellings which incorporate appliance be vertical or inclined at 45° or less from
at least
chimneys and flues should ensure that at least 300mm
for an open
225mm vertical. A short horizontal section not
for a
all details of the associated elements appliance and
for closed
closed exceeding 150mm long may be used to
appliance
are considered and, where necessary, appliance which
may be properly
connect a back outlet appliance to a flue.
provided. This should include the following: used with its
front open
• combustion air supply (c) jointing
• constructional hearth Flue pipes which have spigot and socket
RECESSES joints should be fitted socket up.
• chimneys and flues, including where Recesses for open fires or closed combustion
they project through the roof appliances should be provided to comply with
• terminals statutory requirements and manufacturers’

6.8
• construction adjacent to hearths recommendations. Appendix 6.8-C gives
and flues some recess dimensions. The diagrams in
• limitations on the type of appliance or Clause S2 show minimum masonry thickness
open fire which can be installed or fuel surrounding the fireplace recess. Recesses
which can be used. are generally lined with a fire back or fire
Where a chimney or flue is provided it bricks.
should be continuous from the hearth or For recess openings up to 500mm x 550mm,
appliance to the outside air. (d) separation from combustible materials
a 200mm diameter flue or square section of
Flue pipes should be separated from
A notice plate containing safety equivalent area can be used. For openings
combustible materials by at least the following:
information about any hearths and flues larger than this the flue size should be 15% of
• 200mm of non-combustible materials, or
should be securely fixed in an unobtrusive the area of the recess opening.
• an airspace at least 4 times the diameter
but obvious position within the home. of the flue pipe, or
WALLS NEAR APPLIANCES • shielded by a non-combustible shield
Solid fuel 6.8 - D5 Walls near appliances and their at least 3 times the diameter of the
hearths shall be located to minimise the flue pipe in width. The shield should be
FIREPLACES AND HEARTHS risk of fire to the building at least 12mm from the combustible
material and the combustible material at
6.8 - D4 Fireplaces and hearths shall be Walls near an appliance or its hearth should least 1.5 times the diameter either side
designed to ensure proper combustion be non-combustible or the appliance should of the flue pipe.
of fuel and to minimise the risk of the be positioned not closer to the wall than
building catching fire in consequence of shown in the following diagrams.
12mm
air space
their use
D
3x

solid non-combustible
Where appliances are not provided, it is material at least 75mm thick
flue pipe
important to construct fireplaces and hearths
at least 4 x D

shield of
to suit the appliance most likely to be fitted. D
D non-combustible
less than material
150mm
Items to be taken into account include: at least
at least
150mm
1.2m
3

(a) combustion air

xD

hearth
1.5 x D
Combustion air is vital to the safe and
efficient operation of appliances. Solid fuel PLAN PLAN
appliances should have an air supply either REQUIREMENT IN REQUIREMENT
NORTHERN IRELAND ELSEWHERE
directly or indirectly from the external air

2013 Chapter 6.8 Page 1

at least
300mm
 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

CHIMNEYS AND FLUES • be non-combustible (h) stability

• be reasonably smooth internally FOUNDATIONS
6.8 - D7 Chimneys shall incorporate • be correctly jointed with mortar with Where a chimney forms part of a wall, the
flues capable of safely conducting the space between the liners and the foundation should project at least 100mm
products of combustion to the external brickwork filled with weak insulating wider than the chimney base. Where the
air. The structure shall be capable of concrete unless the manufacturer chimney will exert higher loading on the
supporting the flue lining and shall recommends an alternative specification supporting sub-soil than the adjacent wall,
provide adequate protection to the • incorporate compatible purpose made the chimney foundation spread should be
adjacent structure bends at changes of direction; cut pipes designed to avoid uneven settlement. The
A notice plate containing safety are not acceptable depth of chimney foundations should be
information about any hearths and flues • be properly jointed at their junctions the same as adjacent wall foundations.
should be securely fixed in an unobtrusive with the starter block or lintel and the
but obvious position within the home. outlet terminal. HEIGHT
(e) cleaning The height H of an unrestrained chimney
Items to be taken into account include: should not exceed 4½ times the least plan
Where a chimney is not directly over an
appliance or opening, a soot box accessible dimension of the chimney, W (see diagram
(a) flue size
for emptying should be formed. in Clause S4), provided the density of the
A flue should serve only one appliance. Flues
masonry is at least 1500kg/m3, unless
should be of sufficient cross sectional area to
(f) resistance to frost attack designed by an Engineer in accordance
remove all combustion gases from the open
Clay brick chimneys above roof level with Technical Requirement R5.
fire or appliance they serve.
which are not protected by a capping with
Appendix 6.8-B gives flue sizes for: adequate overhang and drip should be (i) factory-made insulated chimneys
• open fires constructed with F2,S1 or F2,S2 bricks to This type of chimney should be designed
• solid fuel appliances. BS EN 771 bedded in mortar of 1 : ½ : 4 in accordance with BS 4543 and BS EN
to 4½, cement : lime : sand or 1 : 3 or 4, 1859 and installed in accordance with BS
(b) flue direction and length 7566 or be assessed in accordance with
cement : sand with plasticiser (see Chapter
Flues for solid fuel appliances should: Technical Requirement R3.
6.1 ‘External masonry walls’, Appendix
• be vertical where possible but not have
6.1-C). In Scotland, all external facing An operating life of at least 30 years is
more than two bends
brickwork should be constructed using required.
• not have bends more than 45° from the
frost resistant bricks.
vertical
• be not less than 4.5m high for solid fuel Sulfate resisting cement should be used in CHIMNEY TERMINALS
appliances measured above the fireplace the mortar where flue gases are liable to 6.8 - D8 The terminal to a chimney
opening. affect the masonry, eg above roof level. shall enable satisfactory discharge of
(c) separation from adjacent spaces and If external chimneys built with clay bricks flue gases
materials of F2,S1 designation are rendered, sulfate
6.8

Items to be taken into account include:

Combustible materials close to any brick or resistant cement should be used.
blockwork chimney should be: (a) position of the outlet
• at least 200mm from the inside surface (g) resistance to weather Outlets should be positioned as shown
of a flue, or Cavities in Very Severe and Severe in Appendix 6.8-D. Refer to approved
• in all areas except Scotland, 40mm from exposure areas should be continuous Document J where roof coverings are
the face of the chimney. up to roof level. This only applies below easily ignitable.
roof level where the stack forms part of
This does not apply to a floorboard, an external cavity wall and applies to the (b) pressure zones
skirting, dado or picture rail, mantelshelf complete structure including the fireplace The design should, where possible, allow
or architrave. recess. Where the chimney breast is for the effects of adjacent trees, buildings
Materials used for chimneys should gathered in, the lower projecting masonry etc. on the “low pressure” zone as the
be capable of resisting fluctuating should be protected against damp efficiency of the flue may be affected.
temperatures up to 1100°C. Suitable penetration with a suitable capping and
A low pressure zone generally occurs on
materials are described in the Materials cavity trays. Reference should be made to
the lee side and at the ridge of a pitched
section of this Chapter. Appendix 6.8-C for typical construction
roof and close to the windward side of a
details. Alternatives may be suitable.
Flues for solid fuel appliances should flat roof. The flue will generally function
be formed within masonry walls at least Above the roof, chimney dpcs should link more effectively if the outlet is in this
100mm thick or 200mm thick if separating with flashings. Two dpcs should be used zone, taking account of prevailing winds.
the flue from another compartment of the at suitable levels when the roof is steeply
Where down-draughts occur, for example
same building, another building or another pitched, that is where the difference in level
on hillsides or near tall trees and buildings,
dwelling. In Scotland, suitable masonry between the lower and higher intersection
the height of the flue outlet may have to be
materials are described in the Building of the chimney with the roof will be more
increased or a fan assisted flue installed.
Standards (Scotland) Regulations. than 450mm. Lead trays should be protected
with a thick coat of bitumen or bitumen paint (c) terminals
Flues in the same chimney should be where in contact with mortar. Plastic dpcs Terminals may be purpose-made
separated by masonry at least 100mm thick. are not suitable. Weatherproofing details are components, built into the top of the
included in Appendix 6.8-C. chimney to a depth of not less than 125mm
Timber framed wall design should include
full details of separation proposals. Face brickwork above roof level should not into the masonry or one-quarter the length
have recessed joints. of the terminal, whichever is the greater.
(d) flue liners The terminal should be sealed to the flue
Flue liners should: If chimneys are to be rendered, the liners. The top flue liner projecting at least
• have rebated or socketed joints with rendering should be as described in 20mm above the chimney capping is an
socket or internal rebate uppermost Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’. acceptable terminal.

Page 2 Chapter 6.8 2013

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

(d) chimney cappings The diagram below shows minimum (e) separation from combustible materials
Chimney cappings should be designed projections for the hearth beyond the Single wall flue pipes should be separated
to protect the masonry below. Cappings appliance. from combustible materials by:
should preferably be monolithic slabs, • at least 25mm
weathered, projecting at least 50mm with at least 150mm • a non-combustible sleeve enclosing an
PLAN
a drip to shed water clear of the masonry. at least
150mm
air space of at least 25mm around the
Brick chimneys which do not have this type pipe where it passes through a wall,
of capping should be constructed using floor or roof
frost resistant masonry. • non-combustible casing material with at
appliance least half the fire resistance needed for
All external face brickwork in Scotland should
the wall or floor where passing through a
be constructed using frost resistant bricks.
front compartment wall or compartment floor.
Cappings may be designed as a cover
at least 225mm The 25mm may be measured from the
slab supported on piers to reduce the rain beyond front
outside of the inner pipe in the case of
penetration into the top of the flue. The hearth for back boiler double-walled pipes (see BS 5440).
height of the supporting piers should be
sufficient to allow a total free opening area ALL OTHER GAS APPLIANCES
at least twice the area of the flue outlet. Hearths for other types of appliance CHIMNEYS
CHIMNEY POT should be at least 12mm thick non- 6.8 - D11 Chimneys shall incorporate
flue terminal (chimney pot) combustible material to the same plan flues capable of safely conducting
dimensions as above. In some cases the products of combustion from an
provision of a hearth is not required, for appliance to the external air. The
example if the flame or incandescent structure shall be capable of supporting
purpose-made
chimney material is at least 225mm above the floor. the flue and providing adequate
cappings
50mm
Where a hearth has been provided, its protection to adjacent materials
edges should be marked to provide Chimneys for gas appliances must not
a warning to the home owner and to incorporate an adjustable draught control.
discourage combustible floor finishes such
as carpet from being laid too close to the Items to be taken into account include:
FLUE LINING ACTING
AS FLUE TERMINAL
appliance. A way of achieving this would be (a) masonry chimneys
to provide a change in level. Flues should be of the minimum sizes
(c) separating appliances from given in Appendix 6.8-B.
purpose-made
chimney
cappings combustible materials Masonry chimneys as described for solid
50mm Appliances should not be closer than 75mm fuel are acceptable.
to combustible material. This applies to the

6.8
back, sides and top of the appliance and any Brick or blockwork chimneys for gas
draught-diverter. It does not apply if a 25mm appliances should provide at least the fire
thick non-combustible shield is used or the resistance of any compartment wall or floor
Gas appliance complies with the appropriate of which it forms part or passes through (the
parts of BS 5258 or BS 5386. compartment wall may form the chimney
FIREPLACES AND HEARTHS wall if it is a masonry material).

6.8 - D9 Fireplaces and hearths FLUE PIPES (b) flue liners

shall safely accommodate the fire or 6.8 - D10 Flue pipes shall safely Flue liners should be as described for
appliance for which they are designed connect an appliance to a chimney or a solid fuel or comply with BS 715 (see
flue to a terminal Clause D7(d)). Flexible flue liners are not
Items to be taken into account include:
acceptable for new build.
Items to be taken into account include:
(a) combustion air
(c) flue block chimneys
Combustion air is vital to the safe (a) size Flue blocks should comply with BS EN 1858
and efficient operation of appliances. Flue pipes should be at least the area of or BS EN 1806 with a performance class of
Requirements for combustion air are given the outlet of the appliance and have no at least FB4 N2. The chimney should only
in Appendix 6.8-A. adjustable draught control. be constructed of flue blocks if suitable for
(b) provision of hearths and recesses the appliance.
(b) direction
SOLID FUEL EFFECT APPLIANCES Apart from balanced flues, horizontal runs Flue block chimneys should be constructed,
Hearths and recesses for solid fuel effect should be avoided. No pipe should exceed jointed and weatherproofed in accordance
appliances should be as described for solid 45° with the vertical. with manufacturers’ instructions.
fuel installations or in accordance with
(c) jointing Flue blocks should be correctly bonded to
BS 6714 or BS 5871 or the manufacturer’s
Flue pipes with spigot and socket joints the flanking masonry.
instructions when the appliance has been
should be fixed socket up.
tested by an approved authority. In all areas, the nominal cavity width
(d) connections and support as required in Chapter 6.1, should be
BACK BOILERS maintained by either:
Purpose-made connections should be
Hearths for back boilers should be • increasing the overall width of the
used particularly in roof spaces when
constructed of solid non-combustible cavity, or
connecting to flue blocks and to ridge
materials at least: • making the flue block flush with the
terminals. The connecting flue pipe
• 125mm thick, or inside of the cavity but projecting into
should be supported on straps at centres
• 25mm thick placed on non-combustible the room as a false chimney breast.
not greater than 1.8m and have support
supports at least 25mm high.
directly below each socket.

2013 Chapter 6.8 Page 3

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

Flue blocks projecting into the cavity Balanced flues which bridge the cavity of (b) direction
should be protected by providing a an external wall should have a means of As for solid fuel.
vertical dpm. The dpm may be supported preventing moisture crossing the cavity,
by building in a layer of suitable non- for example, a moisture drip collar set in (c) separation from adjacent spaces and
combustible insulation. the centre of the cavity. materials
See Clause D14 (c).
Plaster should not be applied directly to CIRCULAR FLUES

flue blocks. A plasterboard lining with an

airspace or non-combustible insulation moisture
CHIMNEYS
drip collar
behind should be provided. 6.8 - D14 Chimneys shall incorporate flues
appliance capable of safely conducting products
Flue blocks should not be built into of combustion from an open fire or
separating walls unless it can be shown that
other appliance to the external air. The
the wall has adequate sound resistance.
structure shall be capable of supporting
(d) factory-made insulated chimneys and the flue lining and shall provide adequate
terminals protection to adjacent materials
Factory-made insulated chimneys should: Items to be taken into account include:
• comply with the requirements of BS
4543 and be installed in accordance sheet metal plate sloping (a) size of flue
at 45° across cavity,
with BS 6461 or comply with BS 715 and located on top of flue Flue sizes should be in accordance with
assembly and extending
installed in accordance with BS 5440. about 25mm either side Appendix 6.8-B.

Factory-made insulated chimneys (b) direction of flues

should be assembled, erected, anchored As for gas flues.
appliance
and protected in accordance with
manufacturers’ instructions. (c) separation from adjacent spaces and
materials
(e) terminals to masonry chimneys Separation should be in accordance with
If appropriate, flue terminals should the following table.
comply with the appliance manufacturer’s RECTANGULAR FLUES

recommendations. Protecting buildings from hot flues for flue

gas temperatures not more than 250°C
Proprietary terminals should comply with Oil Flue within: Protection measures
BS 715 and BS EN 1858.
Connecting fluepipe Flues should be at
Where proprietary terminals are not used, FIREPLACES AND HEARTHS least 25mm from any
the free opening area should be at least 6.8 - D12 Fireplaces and hearths Factory-made chimney combustible material
twice the area of the flue. The openings complying with BS (measured from
shall safely accommodate the fire or
6.8

should be uniformly distributed around the 715:1993 the outer surface

appliance for which they are designed of the fluewall, or
terminal or be on two opposite faces. The
Items to be taken into account include: the outer surface of
openings in the terminal should admit a the inner wall in the
6mm diameter ball but exclude a ball over case of multi-walled
(a) combustion air
25mm diameter. products). Where
Combustion air is vital to the safe and passing through a
(f) direction efficient operation of appliances. Reference combustible wall,
Flues should be vertical where possible. Any should be made to Appendix 6.8-A. floor or roof (other
necessary bend in a flue should not make an than a compartment
(b) provision of hearths wall floor or roof) this
angle exceeding 45° with the vertical.
If the temperature of the hearth below the separation can be
appliance is likely to exceed 100°C, or the achieved by a non-
(g) outlets not serving balanced flue combustible sleeve
appliances temperature is not known, a hearth should
enclosing the fluepipe
A flue outlet serving a gas appliance be provided as described for solid fuel or chimney with a
should be: appliances. If this temperature is unlikely to 25mm airspace to
• situated at roof level, so that air can be exceeded the appliance may stand on a the relevant flue wall.
pass freely across it at all times rigid, non-combustible imperforate sheet of (The airspace could
material without a constructional hearth. be wholly or partially
• at least 600mm from any opening into filled with non-
the building combustible insulating
(c) shielding appliances
• fitted with a flue terminal where the flue material).
Appliances which are likely to have back or
diameter is less than 170mm. Larger
side temperatures exceeding 100°C should Factory-made chimney Refer to appropriate
diameter flues should be fitted with a complying with British Standards
be shielded as described for gas appliances
terminal where required by Building BS 4543-1:1990 and Manufacturers
(see Clause D9(c)).
Regulations. (1996),* recommendations.
BS 4543-2:1990 (1996),
(h) outlets serving balanced flue FLUE PIPES BS 4543-3:1990 (1996)
appliances
6.8 - D13 Flue pipes shall safely connect Masonry chimney Provide at least
See Appendix 6.8-E for position of 25mm of masonry
balanced flue outlets. an appliance to a chimney
between flues and any
Items to be taken into account include: combustible material.
(i) damp penetration
Precautions should be taken where (a) size Flueblock chimney Provide flueblock walls
at least 25mm thick.
appropriate to prevent damp penetration Flue pipes should be at least the size of the
as described for solid fuel chimneys. outlet to the appliance. Reference should
be made to Appendix 6.8-B.

Page 4 Chapter 6.8 2013

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

Flue assemblies a) flues passing General MATERIALS STANDARDS

for roomed-sealed through combustible
appliances walls should be
surrounded by
TIMBER FRAME 6.8 - M1 All materials shall:
insulating material at CONSTRUCTION (a) meet the Technical Requirements
least 50mm thick. (b) take account of the design
b) provide a 6.8 - D15 Fireplaces, chimneys and flues
clearance of at least in timber frame construction shall be Materials that comply with the design and
50mm from the edge designed to minimise the risk of the the guidance below will be acceptable for
of the flue outlet to building catching fire fireplaces, chimneys and flues.
any combustible wall
cladding. The design of timber frame construction Materials for fireplaces, chimneys and flues
should ensure that combustible material is shall comply with all relevant standards,
* BS 4543-1:1990 (1996) withdrawn April 2000;
partially superseded by BS EN 1859:2000 either far enough away from heat sources including those listed below. Where no
or, where permitted, shielded. standard exists, Technical Requirement R3
applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the
(d) flue liners Designers may find the following ‘Institution
Standards and Technical Requirements’).
As for gas if the flue gases are unlikely of Gas Engineers’ publications useful:
to exceed a temperature of 250°C. As • ‘Guide for gas installation in timber References to British Standards and Codes
for solid fuel if the flue gases are likely framed housing’ of Practice include those made under the
to exceed a temperature of 250°C or the • ‘Specification for flues for class II Construction Products Directive (89/106/
temperature is not known. appliances in timber framed housing’. EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
European Technical Specifications
(e) resistance to heat Appendix 6.8-C contains a detail of an
approved by a European Committee for
As for gas flue pipes if the flue gases are external fireplace recess and chimney.
Standardisation (CEN).
unlikely to exceed a temperature of 250°C. Other details for internal chimneys and
As for solid fuel flue pipes if the flue gases chimneys in separating walls are available
are likely to exceed a temperature of in TRADA publications. BRICKS
250°C or the temperature is not known. 6.8 - M2 Bricks shall be capable of
(f) resistance to chemical attack
PROVISION OF supporting intended loads and have
appropriate resistance to the adverse
As for solid fuel. INFORMATION effects of frost and sulfates
(g) resistance to weather 6.8 - D16 Design and specifications shall
Bricks should be selected in accordance
As for solid fuel. be produced in a clearly understandable
with BS 6461 and BS EN 771.
format and include all relevant information
(h) separation from combustible materials In external chimney stacks clay bricks
For fireplaces and flues the drawings
As for gas flue pipes if the flue gases are should be of durability rating F2,S1 as
should show:
unlikely to exceed a temperature of 250°C. described in BS EN 771 unless protected by
• position and size of hearths and fireplaces

6.8
As for solid fuel flue pipes if the flue gases a projecting capping bedded on a dpc. In
• position and size of chimneys and flues
are likely to exceed a temperature of Scotland frost resistant bricks should be
• position and proximity of combustible
250°C or the temperature is not known. used for all external facing brickwork.
materials
(i) stability • position and details of flue terminals or Reference should also be made to Chapters
As for solid fuel if of masonry construction. outlets 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ (Materials) and
• position of dpcs and flashings 6.3 ‘Internal walls’ (Materials).
(j) factory-made insulated chimneys • construction details of fireplace
This type of chimney should be designed openings and chimney connections
in accordance with BS 4543 : Part 1 to Part • details of materials to be used
CONCRETE BLOCKS
3 BS EN 1859 and installed in accordance • limitations on the type of appliance or 6.8 - M3 Blocks shall be capable of
with BS 7566 : Part 2 or be assessed in open fire which can be installed or fuel supporting intended loads and have
accordance with Technical Requirement which can be used appropriate resistance to the adverse
R3. An operating life of at least 30 years is • details of tests required on chimneys effects of frost and sulfates
required. Component systems to be BS 715 and flues including who is responsible Blocks should be selected in accordance
installed in accordance with BS 5440. for carrying them out. with BS 6461 Part 1, BS EN 771 or
(k) outlets 6.8 - D17 All relevant information shall satisfactorily assessed in accordance with
See Appendix 6.8-F for positions of flue be distributed to appropriate personnel Technical Requirement R3. Block density
outlets. should be minimum 1500 kg/m3, unless
Ensure that design and specification designed by an Engineer in accordance
All balanced flue terminals should be information is issued to site supervisors with Technical Requirement R5.
positioned to allow free intake of air to the and relevant specialist subcontractors and/
appliance. or suppliers. Reference should also be made to Chapters
6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ (Materials) and
(l) terminals Where proprietary products are to be 6.3 ‘Internal walls’ (Materials).
As for solid fuel if of masonry construction, used, manufacturers usually have specific
requirements for fixing and/or assembly In Scotland, 100mm thick blockwork in
unless otherwise stated in the appliance
of their products. This information should chimney construction should have a
manufacturer’s instructions, which should
also be made available for reference density of at least 1600 kg/m3. Other
be followed.
on site so that work can be carried out suitable masonry specifications for
satisfactorily in accordance with the design Scotland are given in the Building
and specification. Standards (Scotland) Regulations.

2013 Chapter 6.8 Page 5

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

STONE MASONRY In the absence of liner manufacturer’s FLASHINGS

instructions, the space could be filled
6.8 - M4 Stone masonry shall be capable with a weak insulating concrete such as 6.8 - M11 Flashings and trays shall be
of supporting intended loads and have mixtures of: capable of adequately resisting the
appropriate resistance to the adverse -- one part ordinary Portland cement to entry of moisture into the building
effects of frost and sulfates 20 parts suitable lightweight expanded Suitable materials for flashings and trays are:
Stone for masonry should comply with the clay aggregate, minimally wetted; or • milled sheet lead (at least Code 4)
requirements of BS EN 771 and BS 6461 : -- one part ordinary Portland cement to complying with BS EN 12588
Part 1. 6 parts Vermiculite; or • aluminium and aluminium alloys
-- one part ordinary Portland cement to complying with BS 1470 (0.6mm to
Reconstructed stone masonry units should 10 parts Perlite. 0.9mm thick)
comply with BS EN 771-5 and BS 6461 : Part 1. • zinc alloy complying with BS 6561 and
FLUE PIPES 0.6mm thick.
MORTAR 6.8 - M7 Flue pipes shall be suitable for
their purpose
DAMP-PROOF COURSE
6.8 - M5 Mortar shall be batched and
mixed to achieve adequate strength and 6.8 - M12 Materials for damp-proofing
Cast iron flue pipes should comply with BS 41.
durability to comply with design shall resist adequately the passage of
Mild steel flue pipes should have a moisture into the building
Mortar should be as specified for areas of
minimum wall thickness of 3mm and
Severe or Very Severe exposure in Chapter The following are acceptable for use as dpcs:
comply with BS 1449.
6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ Appendix 6.1-B. • bitumen to BS 6398
(1 : ½ : 4 to 4½ cement : lime : sand or 1 : 3 Stainless steel flue pipes should be at least
• polyethylene to BS 6515 (not in the
or 4 cement : sand with plasticiser). 1mm thick as described in BS EN 10088
chimney stack above roof level)
and should be one of the following grades:
Sulfate resisting cement should be used in • proprietary materials assessed in
1.4401, 1.4404, 1.4432 or 1.4436.
the mortar where flue gases are liable to accordance with Technical Requirement
affect the masonry, eg above roof level. Vitreous enamelled flue pipes should be R3.
of low carbon steel coated internally and
FLUE LINERS externally with acid resisting enamel and SITEWORK STANDARDS
conform to the description given in BS 6999.
6.8 - M6 Flue liners shall be unaffected by 6.8 - S1 All sitework shall:
flue gases and suitable for their purpose Flue pipes for gas appliances should (a) meet the Technical Requirements
comply with BS 715. (b) take account of the design
Special fittings should be specified at
changes of direction of the flue. All flue pipes should be jointed in accordance (c) follow established good practice and
with manufacturers’ instructions. workmanship
Liners suitable for solid fuel appliances
(and generally suitable for other fuels) Sitework that complies with the design
6.8

could be: FLUE TERMINALS and the guidance below will be acceptable
• liners whose performance is at least for fireplaces, chimneys and flues. Gas
6.8 - M8 Flue terminals shall be suitable
equal to that corresponding to the appliances should be fitted by a Gas Safe
for their purpose
designation T450 N2 S D 3, as described Register (GSR) installer to comply with
Clay flue terminals should comply with the Gas Safety (Installation and Use)
in BS EN 1443: 1999, such as:
or be constructed from materials which Regulations 1998.
-- clay flue liners with rebates or sockets
comply with BS 1181.
for jointing meeting the requirements Good workmanship and effective
for Class A1 N2 or Class A1 N1 as Chimneys serving gas appliances should supervision during construction are
described in BS EN 1457: 1999; or have terminals complying with BS EN 1858. essential to ensure that fireplaces,
-- concrete flue liners meeting the Flue pipes serving gas appliances should chimneys and flues function correctly
requirements for the classification have terminals complying with BS 715. in use.
Type A1, Type A2, Type B1 or Type B2
as described in prEN 1857(e18) January Additional construction details are shown
2001; or
FLUE BLOCKS FOR GAS in Appendix 6.8-C.
-- other products that are independently APPLIANCES
certified as meeting the criteria in a); or 6.8 - M9 Flue blocks for gas appliances FIREPLACES AND
• imperforate clay pipes with sockets
for jointing as described in BS 65: 1991
shall be unaffected by flue gases and HEARTHS
suitable for their purpose
(1997). 6.8 - S2 Fireplaces and hearths shall
Flue blocks for use with gas appliances safely accommodate the appliances for
Liners should be installed in accordance should comply with BS 1289 : Part 1 which they are designed
with their manufacturer’s instructions. (Concrete) or Part 2 (Clay). In situations
Appropriate components should be where the cavity width is reduced by Fireplace recesses should be constructed
selected to produce the flue path without the flue block all insulation and vertical of solid non-combustible material as shown
cutting and to keep joints to a minimum. dpms should be in accordance with below:
Bends and offsets should only be formed manufacturers’ instructions.
with purpose-made components. Liners
need to be placed with the sockets
or rebate ends uppermost to contain
TWIN WALL FLUE SYSTEMS
water and other condensates in the flue. 6.8 - M10 Twin wall flue systems shall be
Caulking can be effected with fire cement suitable for their purpose
or refractory mortar. Spaces between
Twin wall flue systems should comply with
the lining and the surrounding masonry
BS 715 or be assessed in accordance with
should not be filled with ordinary mortar.
Technical Requirement R3.

Page 6 Chapter 6.8 2013

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

minimum (b) connections to appliances Flue linings to chimneys should be clay or

each leaf at least 100mm 50mm cavity
The connection between a fireplace or purpose made concrete as specified by the
at least
appliance and the flue should be correctly design.
100mm constructed (see details in Appendix 6.8-C).
Flue linings should be handled carefully to
throat unit connection
to raft lintel prevent chipping or cracking.
FIREPLACE
EXTERNAL WALL Bends or tees should be purpose made for
at least 200mm
use with the lining system being installed.
reinforced concrete
raft lintel flue liner Flue linings should be sealed at their joint
with the starter block or throat unit. No
at least
200mm cavity should be formed between the
linings and the starter elements.
INTERNAL WALL
Flue linings should be installed socket up.

fireplace surround
Changes of direction of flue liners should
be formed using purpose made fittings.
offset using
pre-fabricated bends

each leaf at least 100mm EXTERNAL WALL bend

45º maximum
weak
flue pipe connection insulating
to raft lintel concrete
The space between a fireback and any
masonry forming the recess should be APPLIANCE flue
pipe
non-
filled with vermiculite concrete (1 : 4, lime : combustible
vermiculite with water). rope

Combustible material should not be placed

150mm bend
under a constructional hearth unless it is: deep
concrete
• to support the edges of the hearth or blanking
panel built clamping
• separated from the underside of the into jambs ring CHIMNEY WITH FLUE LINERS SUITABLE FOR SOLID FUEL

hearth by an airspace of at least 50mm

or Jointing material for flue liners should be
• at least 250mm from the material to the fire cement or refractory mortar, unless
top of the hearth. (c) flue draught control unit
Where adjustable throat units are specified the manufacturers’ instructions require an
Hearths should be at least the sizes shown they should be fitted in accordance with alternative jointing to be used.

6.8
below. Hearths for freestanding appliances manufacturers’ instructions. Adjustable Each joint should be fully filled and all
should be at least 840mm square. flue draught control units are not surplus material cleared from the inside of
at least 150mm permitted where gas burning appliances each joint as the flue is built.
are installed.
(f) fire hazards
(d) flue pipes Combustible materials close to any brick or
Flue pipes should be fixed ‘socket up’ blockwork chimney should be:
and correctly aligned. Longer flue pipes • at least 200mm from a flue, or
hearth
projection
forming flues from gas appliances should • except in Scotland, 40mm from the face
at least hearth be supported at a maximum of 1.8m of the chimney.
500mm
centres and have support directly below
each socket. This does not apply to a floorboard,
skirting, dado or picture rail, mantelshelf
SOCKETED FLUE PIPE FLUE PIPE SERVING
or architrave.
FLUES A GAS APPLIANCE

6.8 - S3 Flues shall provide an Metal fixings in contact with combustible

unrestricted passage for combustion materials should be at least 50mm from
1.8m a flue.
gases between the fireplace or appliance maximum
45°
and the outlet maximum

Items to be taken into account include:

CHIMNEYS
support
beneath 6.8 - S4 Chimneys shall provide fire
each socket
(a) cleaning protective casing for flues, and shall be
The bottom of flues not directly over an capable of adequately supporting the
appliance should be provided with a means flue liner and resisting damp penetration
of access for cleaning and inspection. and the products of combustion
(e) flue liners Items to be taken into account include:
The space between flue liners and
masonry should be filled with weak (a) stability
insulating concrete or manufacturers’ Masonry chimneys should be properly
recommendations with specified material bonded to, or supported by, adjoining walls
providing adequate protection. of the building. The depth of chimney
foundations should be the same as any
adjacent wall foundation.

2013 Chapter 6.8 Page 7

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

The height H of an unrestrained chimney Ensure that the core is removed on ridge
terminal alternative
should not exceed 4½ times the least plan completion of the chimney. outlet position
dimension of the chimney W (see diagram),
provided the density of the masonry is at (e) drying
least 1500kg/m3, unless designed by an A chimney should be allowed to dry
Engineer in accordance with Technical naturally for at least 14 days before use. twin wall
flue pipe with
supports at
Requirement R5. 1.8m centres
(f) masonry chimneys maximum
45°
maximum

BRICKS
H H Frost resistant bricks should be used above
offset transfer
the roof unless protected by a capping block

w w
projecting at least 50mm. In Scotland, roof space
frost resistant bricks should be used for all
facing brickwork.
Below roof level the bricks and mortar
(b) wall thickness may be the same as those used for general
Chimneys of block, brick or stone should brickwork.
have a minimum wall thickness of 100mm
excluding the lining thickness. Mortar should be as specified for areas
of Severe and Very Severe exposure
A chimney forming part of a compartment in Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’
wall and not back to back with an adjacent Appendix 6.1-C. (1 : ½ : 4 to 4½, cement :
chimney should have a wall thickness of at lime : sand or 1 : 3 or 4, cement : sand with
least 200mm separating it from the other plasticiser).
building or dwelling.
Sulfate resisting cement should be used in
Chimneys built in a cavity separating wall the mortar where flue gases are liable to
should form two leaves each of at least affect the masonry, eg. above roof level.
first floor

100mm thickness between the flue and 30º

adjoining building. BLOCKS

Hollow or cellular blocks, suitable for the lateral offset block
(c) damp penetration
construction of chimneys, should only be plain block
The damp proof course to the main walls
used if the voids are filled with concrete as
should be carried through the base of
the work proceeds.
chimneys.
Damp proof courses, flashings and gutters (g) flue block chimneys
should be provided at the intersection point Gas flue block chimneys are only suitable
6.8

of the chimney with the surface of the roof for gas appliances. Their suitability lintel block

through which the chimney passes. should be checked before connecting any may be
appliance. one or
two piece
Metal elements making up dpcs and set starter block

flashing should be compatible non-ferrous Flue block chimneys should be

metals. Lead trays should be bitumen constructed, jointed and weather ground floor

coated where in contact with cement. proofed in accordance with the design ELEVATION SHOWING AN INDIVIDUAL FLUE TO A GAS FIRE
and manufacturers’ instructions. A high
Occasional damp penetration below roof level standard of workmanship should be
may occur in chimneys which exit close to the maintained to ensure that the flue is clean The design will show how the extra
ridge of a pitched roof. This is acceptable in a and sealed. thickness is incorporated by either:
well ventilated roof space provided that any • increasing the overall width of the
dampness penetrating downwards is unlikely Flue blocks should be correctly bonded to
the flanking masonry. cavity, or
to reach the living areas. • making the flue block flush with the
Where chimneys exit close to the eaves of a Where gas flue blocks are shown in the inside of the cavity but projecting into
pitched roof or through a flat roof, trays and design they will be at least 140mm wide. the room as a false chimney breast.
flashings should be installed in the chimney This may be wider than the wall leaf.
brick
so that all damp penetration is prevented. cavity

The weatherproofing details shown in block

Appendix 6.8-C should be used in Very

Severe and Severe exposure zones. In full or partial fill non-combustible false breast
insulation (not polystyrene)
lower exposure zones the tray upturn may
be on the outside of the flue liner.
Where the cavity is shown to be reduced
(d) coring the flue block should be protected by
A core is a sack, full of loose straw or a vertical dpm. The dpm should be
the like, used to block the flue during the supported by building in a layer of non-
construction of a chimney with circular combustible insulation.
linings. The core, which is attached to a
rope to pull it up the flue, keeps the flue
clean and free of falling mortar and debris
which may later form an impedance to
gases passing through the flue.

Page 8 Chapter 6.8 2013

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

vertical dpm Items to be taken into account include: TESTING

brick (a) stability 6.8 - S7 Installations shall be tested
cavity
Terminals should be embedded at least before use
insulating block
125mm into the chimney excluding any
plasterboard on dabs flaunching, or one quarter the length of ALL FLUES
CAVITY WALL WITH INSULATING BLOCK
the terminal, whichever is the greater. All flues should be checked during
construction to ensure that there are no
flue terminal (chimney pot)
50mm obstructions in the flue and that mortar
cavity vertical dpm
or other blockages are removed. When the
brick
flue is complete, if practical a visual check
cavity should be made and any obstructions
block purpose-made cleared.
capping

non-combustible insulation
plasterboard on dabs FLUES FOR SOLID FUEL APPLIANCES
(not polystyrene)
minimum Coring ball test
CAVITY WALL WITH CAVITY INSULATION AND VERTICAL DPM 50mm
projection When a visual test cannot be carried out or
is inconclusive, the coring ball test should
Plaster should not be applied directly to be carried out.
flue blocks. A plasterboard lining with an
A suitable concrete or metal ball is
airspace or non-combustible insulation
Appendix 6.8-C gives details of brickwork attached to a strong cord or rope. The ball
behind should be provided. Insulated dry
capping. is lowered slowly from the flue outlet to
lining may be unsuitable in this situation
the bottom of the flue (the fireplace recess
unless separated from the flue block.
(b) jointing or the appliance connection). If a blockage
(h) connection between flue block The terminal of a masonry flue should or obstruction is found it must be removed
chimney and roof outlet be jointed to the flue lining with cement and the test repeated until the flue is
Connections between flue blocks and ridge mortar to form a seal. completely clear of obstruction.
terminals should be made as detailed in
(c) size Smoke test
the design using the correct fittings and
Terminals should be the same cross This test is designed to show that a flue
supports as specified by the manufacturers
sectional area as the flue which for solid draws adequately and that there are no
of the flue blocks, flue pipe and the ridge
fuel is not less than 200mm diameter. leaks between the appliance and the
terminal.
terminal.
ridge tile
(d) draught improvement
adaptor In cases where down draughts may occur, The smoke test is carried out when neither
line of support brackets at 1.8m special terminals designed to increase up the flue to be tested nor adjacent flues are
ridge maximum centres

6.8
tiles draught should be fitted. in use. The flue is first warmed for about
10 minutes with a heat source such as a
flue pipe A special terminal will not overcome blow lamp. If an appliance is fitted it should
offset transfer
block problems caused by high pressure zones. be completely closed as should any flue
Where relevant, the Solid Fuel Association or access doors.
other authoritative body should be consulted.
Two purpose made smoke pellets are
(e) chimney capping then placed in the appliance firebox or in
Where a chimney is to be capped, a single the bottom of the flue and ignited. The
unjointed concrete or stone capping should appliance, chimney or fireplace opening
be used. The capping should project and should then be closed or sealed off and
be throated to cast rainwater away from the smoke allowed to rise. When smoke
the face of the chimney. The slab should appears at the top of the flue the outlet
project 50mm beyond the faces of the should be sealed with a blow-up rubber
chimney. The withes between flues should ball or other air tight closing system.
be carried to the underside of the slab.
(i) factory-made insulated chimneys The whole structure forming the flue
Factory-made insulated chimneys Decorative brick cappings should be should be inspected externally on all sides
should be assembled, erected, anchored carefully constructed to avoid rain and from top to bottom for smoke leakage.
and protected in accordance with penetration and frost damage. The use This should include the top of cavity walls
manufacturers’ instructions. of frost resistant bricks may be required. and any other possible smoke paths, even
All bricks used for facing brickwork in those terminating some distance from the
Scotland should be frost resistant. flue. The test should be continued for at
TERMINALS least 5 minutes.
6.8 -S5 Terminals shall assist the PROVISION OF
proper functioning of the flue FLUES FOR GAS APPLIANCES
COMBUSTION AIR More sophisticated flue tests may be
Terminals should be purpose made or
6.8 - S6 Installations shall have an required for some gas appliances.
formed by extending the flue lining not
adequate supply of air to ensure These tests should be carried out by the
less than 20mm above the head of the
satisfactory combustion of fuel and the appliance installer.
chimney. Various terminals are shown in
Appendix 6.8-C. efficient working of flues and chimneys
FLUES FOR OIL APPLIANCES
Combustion air is vital to the safe and Flues for oil fired appliances should
efficient operation of appliances. Reference be tested as required by the appliance
should be made to Appendix 6.8-A. manufacturer.

2013 Chapter 6.8 Page 9

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

Appendix 6.8-A

Provision of combustion air

Solid fuel up to 45kW output Gas * Oil
Open Closed appliance ** Up to 70kW input Up to 45kW output

England, Wales and Isle 50% of throat area*** 550mm2/kW above 5kW 500mm2/kW above 7kW input 550mm2/kW above 5kW
of Man rating for an appliance in a room rating for an appliance in a
or space room or space

Scotland 1500mm2 for fireplaces up As England and Wales As BS 5440: Part 2 (as As England and Wales
to 450mm wide (measured England and Wales)
between firebricks), for
fireplaces exceeding 450mm
width manufacturers’ details
should be followed

Northern Ireland As England and Wales 550mm2 up to 6kW rating. 450mm2 up to 8kW. Over As solid fuel closed appliance
Over 6kW add 550mm2 for 8kW add 450mm2 for each
each kW above 6kW. kW above 8kW

Notes:
Full details of ventilation requirements for all types of appliances are contained in the relevant building regulations.
* Decorative fuel effect gas appliances should have a provision for combustion air complying with the relevant part of BS 5871.
Normally a minimum of 10,000mm2 of purpose provided ventilation is required. Air vents should be direct to the external air or to an adjacent
room or internal space which has an air vent or vents to the external air of at least the same free area. Air vents should have aperture
dimensions no smaller than 5mm.
** Where closed appliances use a flue fitted with a draught stabiliser the total free area should be increased to 300mm2/kW for the first 5kw
plus 850mm2/kW for the balance of appliance output.
***In the case of a fire with a canopy the open air vents should be 50% of the flue area.

Appendix 6.8-B
6.8

Minimum sizes for flues contained in chimneys

Solid fuel burning appliance up to 45kW output
Serving Minimum flue size [mm]
Fireplace recess with an opening up to 500mm x 550mm 200 diameter or square section of equivalent area
Fireplace with larger opening See approved Document J
Closed appliance up to 20kW rated output burning smokeless fuel 125 diameter or square section of equivalent area

Closed appliance up to 30kW rated output burning any fuel 150 diameter or square section of equivalent area
Closed appliance above 30kW and up to 50kW rated output burning any fuel 175 diameter or square section of equivalent area

Non fan-assisted individually flued gas burning appliances up to 70kW input excluding balanced flue
Serving Minimum flue size
Gas fire Round flue with a cross-sectional area of at least 12,000mm2 (125mm diameter) or rectangular flue with a cross-sectional area of at least
16,500mm2 with minimum dimension of 90mm
Any other At least the cross-sectional area of the outlet from the appliance

Inset live or decorative gas fuel effect appliances

Serving Minimum flue size
Open fire within a fireplace opening up to 500mm x 550mm Circular or rectangular minimum flue dimension 175mm

Oil burning appliances up to 45kW output

Not less than the size of the appliance outlet

Page 10 Chapter 6.8 2013

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

Appendix 6.8-C

Typical construction details

KEY TO TERMS
flue and chimney terminal flue and chimney terminal

ridge terminal

flue pipe in separating flue

roof space wall

flue
lining

roof space roof space roof space

6.8
masonry masonry
gas flue chimney chimney
blocks as containing containing
part of the a flue a flue
wall

first floor first floor

flue pipe

gas
appliance free standing open hearth
solid fuel appliance

PARTY WALL EXTERNAL WALL EXTERNAL WALL

2013 Chapter 6.8 Page 11

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

For weathering detail see Detail C

DETAILS OF EXTERNAL CHIMNEY

BREAST WITH MASONRY INNER LEAF
Other alternatives may be suitable
provided they meet the appropriate
Performance Standards.

joists
supported
on hangers
*in Scotland, joists, etc
should be at least
200mm from inner
surface of flue. Brickwork
or blockwork in chimney
construction should be at
least 100mm thick and
have a density of at least
1600 kg/m3. Aircrete
blocks may be used if at
least 150mm thick

40mm air space between

combustible material and
100mm thick masonry*

for weathering details see Detail C

6.8

for brick capping,

see Detail B

prefabricated
cavity throating

cavity
tray

see also Detail A

Page 12 Chapter 6.8 2013

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

DETAIL A DETAIL B

flaunching

Freeze/thaw
resistant
(F2,S1) bricks

CHIMNEY DETAIL WITH BRICK CAPPING

1100mm approx

690 to 840mm
350mm

APPLIANCES RECESS -
WITH RAFT LINTEL, SUITABLE FOR FREE STANDING ROOM HEATER

vermiculite
concrete
6.8

350mm
690 to 840mm

FIREPLACE RECESS -
FOR INSET OPEN FIRE (WITHOUT BOILER UNIT) VARIOUS TERMINALS
(see Clause S5)

2013 Chapter 6.8 Page 13

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

DETAIL C TYPICAL EXTERNAL FIREPLACE

RECESS AND CHIMNEY-TIMBER
Weatherproofing details recommended for
FRAME CONSTRUCTION
use in Very Severe and Severe exposure
zones.
In other exposure zones the dpc tray can
be dressed up the outside of the flue liner.
200mm minimum
All other details are the same.
Note: All flashings and trays in chimneys to
be metal (see Clause M11).
floor joist above
100mm mineral wool fire
minimum stop between frame
and chimney

PLAN OF RECESS

*at least 40mm air space

if wall of chimney is less
dpc at front than 200mm
apron level

*In Scotland, joists etc,

should be at least 200mm
CHIMNEY ON OUTSIDE WALL from inner surface of flue.
Brickwork or blockwork in
chimney construction should
be at least 100mm thick and
have a density of at least
1600kg/m3. Aircrete blocks
may be used if at least
150mm thick

movement gap between

timber and masonry to be
filled with mineral wool
saddle

timber lintel must be at least

6.8

300mm from inner face of

flue recess
cavity maintained
around chimney with
cavity wall ties as
required

cripple studs to lintel, gap

to brickwork filled with
mineral wool

CHIMNEY STACK AT RIDGE

hearth at least 125mm thick

head fixings

COMBINED WITH DPC TRAY *at least 40mm airspace if non-

AND FLASHING combustible material around flue
is less than 200mm thick

PLAN OF CHIMNEY AT UPPER FLOOR LEVEL

Page 14 Chapter 6.8 2013

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

Appendix 6.8-D

Flue outlet positions for solid fuel appliances

Point where flue passes through Clearance to flue outlet
weather surface (Notes 1,2)
A at or within 600m of the ridge. at least 600mm above the ridge.
A
D
B elsewhere on a roof (whether pitched or at least 2300mm horizontally from the
flat) nearest point on the weather surface and:
B a) at least 1000mm above the highest
C point of intersection of the chimney and
the weather surface: or
b) at least as high as the ridge.
C below (on a pitched roof) or within at least 1000mm above the top of the
2300mm horizontally to an openable opening.
rooflight, dormer window or other
opening, (Note 3)
D within 2300mm of an adjoining or at least 600mm above the adjacent
adjacent building, whether or not beyond building.
the boundary, (Note 3)

Notes
1 The weather surface is the building external surface, such as its roof, tiles or
external walls.
2 A flat roof has a pitch less than 10°.
3 The clearance given for A or B, as appropriate, will also apply.

6.8

2013 Chapter 6.8 Page 15

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

Appendix 6.8-E

Location of outlets from flues servicing gas appliances

P
600mm
Flue should not penetrate
shaded area
roof window
or opening

600mm

boundary
2000mm

Q
I

B D,E
C
H
F
J
N
A

L
M
H
G

I H

boundary K
6.8

Page 16 Chapter 6.8 2013

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

Location of outlets from flues serving gas appliances

Minimum separation distances for terminals in mm
Location Balanced flue Open flue
Natural draught Fanned draught Natural draught Fanned draught
A Below an opening (1) Appliance rated heat input (net) 300 (3) 300
0-7kW 300
>7-14kW 600
>14-32kW 1500
>32kW 2000
B Above an opening (1) 0-32kW 300 300 (3) 300
>32kW 600
C Horizontally to an opening 0-7kW 300 300 (3) 300
(1)
>7-14kW 400
>14kW 600
D Below gutters, soil pipes or 300 75 (3) 75
drain pipes
E Below eaves 300 200 (3) 200
F Below balcony or car port 600 200 (3) 200
roof
G From a vertical drainpipe or 300 150 (4) (3) 150
soil pipe
H From an internal or external 600 300 (3) 200
corner or to a boundary
alongside the terminal (2)
I Above ground, roof or 300 300 (3) 300
balcony level
J From a surface or a 600 600 (3) 600
boundary facing the
terminal (2)
K From a terminal facing the 600 1200 (3) 1200
terminal

6.8
L From an opening in the car 1200 1200 (3) 1200
port into the building
M Vertically from a terminal 1200 1500 (3) 1500
on the same wall
N Horizontally from a 300 300 (3) 300
terminal on the same wall
P From a structure on the N/A N/A 1500mm if a ridge terminal. N/A
roof For any other terminal, as
given in BS 5440-1:2000
Q Above the highest point of N/A Site in accordance with Site in accordance with BS 150
intersection with the roof manufacturer’s instructions 5440-1:2000

Notes:
1 An opening here means an openable element, such as an openable window, or a fixed opening such as an air vent. However, in addition, the
outlet should not be nearer than 150mm (fanned draught) or 300mm (natural draught) to an opening into the building fabric formed for the
purpose of accommodating a built in element, such as a window frame.
2 Boundary as defined in Paragraph 0.4. of Approved Document J: smaller separations to the boundary may be acceptable for appliances that
have been shown to operate safely with such separations from surfaces adjacent to or opposite the flue outlet.
3 Should not be used.
4 This dimension may be reduced to 75mm for appliances of up to 5kW input (net).
5 N/A means not applicable.

2013 Chapter 6.8 Page 17

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

Appendix 6.8-F

Location of outlets from flues serving oil-fired appliances

P
O

boundary

N
F C,D

J
B
A

H K
E F

G F L

boundary

Minimum separation distances for terminals in mm

Location of outlet (1) Appliance Appliance with
with vaporising burner
pressure
jet burner
A Below an opening (2, 3) 600 should not be used
B Horizontally to an opening (2, 3) 600 should not be used
C Below a plastic/painted gutter, drainage pipe or eaves if 75 should not be used
combustible material protected (4)
D Below a balcony or a plastic/painted gutter, drainage pipe or 600 should not be used
eaves without protection to combustible material
6.8

E From vertical sanitary pipework 300 should not be used

F From an external or internal corner or from a surface or 300 should not be used
boundary alongside the terminal
G Above ground or balcony level 300 should not be used
H From a surface or boundary facing the terminal 600 should not be used
J From a terminal facing the terminal 1200 should not be used
K Vertically from a terminal on the same wall 1500 should not be used
L Horizontally from a terminal on the same wall 750 should not be used
M Above the highest point of an intersection with the roof 600 (6) 1000 (5)
N From a vertical structure to the side of the terminal 750 (6) 2300
O Above a vertical structure which is less than 750mm (pressure 600 (6) 1000 (5)
jet burner) or 2300mm (vaporising burner) horizontally from
the side of the terminal
P From a ridge terminal to a vertical structure on the roof 1500 should not be used

Notes:
1 Terminals should only be positioned on walls where appliances have been approved for
such configurations when tested in accordance with BS EN 303-1:1999 or OFTEC standards
OFS A100 or OFS A101.
2 An opening means an openable element, such as an openable window, or a permanently
open air vent.
3 Notwithstanding the dimensions above, a terminal should be at least 300mm from
combustible material, e.g. a window frame.
4 A way of providing protection of combustible material would be to fit a heat shield at least
750mm wide.
5 Where a terminal is used with a vaporising burner, the terminal should be at least 2300mm
horizontally from the roof.
6 Outlets for vertical balanced flues in locations M, N and O should be in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.

Page 18 Chapter 6.8 2013

 6.8
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues

INDEX
A G W
Appliances 3, 4 Gas appliances 3, 6, 9, 10 Walls 1, 8, 11
B H Weather resistance 2, 5
Back boilers 3 Hearths 1, 3, 4, 6
Balanced flues 4 Height 2, 15, 16, 17
Bricks and blocks 5, 8 M
C Masonry chimneys 3, 8
Cappings 3, 9, 12, 13 Mortar 6
Chimney breasts 12, 14 O
Chimney pots 2 Oil appliances 9, 10
Chimneys 2, 3, 4, 7, Outlets, position 2, 4, 5, 8, 9
12, 13, 14
P
Cleaning, flues 2, 7
Pressure zones 2
Combustion air 1, 3, 4, 9, 10
R
Coring 8
Recesses 1, 13, 14
D
Render 2
Damp penetration 4, 8
S
Damp proof courses 2, 6, 14
Smoke test 9
Draught control unit 7
Solid fuel 1, 3, 9, 10
F
Solid fuel effect appliances 3, 10
Fire hazards 1, 2, 7
Stability 2, 5, 7, 9
Fireplaces 1, 3, 4, 6,
Stone masonry 5
12, 13, 14

6.8
T
Flashings 6, 14
Terminals 2, 4, 5,
Flue block chimneys 3, 6, 8, 9
6, 13
Flue direction and length 2, 3, 4
Testing 9
Flue liners 2, 3, 5, 6, 7
Timber frame construction 5
Flue pipes 1, 3, 4, 7, 10
Twin wall flue systems 6
Flue size 1, 2, 3, 4, 10
Foundations 2
Frost resistance 2

2013 Chapter 6.8 Page 19

Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

Part 6 Superstructure (excluding roofs)

Chapter 6.9
 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

CONTENTS

Clause Page Rainscreen cladding

INTRODUCTION 1 Location and fixing S11 10
Weather resistance S12 10
DESIGN Allowance for movement S13 11
Design standards D1 2 Tolerances S14 11
Statutory requirements D2 2
Design life D3 2 Insulated render systems
Accessibility for maintenance D4 2 Fixing S15 11
Weather resistance S16 11
Curtain walling Tolerances S17 12
Certification D5 2
In-service performance D6 3 Brick slip cladding systems
Fixing S18 12
Rainscreen cladding Weather resistance S19 12
Certification D7 4 Tolerances S20 13
In-service performance D8 4
APPENDIX 6.9-A
Insulated render systems Interfaces 13
Certification D9 5
In-service performance D10 5 INDEX 14

Brick slip cladding systems

Certification D11 6 SCOPE
In-service performance D12 6

This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical

General Requirements and recommendations for curtain walling and
6.9

Provision of information D13-D14 8 cladding.

MATERIALS
Material standards M1 8
Dpc/dpm materials M2 8
Glazing M3 8
Gaskets M4 8
Sealant M5 8
Thermal insulation M6 8
Breather membranes M7 8
Cavity barriers and fire-stops M8 8
Fixings M9 9
Timber preservation M10 9
Ventilation screens M11 9

SITEWORK
Sitework standards S1-S2 9
Handling and storage S3 9

Curtain walling
Location and fixing S4 9
Weather resistance S5 9
Glazing S6 10
Control of condensation S7 10
Allowance for movement S8 10
Tolerances S9 10
Testing S10 10
 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

INTRODUCTION STONE & PRECAST

CONCRETE CLADDING
This Chapter gives guidance on the forms
Stone & precast concrete cladding
of curtain walling and cladding acceptable
should be designed as curtain walling or
to NHBC. Curtain walling and cladding
rainscreen cladding and comply with the
systems that do not conform to the
relevant section of this Chapter.
following descriptions will not normally be
acceptable to NHBC.
DEFINITIONS (FOR THIS
Guidance on the use of other types of
cladding including brickwork, rendered CHAPTER)
masonry, vertical tile & slate cladding and Air barrier
timber cladding is given in Chapter 6.1 A continuous layer that limits air leakage
‘External masonry walls’ and Chapter 6.2 through the backing wall.
‘External timber framed walls’.
Air gap
CURTAIN WALLING The space between the back of the
typical rainscreen cladding system cladding panels and the external face of
This Chapter deals with the following the insulation in a rainscreen system.
curtain walling systems:
• prefabricated or site assembled support Air cushion
framework with infill panels or INSULATED RENDER Balancing external and internal air pressure
• prefabricated factory assembled wall This Chapter deals with insulated render to create a cushion within the air gap.
sections and glazing systems that systems that are fixed to all types of
include: backing wall. Backing wall
-- structural silicone glazing A framed or masonry wall to which the
-- mechanically fixed structural glazing cladding system is fixed.
-- slope glazing (excluding patent
Brick slip cladding system
glazing)
A brick slip system fixed to masonry or
-- coupled door and window frame
framed backing walls, normally supported
assemblies one storey or more in
by a proprietary carrier.
height (including spandrel panels).
Conservatories are not covered by this Cavity
Chapter. The space between the cladding system
and the backing wall. The cavity should be
adequately drained, and where required by

6.9
the design, be ventilated.

Cladding panels
The outer layer of a rainscreen cladding
system that shields other parts of the
system from direct rain.

typical insulated render system Compartmentation

The provision of baffles and cavity closers
to form compartments within the air gap
of a rainscreen cladding system, to achieve
BRICK SLIP CLADDING pressure equalisation. Cavity barriers
This Chapter deals with brick slip cladding that are provided to control the spread of
systems that are fixed to all types of smoke and fire may also be used to form
backing wall. the compartments.

Curtain walling
A form of vertical building enclosure
that supports no load other than its own
weight and the environmental forces that
Typical curtain walling system
act upon it, e.g. wind, water and solar.
Curtain walling also includes slope glazing
and coupled door and window frame
RAINSCREEN CLADDING assemblies one storey or more in height
This Chapter deals with rainscreen (including spandrel panels).
cladding systems that comprise:
• an outer skin of panels, which have Curtain walling system
open, baffled, or labyrinth (rebated) The vertical building enclosure system,
joints. Joints should not be sealed including all frames, brackets, fixings,
• a pressure equalised air gap at least flashings, gutters, copings, glass, panels,
50mm wide between the insulation and gaskets and sealant that form the assembly.
the panels
CWCT
• an insulated airtight backing wall.
The Centre for Window and Cladding
Typical brick slip cladding system Technology at Bath University.

2013 Chapter 6.9 Page 1

 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

CWCT Standards Rainscreen

The current CWCT Standards for The part of the assembly (normally the DESIGN STANDARDS
Systemised Building Envelopes. outermost) that prevents the majority of
rain from penetrating the wall. 6.9 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical
Design life Requirements
The period for which materials, products Some water may pass through the joints
Design that follows the guidance below
and systems should be designed to be of a rainscreen, but appropriate detailing
will be acceptable for curtain walling and
durable, assuming routine inspection and of open joints or the provision of baffled or
cladding.
maintenance. labyrinth joints should limit the amount.

Dpc/Dpm Rainscreen cladding system STATUTORY

A multi-layer façade fixed to the outside
Horizontal or vertical damp-proof course/
face of a building that provides a barrier
REQUIREMENTS
membrane to prevent the passage of
moisture. In curtain walling terminology, a to wind and rain. The system normally 6.9 - D2 Design shall comply with all
dpc is sometimes referred to as a dpm. includes a vapour control layer, air relevant statutory requirements
barrier, supporting framework and fixings,
Design should be in accordance with
Façade insulation, breather membrane, cavity/air
relevant Building Regulations and other
The face of a building which forms the gap and cladding panels.
statutory requirements.
outer appearance.
Traditional tile hanging and timber
Fire and smoke stopping cladding are not rainscreen cladding DESIGN LIFE
Preventing the transmission of fire and systems as defined in this Chapter.
6.9 - D3 Design shall provide
smoke through voids or cavities in the
Replaceable components satisfactory in-service performance
curtain walling or cladding assembly.
Secondary components are those that can subject to routine inspection and
Fixing be easily replaced without compromising maintenance
A component which is used to attach the the design and durability of the building Items to be taken into account include:
curtain walling or cladding system to the (see Technical Requirement R3), or the
(a) primary components
structure. need for progressive dismantling of the
Primary components should be designed
envelope system. Where this cannot
Gasket and specified to provide satisfactory in-
be achieved components should be
A compressible material that forms an service performance for the design life of
designed as primary components. A
air and water seal at joints between the building. See Technical Requirement
method statement should be provided
components. R3.
to demonstrate how components will
be replaced with specific reference to (b) secondary components
In-service performance
accessibility as detailed in clause 6.9 - D4. Secondary components should be
The manner or quality of functioning for a
material, product or system in use. designed and specified to provide
Secondary components
6.9

satisfactory in-service performance for at

Cladding panels, internal linings, external
Insulated render system least 25 years.
finishes, window and door furniture,
A proprietary render system applied to the
glazing, gaskets, seals and sealant that are
external face of an insulation material that
easily replaceable. ACCESSIBILITY FOR
is in turn fixed to the backing wall.
Separating floor
MAINTENANCE
Interstitial condensation 6.9 - D4 Appropriate arrangements shall
A floor that separates flats or rooms for
Condensation caused by vapour be provided for the purposes of cleaning,
residential purposes.
condensing on colder surfaces within the
inspection, maintenance and repair
wall construction. Separating wall
A wall that separates adjoining dwelling Provision should be made for safe future
Negative pressure access to the façade. Access should
houses, flats or rooms for residential
Where the air pressure on the internal face normally be provided from a safe working
purposes.
of the system is greater than that on the platform such as a cradle or mobile
external face. Slope glazing elevating platform.
A drained and ventilated sloped roofing
Positive pressure Appropriate arrangements should be made
system.
Where the air pressure on the external for the replacement of failed insulating
face of the system is greater than that on Spandrel panel glass units without incurring excessive
the internal face. A panel used in place of glazing units costs for gaining access.
to hide the edges of floor slabs, ceiling
Primary components
Framing, fixings, insulation, vapour control
details, insulation, and other building Curtain walling
elements.
layers, weathering components, cladding
panels and other secondary components
CERTIFICATION
Test pressures
that are not easily replaceable. The pressures at which testing is carried 6.9 - D5 Curtain walling systems
out in accordance with the design. shall be designed and certificated in
Pressure equalisation accordance with appropriate Standards
The creation of an air cushion within the Vapour control layer
cavity to significantly reduce the amount Curtain walling systems should have
A layer that restricts the passage of water
of water passing through the joints of certification confirming satisfactory
vapour into the construction to reduce the
a rainscreen. Compartmentation and assessment in accordance with the current
risk of interstitial condensation.
adequately large joints are required to CWCT Standard for Systemised Building
achieve pressure equalisation. Envelopes by an appropriate independent
technical approvals authority accepted
by NHBC. The CWCT Standard provides

Page 2 Chapter 6.9 2013

 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

detailed guidance on performance and Packing of brackets to achieve surface • the junctions with roof constructions
testing. tolerance should be permitted only and parapets.
in accordance with the product
Other certification bodies or test (g) testing
manufacturer’s recommendations.
documentation may be acceptable if they Air and water testing of the ‘prototype’
are considered by NHBC to be a suitable (b) insulating glass units curtain walling system should be carried
alternative. Insulating glass units should be in out in accordance with and pass the CWCT
accordance with Chapter 6.7 ‘Doors, Standard (test sequence A or B) tested at a
The certification, together with all test
windows and glazing’. test pressure of 600 Pascals. Panels tested
documentation should be made available
should be of similar size and configuration
to NHBC before work on the curtain walling (c) weather resistance to those to be used on the building.
or cladding begins on site. The curtain walling system, including
doors, windows and other openings, should Where the maximum calculated design
The use of the system should be within
resist the passage of water to the inside of wind pressure is above 2400 Pascals the
the scope of the certification and test
the building, allow free drainage and not test pressure should be increased to 0.25 x
documentation.
trap water. It should have: the design wind pressure.
• external and internal air and water seals,
IN-SERVICE and
The ‘prototype’ should remain watertight
during and after the test.
PERFORMANCE • drained and ventilated glazing rebates.
At a test pressure of 600 Pascals an air
6.9 - D6 Curtain walling systems shall Particular attention should be given to infiltration rate no higher than 1.5m3/hr/
be designed and specified to ensure the interfaces between the curtain walling m2 for fixed glazed panels is permissible
adequate in-service performance system and other elements or cladding provided there is no evidence of
Items to be taken into account include: systems. concentrated leakage.
(a) loads, movement, brackets and External and internal air and water seals Wind resistance, serviceability and safety
fixings and a drained ventilated cavity should be testing should be carried out in accordance
Dead and live loads should be transferred provided at all interfaces. Guidance on with the CWCT Standard.
safely to the building’s structure without interfaces is provided in Appendix 6.9-A.
undue permanent deformation or (h) electrical continuity and earth
deflection of any component. (d) air infiltration bonding
Appropriate gaskets and sealants should The curtain walling system should
Imposed loads should be calculated in be used to resist the flow of air from the comply with BS 7671 ‘Requirements for
accordance with BS EN 1991-1-1 and BS EN outside to the interior surface of the Electrical Installations, formerly IEE Wiring
1991-1-4 and take account of both internal curtain walling system. Particular attention Regulations’ and BS EN 62305 ‘Protection
and external pressures, together with the should be given to the interfaces between against lightning. General principles’.
location, shape and size of the building. the curtain walling system and the walls,
Thermal-induced loads due to differential roof, doors, windows and cladding system. (i) durability

6.9
stresses caused by temperature gradients The curtain walling system should be
Pre-formed factory-moulded ‘picture
within materials or components should be constructed with corrosion resistant or
frame’ type vulcanised epdm or silicone
accommodated without any reduction in adequately protected materials. The risk of
internal gaskets should be used for all
performance. The stresses in components bimetallic corrosion should be avoided by
curtain walling systems.
and materials should not exceed the the isolation of dissimilar metals.
permissible values recommended by the Sealant should be specified in accordance
Aluminium components should be
product manufacturer. with BS 6213 and the manufacturer’s
separated from direct contact with
recommendations.
Movement within the curtain walling cementitious surfaces.
should be accommodated without any (e) condensation The curtain walling system should not
reduction in performance. Causes of The curtain walling system should be include materials liable to infestation
movement include: designed to minimise the risk of surface attack by micro-organisms, fungi, insects
• dead and live loads and interstitial condensation by the use of or vermin.
• changes in temperature thermal breaks and a continuous vapour
• changes in the moisture content of control layer. Where timber is used it should be treated
components in accordance with the guidance in Chapter
Thermal bridging should be controlled to 2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural solid
• freezing of retained moisture
ensure no part of the curtain wall is more timber)’. Timber should only be used
• creep.
at risk of surface condensation forming where it can be easily inspected and
Fixings and supports should be designed than the glazing. replaced without disturbing the curtain
to accommodate specified loads and take walling system.
account of the product manufacturer’s (f) acoustic performance
recommendations. Noise from the curtain walling system (j) tolerances
caused by loads, movements and changes The design should allow for the line, level,
Pull-out or destructive testing of anchors in the environmental conditions should be plumb and plane of the completed curtain
and fixings should be carried out in accommodated without being intrusive. wall to be within reasonable tolerances.
accordance with the design, BS 5080
The curtain walling system should be See Chapter 1.2 ‘A consistent approach to
and the Construction Fixings Association
designed to resist the passage of airborne finishes’.
Guidance Note ‘Procedure for Site Testing
Construction Fixings’. Tests should be and impact sound within the building.
carried out at a suitable rate agreed with Particular attention should be given to
NHBC. The test results should be made flanking transmission at:
available to NHBC. • the edges of separating floors
• the outer ends of separating walls
• the outer ends of partition walls

2013 Chapter 6.9 Page 3

 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

Rainscreen cladding • freezing of retained moisture The air gap should be adequately
• creep. ventilated. Dpc/dpm trays with stop ends
CERTIFICATION Fixing rails, frames, fixings and fasteners
should be provided above openings, at the
base of the rainscreen and at interfaces
6.9 - D7 Rainscreen cladding systems should be designed to accommodate
where necessary, to ensure water is
shall be designed and certificated in specified loads and take account of the
drained to the outside.
accordance with appropriate Standards product manufacturer’s recommendations.
Particular attention should be given to the
Rainscreen cladding systems, including Pull-out or destructive testing of anchors
interface between the rainscreen cladding
panels, should have current certification and fixings should be carried out in
system and the walls, roof, doors, windows,
confirming satisfactory assessment by accordance with the design, BS 5080
other cladding systems, and curtain
an appropriate independent technical and the Construction Fixings Association
walling. External and internal air and water
approvals authority accepted by NHBC, Guidance Note ‘Procedure for Site Testing
seals should be provided at all interfaces.
including: British Board of Agrément (BBA) Construction Fixings’. Tests should be
Guidance on interfaces is provided in
or Building Research Establishment (BRE) carried out at a suitable rate agreed with
Appendix 6.9-A.
Certification. NHBC. The test results should be made
available to NHBC. Open, baffled or labyrinth (rebated) joints
Systems that are assessed and certificated should normally have a minimum opening
by an appropriate independent technical Bonded fixings should be specified only
of 10mm.
approvals organisation in accordance where there is no suitable alternative and
with the CWCT Standard for Systemised should be designed in accordance with the
Building Envelopes will normally be product manufacturer’s recommendations.
acceptable to NHBC.
Packing of the supporting rails,
10mm (min) open joint
Other certification bodies or test frame or the panel fixings to achieve
documentation, may be acceptable if they surface tolerance should be permitted
are considered by NHBC to be a suitable only in accordance with the product
alternative. manufacturer’s recommendations.

The certification, together with all test The air gap between the face of the
documentation should be made available insulation and the back of the rainscreen
to NHBC before work on the rainscreen panels should be of sufficient width to 10mm (min) baffled joint

begins on site. allow any water passing the joints to run

down the back of the rainscreen panels
The use of the system should be within and be discharged externally without
the scope of the certification and test wetting the insulation or the backing wall.
documentation.
The design should avoid the need for
IN-SERVICE disproportionate work when repairing or
6.9

10mm (min) labyrinth (rebated) joint

replacing individual components.
PERFORMANCE
(b) weather resistance
6.9 - D8 Rainscreen cladding systems
The design should ensure that water is
shall be designed and specified to ensure
prevented from reaching any parts of the
adequate in-service performance A screen to prevent birds and animals
wall that could be adversely affected by
Items to be taken into account include: the presence of moisture. entering the cavity should be provided at
(a) loads, movement and fixings the top and bottom of the rainscreen and
Sealants should be specified in accordance penetrations through the cladding.
Dead and live loads should be transferred with BS 6213 and the manufacturer’s
safely to the building’s structure without recommendations. (c) insulation
undue permanent deformation or Where insulation forms part of the
deflection of any component. The minimum width for air gaps should be:
rainscreen cladding system it should cover
• 50mm for panels with open joints
Imposed loads should be calculated in all exposed areas of the backing wall, be
• 38mm for panels with baffled or
accordance with BS EN 1991-1-1 and BS EN neatly cut around fixings and brackets and
labyrinth (rebated) joints.
1991-1-4 and take account of the location, be fixed in accordance with the product
50mm (min) 38mm (min)
shape and size of the building. manufacturer’s recommendations.

Thermal-induced loads due to differential

stresses caused by temperature gradients
within materials or components should be
accommodated without any reduction in
performance. The stresses in components
and materials should not exceed the
permissible values recommended by the
product manufacturer.
Movement within the rainscreen cladding
should be accommodated without any
reduction in performance. Causes of
movement include:
• dead and live loads open joints baffled or labyrinth
(rebated) joints
• changes in temperature
• changes in the moisture content of
components

Page 4 Chapter 6.9 2013

 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

(f) compartmentation rainscreen cladding system to be within

A rainscreen cladding system that has reasonable tolerances for the materials
open joints between the panels should be involved. See Chapter 1.2 ‘ A consistent
designed as a pressure equalised system. approach to finishes’.
The cavity should be compartmented by:
• a horizontal cavity closer at each floor Insulated render systems
level, and
• vertical cavity closers at centres not CERTIFICATION
exceeding 6.0m, 6.9 - D9 Insulated render systems
• vertical cavity closers at centres not shall be designed and certificated in
exceeding 1.5m within 6.0m of an accordance with appropriate Standards
internal or external corner, and
• a vertical cavity closer as close as Insulated render systems should
possible to an external corner, normally have current certification confirming
within 300mm. satisfactory assessment by an appropriate
independent technical approvals authority
1.5m (max)
6.0m (max)
accepted by NHBC, including: British Board
of Agrément (BBA) or Building Research
insulation neatly fitted
Establishment (BRE) Certification.
between support frame

IN-SERVICE
Where the insulation is fixed to the backing
PERFORMANCE
horizontal cavity
closer at each
wall a minimum of one non-combustible floor level
fixing per square metre or per insulation 6.9 - D10 Insulated render systems shall
batt, whichever is the lesser, should be be designed and specified to ensure
provided in addition to the other fixings. adequate in-service performance
This compartmentation is in addition
Reference should be made to BRE to the requirements of the Building Items to be taken into account include:
document BR135 - 2003 ‘Fire performance Regulations for cavity barriers to control (a) loads, movement and fixings
of external thermal insulation for walls of the spread of smoke and fire. However, the Dead and live loads should be transferred
multi-storey buildings’ when specifying the same cavity barriers may be used for the safely to the building’s structure without
type of insulation system to be installed. compartmentation. undue permanent deformation or
The design should ensure that the deflection of any component.
(g) acoustic performance
insulation is continuous around Imposed loads should be calculated in
Noise from the rainscreen cladding system
penetrations through the rainscreen accordance with BS EN 1991-1-1 and BS EN
caused by rain striking the outer surface of
cladding system. 1991-1-4 and take account of the location,
panels should be accommodated without

6.9
Where the rainscreen panel joints are open being intrusive e.g. by the use of noise shape and size of the building.
and the performance of the insulation absorbing or anti-drumming material.
Thermal-induced loads due to differential
could be diminished by moisture, a stresses caused by temperature gradients
breather membrane should be provided (h) electrical continuity and earth
bonding within materials or components should be
over the outer face of the insulation. accommodated without any reduction in
The rainscreen cladding system should
comply with BS 7671 ‘Requirements for performance. The stresses in components
(d) thermal bridging and condensation
Electrical Installations, formerly IEE Wiring and materials should not exceed the
The rainscreen cladding system should be
Regulations’ and BS EN 62305 ‘Protection permissible values recommended by the
designed to minimise the risk of thermal
against lightning. General principles’. manufacturer.
bridging and, surface and interstitial
condensation. Movement within the insulated render
(i) durability
system should be accommodated without
A vapour control layer should be provided The rainscreen cladding system should
any reduction in performance. Causes of
unless a condensation risk analysis in be designed with corrosion resistant,
movement include:
accordance with BS 5250 shows that one adequately protected or durable materials.
• dead and live loads
is not necessary. The vapour control layer
Fixings and bracketry should normally be • changes in temperature
should be fixed on the warm side of the
stainless steel or a suitable non-ferrous • changes in the moisture content of
wall insulation.
metal. components
(e) air infiltration • freezing of retained moisture
The risk of bimetallic corrosion should • creep.
The rainscreen cladding system should be
be avoided by the isolation of dissimilar
fixed to a backing wall that is reasonably
metals. Movement joints in the backing wall should
airtight, e.g:
be continued through the insulated render
• masonry walls jointed to a high standard Aluminium components should be system and formed in accordance with the
with all joints filled separated from direct contact with manufacturer’s recommendations.
• framed walls with a rigid sheathing on cementitious surfaces.
the cavity face with all joints taped or Fixing rails, frames, mechanical and
sealed. The rainscreen cladding system should bonded fixings should be designed
not include materials liable to infestation to accommodate specified loads and
Where reasonable airtightness cannot be attack by micro-organisms, fungi, insects take account of the manufacturer’s
achieved, a separate continuous vapour or vermin. recommendations.
permeable air barrier with joints taped or
sealed should be provided on the outer (j) tolerances Pull-out or destructive testing of anchors
face of the backing wall. The design should allow for the line, and fixings should be carried out in
level, plumb and plane of the completed

2013 Chapter 6.9 Page 5

 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

accordance with the design, BS 5080 Where appropriate, a screen to prevent (f) render
and the Construction Fixings Association birds and animals entering the cavity Proprietary render systems should
Guidance Note ‘Procedure for Site Testing should be provided at the top and bottom be specified in accordance with the
Construction Fixings’. Tests should be of the cavity and to penetrations through manufacturer’s recommendations and
carried out at a suitable rate agreed with the cladding. include the correct number and thickness
NHBC. The test results should be made of render coats.
available to NHBC. (c) insulation
The insulation type should be suitable for Corners, returns and features should
(b) weather resistance the intended purpose and be appropriately be formed with appropriate trims in
Insulated render systems, together with keyed to receive the render finish. accordance with the manufacturer’s
the backing wall to which they are applied, recommendations.
The insulated render system should be
should satisfactorily resist the passage of
securely fixed to the support frame or (g) durability
moisture to the inside of the building.
backing wall with appropriate fixings/ The insulated render system should be
For timber and steel framed backing adhesive in accordance with the designed with corrosion resistant or
walls a cavity of at least 15mm should manufacturer’s recommendations. adequately protected materials.
be provided between the wall and the non-combustible fixings
Fixings and bracketry should normally be
insulation to allow any moisture to drain
stainless steel, suitable non-ferrous metal
away.
or suitable plastics.
Where the backing wall is timber framed
The risk of bimetallic corrosion should
the cavity should be ventilated in
be avoided by the isolation of dissimilar
accordance with Chapter 6.2 ‘External
metals.
timber framed walls’ (Design).
steel frame timber frame The insulated render system should not
include materials liable to infestation
attack by micro-organisms, fungi, insects
or vermin.

A minimum of one non-combustible fixing (h) tolerances

per square metre or per insulation batt, The design should allow for the line,
whichever provides the greater number, level, plumb and plane of the completed
should be provided in addition to the other insulated render system to be within
fixings. The non-combustible fixings should reasonable tolerances for the materials
be fixed through the mesh reinforcement. involved. See Chapter 1.2 ‘ A consistent
approach to finishes’.
15mm (min) 15mm (min) drained Reference should be made to BRE
drained cavity and ventilated cavity
document BR135 - 2003 ‘Fire performance
Brick slip cladding systems
6.9

The introduction of a cavity is likely to of external thermal insulation for walls of

increase the risk of impact damage to multi-storey buildings’ when specifying the
vulnerable areas of the insulated render type of insulation system to be installed. CERTIFICATION
system, e.g. at low level, around balconies 6.9 - D11 Brick slip cladding systems
The design should ensure the continuity
and where cradle systems, etc. can come of insulation around openings and other shall be designed and certificated in
into contact with the façade. Suitable penetrations. accordance with appropriate Standards
precautions to resist impact damage Brick slip cladding systems should
should be included in the design e.g. by (d) thermal bridging and condensation have current certification confirming
the provision of a rigid board behind the The insulated render system should be satisfactory assessment by an appropriate
insulation whilst maintaining the cavity. designed to minimise the risk of thermal technical approvals authority accepted
bridging and surface and interstitial by NHBC, including: British Board of
Dpc/dpm trays with stop ends should be
condensation. Agrément (BBA) or Building Research
provided above openings, above cavity
barriers, at the base of the insulated A condensation risk analysis in accordance Establishment (BRE) Certification.
render system and at interfaces where with BS 5250 should be carried out. Unless
necessary to ensure water is drained to it shows otherwise, a vapour control layer IN-SERVICE
the outside. The insulated render support should be provided. The vapour control
system should not obstruct the drainage layer should be fixed on the warm side of
PERFORMANCE
paths. the wall insulation. 6.9 - D12 Brick slip cladding systems
shall be designed and specified to ensure
Insulated render systems can be applied (e) reinforcement adequate in-service performance
direct to concrete panels or masonry Reinforcement mesh should be included
backing walls without a cavity being in the design in accordance with the Items to be taken into account include:
provided. manufacturer’s recommendations. (a) loads, movement and fixings
Typically, reinforcement mesh should also Dead and live loads should be transferred
Particular attention should be given to the
be provided at points where there is a safely to the building’s structure without
interfaces between the insulated render
likelihood of increased stress in the render undue permanent deformation or
system and the walls, roof, doors, windows,
system, e.g. at the corners of window or deflection of any component.
other cladding systems and curtain walling.
Guidance on interfaces is provided in door openings. Imposed loads should be calculated in
Appendix 6.9-A. Appropriate trims should be provided at accordance with BS EN 1991-1-1 and BS EN
openings, corners, angles, interfaces and 1991-1-4 and take account of the location,
Sealants and tapes should be specified
movement joints in accordance with the shape and size of the building.
in accordance with BS 6213 and the
manufacturer’s recommendations. manufacturer’s recommendations.

Page 6 Chapter 6.9 2013

 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

Thermal-induced loads due to differential steel frame timber frame Reference should be made to BRE
stresses caused by temperature gradients document BR135 - 2003 ‘Fire performance
within materials or components should be of external thermal insulation for walls of
accommodated without any reduction in multi-storey buildings’ when specifying the
performance. The stresses in components type of insulation system to be installed.
and materials should not exceed
The design should ensure the continuity
permissible values recommended by the
of insulation around openings and other
manufacturer.
penetrations.
Movement within the brick slip system
should be accommodated without any (d) thermal bridging and condensation
reduction in performance. Causes of The brick slip cladding system should be
movement include: designed to minimise the risk of thermal
• dead and live loads bridging and surface and interstitial
• changes in temperature 15mm (min)
drained cavity
15mm (min) drained
and ventilated cavity
condensation.
• changes in the moisture content of A vapour control layer should be provided
components The introduction of a cavity is likely to
increase the risk of impact damage to unless a condensation risk analysis in
• freezing of retained moisture accordance with BS 5250 shows that one
• creep. vulnerable areas of the brick slip cladding
system, e.g. at low level, around balconies is not necessary. The vapour control layer
Movement joints in the backing wall and where cradle systems, etc. can come should be fixed on the warm side of the
should be continued through the brick slip into contact with the façade. Suitable wall insulation.
cladding system and formed in accordance precautions to resist impact damage (e) carriers
with the manufacturer’s recommendations. should be included in the design e.g. by Proprietary carriers forming an integral
the provision of a rigid board behind the part of the brick slip cladding system
Fixing rails, frames, fixings and fasteners
insulation whilst maintaining the cavity. should be fixed with appropriate
should be designed to accommodate
specified loads and take account of the Dpc/dpm trays with stop ends should be fixings/adhesive in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. provided above openings, above cavity manufacturer’s recommendations.
barriers, at the base of the brick slip
Bonded fixings of rails, frames, fixings (f) brick slips
cladding system and at interfaces where
and fasteners should be specified only Brick slips should be specified and
necessary to ensure water is drained to
where there is no suitable alternative and fixed in accordance with the system
the outside. The brick slip support system
should be designed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
should not obstruct the drainage paths.
manufacturer’s recommendations.
The design should ensure that excessive
Brick slip cladding systems can be applied
Pull-out or destructive testing of anchors cutting of brick slips is avoided, e.g. in
direct to concrete panels or masonry
and fixings should be carried out in the storey heights, at corners and around
backing walls without a cavity being

6.9
accordance with the design, BS 5080 openings. Coursing should be arranged to
provided.
and the Construction Fixings Association suit lintel heights.
Guidance Note ‘Procedure for Site Testing Particular attention should be given to the
Construction Fixings’. Tests should be interfaces between the brick slip cladding
carried out at a suitable rate agreed with system and the walls, roof, doors, windows,
NHBC. The test results should be made other cladding systems and curtain walling.
insulation (carrier)
available to NHBC. Guidance on interfaces is provided in neatly cut
around opening
Appendix 6.9-A.
(b) weather resistance
Brick slip cladding systems, together with Sealants should be specified in accordance
the backing wall to which they are applied, with BS 6213 and the manufacturer’s
should satisfactorily resist the passage of recommendations.
moisture.
Where appropriate a screen to prevent
For timber and steel framed backing birds and animals entering the cavity
walls a cavity of at least 15mm should be should be provided at the top and bottom
provided between the wall and the brick of the cavity and to penetrations through (g) joints
slip cladding system to allow any moisture the cladding. Mortars, proprietary mortars and grouts
to drain away. should be specified in accordance with the
(c) insulation
Where the backing wall is timber framed Insulation forming an integral part of system manufacturer’s recommendations
the cavity should be ventilated in the brick slip cladding system should to enable each joint to be adequately filled
accordance with Chapter 6.2 ‘External be specified and fixed with appropriate and appropriately struck.
timber framed walls’ (Design). fixings/adhesive in accordance with the (h) durability
manufacturer’s recommendations. Fixings for the brick slip cladding
Other insulation included in the design system should be corrosion resistant or
should be suitable for its intended purpose adequately protected materials.
and be specified and fixed with appropriate Fixings and bracketry should normally be
fixings/adhesive in accordance with the stainless steel, suitable non-ferrous metal
manufacturer’s recommendations. or appropriate plastics.
A minimum of one non-combustible fixing The risk of bimetallic corrosion should
per square metre or per insulation batt, be avoided by the isolation of dissimilar
whichever is the lesser, should be provided metals.
in addition to the other fixings.

2013 Chapter 6.9 Page 7

 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

The brick slip cladding system should References to British Standards and Codes Sealant should be selected and applied in
not include materials liable to infestation of Practice include those made under the accordance with BS 6213 and BS EN ISO
attack by micro-organisms, fungi, insects Construction Products Directive (89/106/ 11600.
or vermin. EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
Sealant to be used in locations where
European Technical Specifications
(i) tolerances differential movement may be expected,
approved by a European Committee for
The design should allow for the line, e.g. interfaces between the façade and the
Standardisation (CEN).
level, plumb and plane of the completed structure, should be one of the following:
brick slip cladding system to be within • two part polysulphide
reasonable tolerances for the materials
DPC/DPM MATERIALS • one part polysulphide
involved. See Chapter 1.2 ‘ A consistent 6.9 - M2 Materials for damp-proofing • one part silicone
approach to finishes’. shall resist adequately the passage of • one or two part polyurethane.
moisture Other materials may be used if
General Items to be taken into account include: satisfactorily assessed in accordance with
(a) dpcs/dpms Technical Requirement R3.
PROVISION OF The following materials are acceptable for
use as dpcs/dpms:
INFORMATION • polyethylene to BS 6515
THERMAL INSULATION
6.9 - D13 Designs and specifications • EPDM 6.9 - M6 Insulation materials shall
shall be produced in a clearly • neoprene provide the degree of insulation to
understandable format and include all • proprietary materials assessed in comply with the design
relevant information accordance with Technical Requirement
Insulation materials should be inert,
R3.
Drawings and specifications should durable, rot and vermin proof and should
include: Materials for dpcs/dpms should be not be adversely affected by moisture or
• full set of drawings compatible with adjoining materials. vapour.
• schedule of revisions
Dpcs/dpms and flexible cavity trays should Insulation materials that comply with the
• manufacturer’s specification
be of the correct dimensions to suit the following Standards are acceptable:
• fixing schedules
detailed design. • mineral wool to BS EN 13162
• specific details of all interfaces
• FR grade (flame retardant) expanded
• manufacturer’s recommendations For complicated junctions, preformed polystyrene to BS EN 13163
relating to proprietary items cavity trays are recommended. • FR grade (flame retardant) extruded
• on-site testing regime.
polystyrene to BS EN 13164
(b) flashings
6.9 - D14 All relevant information shall • rigid polyurethane foam and
The following are acceptable as flashings:
be distributed to appropriate personnel polyisocyanurate to BS EN 13165
• rolled lead sheet (at least code 4)
• phenolic foam to BS EN 13166
Ensure that design and specification complying with BS EN 12588
6.9

• cellular glass to BS EN 13167.

information is issued to site supervisors • aluminium and aluminium alloys to BS
and relevant specialist subcontractors and/ EN 485 and BS EN 573 Other materials may be used if
or suppliers. • zinc alloys to BS EN 988 satisfactorily assessed in accordance with
• stainless steel. Technical Requirement R3.
Manufacturers’ requirements for
installation and fixing should be made Aluminium and aluminium alloys should
available for reference on site to ensure not come into contact with cementitious BREATHER MEMBRANES
work is carried out in accordance with the material. 6.9 - M7 Breather membranes shall be
design and specification. durable and be capable of allowing water
All relevant information in a form suitable
GLAZING vapour to pass outwards and prevent
moisture from penetrating inwards
for the use of site operatives should 6.9 - M3 Glazing shall be as required by
be available on site before work on the the design Breather membranes should comply with
curtain walling or cladding starts. BS 4016 (Type 1 in areas of very severe
Reference should be made to Chapter 6.7
exposure).
‘Doors, windows and glazing’ (each section)
MATERIALS STANDARDS for guidance on glazing. Other materials may be used if
satisfactorily assessed in accordance with
6.9 - M1 All materials shall: GASKETS Technical Requirement R3.
(a) meet the technical requirements
6.9 - M4 Materials for gaskets shall
(b) take account of the design
provide satisfactory performance CAVITY BARRIERS AND
Materials that comply with the design and
Extruded rubber gaskets should comply FIRE-STOPS
the guidance below will be acceptable
with BS 4255. 6.9 - M8 Materials used for cavity
for curtain walling, rainscreen cladding,
insulated render and brick slip cladding barriers and fire-stops shall be capable
Other materials may be used if
systems. of providing adequate resistance to fire
satisfactorily assessed in accordance with
Technical Requirement R3. and smoke
Materials for curtain walling, rainscreen
Materials specified in statutory
cladding, insulated render and brick slip
cladding systems should comply with all SEALANT requirements are acceptable.
relevant standards, including those listed 6.9 - M5 Materials for sealant shall Other materials may be used if
below. Where no standard exists, Technical provide satisfactory performance satisfactorily assessed in accordance with
Requirement R3 applies (see Chapter Technical Requirement R3.
1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards and
Technical Requirements’).

Page 8 Chapter 6.9 2013

 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

Systems incorporating proprietary Curtain walling systems should be

intumescent materials should follow the SITEWORK STANDARDS correctly located and securely fixed in
guidance provided by The Intumescent accordance with the manufacturer’s
Fire Seals Association (IFSA) and the 6.9 - S1 All sitework shall: specification and the design details.
Association for Specialist Fire Protection (a) meet the Technical Requirements
(b) take account of the design The type, size and positioning of all fixings
(ASFP).
(c) follow established good practice and should be in accordance with the design.
workmanship
FIXINGS Proprietary fixings should be used in
Sitework that complies with the design accordance with the manufacturer’s
6.9 - M9 Fixings shall be of durable recommendations with particular attention
and guidance below will be acceptable for
material and provide satisfactory curtain walling and cladding systems. given to:
performance • the correct embedment, spacing and
All relevant information in a form suitable
Fixings should be manufactured from: edge distances
for the use of site operatives should
• phosphor bronze • correct torque settings
be available on site before work on the
• silicon bronze • the provision of suitable locking nuts
curtain walling or cladding system starts,
• stainless steel to BS EN ISO 3506 and washers
including:
• mild steel with coatings to BS EN 12329, • the isolation of dissimilar metals
• full set of drawings
BS EN 12330, BS EN 1461, or other • the isolation of aluminium from
• schedule of revisions
appropriate treatment in accordance cementitious material.
• manufacturer’s specification
with BS EN ISO 12944 or BS EN ISO
• fixing schedules
14713
• specific details of all interfaces WEATHER RESISTANCE
• aluminium alloy to BS EN 573 and BS
• manufacturer’s recommendations 6.9 - S5 Curtain walling systems
EN 755
relating to proprietary items shall be correctly installed to prevent
• appropriate plastics.
• on-site testing regime. moisture entering the building
Materials that comply with recognised
6.9 - S2 Curtain walling and cladding Items to be taken into account include:
Standards, which provide equal or better
performance to those above, would also be systems shall be installed by competent (a) weathertightness
acceptable. operatives Curtain walling systems including doors,
windows and other components should be
Curtain walling, rainscreen cladding,
Other materials may be used if installed correctly to ensure satisfactory
insulated render and brick slip cladding
satisfactorily assessed in accordance with in-service performance.
systems should be installed by operatives
Technical Requirement R3.
who: (b) gaskets and sealants
Aluminium and aluminium alloys should • are competent Appropriate gaskets and sealants
not come into contact with cementitious • are familiar with the system being should be installed and used to ensure
material. installed satisfactory performance. Gaskets and

6.9
• hold a certificate confirming they sealants should be used in accordance
TIMBER PRESERVATION have been trained by the system with the design and the manufacturer’s
manufacturer, supplier or installer. recommendations.
6.9 - M10 Timber shall be either
naturally durable or preservative treated Pre-formed factory-moulded ‘picture
to provide adequate protection against
HANDLING AND STORAGE frame’ type vulcanised epdm or silicone
rot and insect attack 6.9 - S3 Materials, products and internal gaskets should be used.
systems shall be protected and stored
Reference should be made to Chapter 2.3
in a satisfactory manner to prevent
‘Timber preservation (natural solid timber)’
damage, distortion, uneven weathering
(each section) for guidance on preservative
and degradation picture frame gasket
treatments.
Items to be taken into account include:
VENTILATION SCREENS (a) handling and storage
The curtain walling or cladding system
6.9 - M11 Ventilation openings shall be
should be transported, lifted, handled
protected from the entry of birds and
and stored in accordance with the
animals manufacturer’s recommendations.
Ventilation openings where the least
Insulated glass units should be carefully
dimension exceeds 10mm should be
stored and protected in a sheltered dry
protected to prevent the entry of birds and
area.
animals.
Acceptable protection of openings can be (b) protection
provided by: All practical steps should be taken to avoid typical profile

• rigid fabrications with width of opening the risk of damage to the curtain walling or
greater than 3mm and less than 10mm cladding system during construction.
(no restriction on length) External and internal air and water seals
• rigid fabrications with round holes Curtain walling and a drained cavity should be provided
greater than 3mm and less than 10mm at all interfaces. Guidance on interfaces is
diameter LOCATION AND FIXING provided in Appendix 6.9-A.
• square or rectangular mesh where the
6.9 - S4 Curtain walling systems shall (c) dpcs/dpms
clear opening size is greater than 3mm
be correctly located and securely fixed Dpcs/dpms should be installed correctly to
and less than 10mm.
in accordance with the design provide a physical barrier to the passage
of moisture. Dpc/dpm arrangements which

2013 Chapter 6.9 Page 9

 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

rely solely on sealant should not be used. including all joints and interfaces which • the isolation of aluminium from
Guidance on the use of dpcs/dpms at are designed to be permanently closed and cementitious material.
interfaces is provided in Appendix 6.9-A. watertight.
Dpc/dpm arrangements should extend Representative samples of the finished WEATHER RESISTANCE
the full height of the curtain walling installation should be hose tested on site 6.9 - S12 Rainscreen cladding systems
system and have appropriate details at in accordance with the current CWCT shall be correctly installed to prevent
all interfaces including floors, walls, roofs, Standard for curtain walling. moisture entering the building
balconies and terraces, to ensure moisture
is directed to the outside. Items to be taken into account include:
(a) weathertightness
(d) opening doors and lights Rainscreen cladding systems including
Opening doors and lights should be fitted door, window and other openings and
in accordance with the design, hang square cover flashings, should be installed
hose test of
within the curtain wall frame and fit neatly typical interface correctly to ensure satisfactory in-service
with minimum gaps to ensure effective performance.
weatherproofing.
Installation should prevent water reaching
any parts of the wall that could be
GLAZING adversely affected by the presence of
6.9 - S6 Glazing shall be carried out in moisture.
accordance with relevant standards
The following minimum air gap should be
Glazing should be carried out in maintained behind all rainscreen panels:
accordance with Chapter 6.7 ‘Doors, • 50mm for panels with open joints, or
windows and glazing’ (Design and • 38mm for panels with baffle or labyrinth
Sitework). (rebated) joints.
50mm (min) 38mm (min)
At least 5% of the completed curtain
CONTROL OF walling system should be tested, with
CONDENSATION particular focus on vulnerable areas such
6.9 - S7 Installation shall ensure that as joints and interfaces.
the risk of condensation is minimised Other testing may be acceptable if it
Insulation should be installed in is considered by NHBC to be a suitable
accordance with the design, ensuring that alternative.
all interfaces are adequately insulated. The results of all testing should be made
A continuous, durable vapour control layer available to NHBC.
6.9

should be provided in accordance with the

design. Rainscreen cladding
open joints baffled or labyrinth
(rebated) joints

ALLOWANCE FOR LOCATION AND FIXING

Unless specified otherwise in the design,
MOVEMENT 6.9 - S11 Rainscreen cladding systems
all open, baffled or labyrinth (rebated)
shall be correctly located and securely
6.9 - S8 Installation shall allow joints should have a minimum opening of
fixed in accordance with the design
movement of the curtain walling system 10mm.
and the building without causing damage Rainscreen cladding systems should
or deformation be correctly located and securely fixed
in accordance with the manufacturer’s
Allowance for movement should be specification and the design details.
provided in accordance with the design. 10mm (min) open joint
The type, size and positioning of all
anchors, fixing rails, frames, fixings and
TOLERANCES fasteners should be in accordance with the
6.9 - S9 Installation shall achieve the design.
design tolerances
Bonded fixings should only be used in
The line, level, plumb and plane of the accordance with the design.
completed curtain walling system should 10mm (min) baffled joint

be in accordance with the design. See Anchors, fixings and bracketry should
Chapter 1.2 ‘ A consistent approach to normally be stainless steel or a suitable
finishes’. non-ferrous metal.
Proprietary fixings should be used in
TESTING accordance with the manufacturer’s
6.9 - S10 Site hose testing shall be recommendations with particular attention 10mm (min) labyrinth (rebated) joint

carried out on the curtain walling given to:

system to confirm satisfactory • the correct embedment, spacing and
edge distances
performance
• correct torque levels
On-site testing should be carried out • the provision of suitable locking nuts
to determine the resistance to water Where required by the design a screen
and washers
penetration of the curtain walling system, to prevent birds and animals entering
• the isolation of dissimilar metals

Page 10 Chapter 6.9 2013

 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

the cavity should be provided at the top (d) compartmentation ALLOWANCE FOR
and bottom of the rainscreen and to To help achieve pressure equalisation in
penetrations through the cladding. open jointed rainscreen cladding systems, MOVEMENT
the cavity should be compartmented by: 6.9 - S13 Installation shall allow
Where required by the design, dpcs/dpms
• a horizontal cavity closer at each floor movement of the rainscreen cladding
should be installed correctly to provide a
level, and system and the building without causing
physical barrier to the passage of moisture.
• vertical cavity closers at centres not damage or deformation
Dpc/dpm arrangements which rely solely
exceeding 6.0m, and
on sealant should not be used. Allowance for movement e.g. at interfaces
• vertical cavity closers at centres not
exceeding 1.5m in the area within 6.0m and at gaps between panels, should be
To ensure moisture is directed to the
of an internal or external corner, and provided in accordance with the design.
outside, dpc/dpm arrangements should be
correctly formed with suitable upstands • a vertical cavity closer as close as
and stop ends including at the junction possible to an external corner, normally TOLERANCES
between the rainscreen cladding and any within 300mm.
6.9 - S14 Installation shall achieve the
other component or system. External and 1.5m (max) design tolerances
internal air and water seals and a drained 6.0m (max)
cavity should be provided at all interfaces. Installation should allow for the line,
Guidance on interfaces is provided in level, plumb and plane of the completed
Appendix 6.9-A. rainscreen cladding system to be within
reasonable tolerances for the materials
Appropriate sealants should be used horizontal cavity involved. See Chapter 1.2 ‘ A consistent
closer at each
in accordance with the design and the floor level approach to finishes’.
manufacturer’s recommendations to
ensure satisfactory performance.
Insulated Render Systems
(b) insulation and condensation This compartmentation is in addition
Where insulation forms part of the to the requirements of the Building FIXING
rainscreen, it should be installed in Regulations for cavity barriers to control 6.9 - S15 Insulated render systems shall
accordance with the design and the the spread of smoke and fire. However, the
be securely fixed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations, same cavity barriers may be used for the
design
ensuring that all parts of the backing wall compartmentation.
are adequately insulated. Insulated render systems should be
Cavity closers should be rigid and securely fixed in accordance with
Where the rainscreen panel joints are be installed in accordance with the the design and the manufacturer’s
open and the insulation could be adversely manufacturer’s recommendations with recommendations.
affected by the presence of water, a particular attention given to maintaining
continuous durable breather membrane ventilation and drainage in accordance The type, size and positioning of all
with the design. anchors, fixing rails, frames, fixings,

6.9
should be provided to the outer face of the
insulation. fasteners and bonded joints should be in
(e) durability accordance with the design.
Where the insulation is fixed to the backing The rainscreen cladding system should
wall, a minimum of one non-combustible be fabricated and installed with corrosion Anchors, fixings and bracketry should
fixing per square metre or per batt, resistant or adequately protected normally be stainless steel, suitable non-
whichever is the lesser, should be provided materials. ferrous metal or appropriate plastics.
in addition to the other fixings. For mechanically-fixed systems particular
Fixings and bracketry should normally
Installation should ensure that the be stainless steel or suitable non-ferrous attention should be given to:
insulation is continuous around metal. • correct embedment, spacing and edge
penetrations through the rainscreen. distances
The risk of bimetallic corrosion should • correct torque settings
The rainscreen cladding system should be be avoided by the isolation of dissimilar • provision of suitable locking nuts and
installed to minimise the risk of thermal metals. washers
bridging and surface and interstitial • the isolation of dissimilar metals
Aluminium components should be
condensation. • the isolation of aluminium from
separated from direct contact with
cementitious material.
(c) air infiltration cementitious surfaces.
The rainscreen cladding system should be For adhesive-fixed systems particular
The rainscreen cladding system should
fixed to a backing wall that is reasonably attention should be given to:
not include materials liable to infestation
airtight, e.g: • thorough assessment of the backing wall
attack by micro-organisms, fungi, insects
• masonry walls jointed to a high standard to confirm adhesive fixing is suitable
or vermin.
with all joints filled • suitable preparation of the backing wall
• framed walls with a rigid sheathing on (f) testing to receive the adhesive
the cavity face with all joints taped or On-site hose or sparge bar testing should • the provision of supplementary
sealed. be carried out with particular emphasis mechanical fixings as required by the
on interfaces that are designed to be design.
Where reasonable airtightness cannot be
permanently closed and watertight.
achieved, a separate continuous vapour
permeable air barrier with joints taped or The building should remain watertight
WEATHER RESISTANCE
sealed should be provided on the outer during and after the test. 6.9 - S16 Insulated render systems
face of the backing wall. shall be correctly installed to prevent
moisture entering the building
Items to be taken into account include:

2013 Chapter 6.9 Page 11

 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

(a) weathertightness Insulation should be returned into window Where coloured pigments are specified,
Insulated render systems should be and door openings and be continuous batching should be undertaken with care
installed correctly to ensure satisfactory around penetrations through the wall. to ensure colour consistency.
in-service performance.
Insulated render systems should prevent TOLERANCES
water reaching any parts of the wall 6.9 - S17 Installation shall achieve the
that could be adversely affected by the design tolerances
presence of moisture.
Installation should allow for the line,
Where the backing wall is timber or steel level, plumb and plane of the completed
framed a cavity of at least 15mm should insulated render system to be within
be provided between the wall and the reasonable tolerances for the materials
insulation to allow moisture to drain away. involved. See Chapter 1.2 ‘ A consistent
approach to finishes’.
Where the backing wall is timber framed
the cavity should be ventilated in
accordance with Chapter 6.2 ‘External Brick Slip Cladding Systems
timber framed walls’ (Design).
steel frame timber frame
FIXING
6.9 - S18 Brick slip cladding systems
all layers neatly cut
shall be securely fixed in accordance
around flue outlet with the design
Brick slip cladding systems should
(c) air infiltration be securely fixed in accordance with
The backing wall should be reasonably the design and the manufacturer’s
airtight before installation of the insulated recommendations.
render system, e.g.
• masonry walls jointed to a high standard The type, size and positioning of all
with all joints etc filled anchors, fixing rails, frames, fixings,
15mm (min) 15mm (min) drained
• framed walls with a rigid sheathing on fasteners and bonded joints should be in
drained cavity and ventilated cavity
the cavity face with all joints taped and accordance with the design.
Suitable precautions to resist impact sealed. Anchors, fixings and bracketry should
damage should be provided in accordance
(d) reinforcement normally be stainless steel, suitable non-
with the design.
Reinforcement mesh should be provided in ferrous metal or appropriate plastics.
Where required by the design a screen accordance with the design taking account Particular attention should be given to:
should be provided to prevent birds and
6.9

of the following: • correct embedment, spacing and edge

animals entering the cavity through the • laps between sheets of reinforcement distances
ventilation and drainage openings. mesh should be not less than 100mm • correct torque levels
Insulated render systems can be applied • openings, corners, angles, interfaces and • provision of suitable locking nuts and
direct to masonry backing walls without a movement joints should be formed with washers
cavity being provided. appropriate trims • the isolation of dissimilar metals
• additional mesh should normally be • the isolation of aluminium from
Where required by the design, dpcs/dpms provided at points where there is a cementitious material.
should be installed correctly to provide a likelihood of increased stress in the
physical barrier to the passage of moisture. render system, e.g. at the corners of Fixing systems should be accurately
Dpc/dpm arrangements which rely solely window and door openings set out to ensure brick slips suit storey
on sealant should not be used. • movement joints in the backing wall heights, lintels, corners and openings.
should continue through the insulated
To ensure moisture is directed to the
outside, dpc/dpm arrangements should be
render system. WEATHER RESISTANCE
correctly formed with suitable upstands additional reinforcement at points of increased stress
6.9 - S19 Brick slip cladding systems
and stop ends including at the junction shall be correctly installed to prevent
between the insulated render system and moisture entering the building
any other component or system.
Items to be taken into account include:
Guidance on interfaces is provided in (a) weathertightness
Appendix 6.9-A. Brick slip cladding systems should be
installed correctly to ensure satisfactory
Appropriate tapes and sealant should be
in-service performance.
used in accordance with the design and
the manufacturer’s recommendations to The brick slip cladding system should
ensure satisfactory performance. prevent water reaching any parts of the
reinforcement continuous across face of insulation
wall that could be adversely affected by
(b) insulation and condensation
the presence of moisture.
Insulation should be installed in
accordance with the design and the (e) render Where the backing wall is timber or steel
manufacturer’s recommendations, The surface to be rendered should be framed, a cavity of at least 15mm should
ensuring that all parts of the backing wall free from contamination, dust and loose be provided between the wall and the
are adequately insulated. particles. The number and thickness of insulation to allow moisture to drain away.
coats should be in accordance with the
design.

Page 12 Chapter 6.9 2013

 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

Where the backing wall is timber framed,

the cavity should be ventilated in Appendix 6.9-A
accordance with Chapter 6.2 ‘External
timber framed walls’ (Design). Interfaces
steel frame timber frame Interfaces exist:
• between different curtain walling and
cladding systems, and
• between curtain walling and cladding
systems and other elements of the
building.
All interfaces should be carefully designed
and detailed to resist water and wind
penetration. External and internal air and
insulation (carrier) water seals should normally be provided.
neatly cut
around openings
The design should take account of:
• differing profile characteristics
15mm (min) 15mm (min) drained
drained cavity and ventilated cavity • movement
• continuity of insulation, vapour barriers
Suitable precautions to resist impact and breather membranes
damage should be provided in accordance (c) air infiltration
• tolerances and deviation
with the design. The backing wall should be reasonably
• the erection sequence
airtight before installation of the brick slip
A screen should be provided to prevent • planned maintenance.
cladding system, e.g.
birds and animals entering the cavity • masonry walls jointed to a high standard The drawings and specification should
through the ventilation and drainage with all joints etc filled indicate clearly which contractor is
openings. • framed walls with a rigid sheathing on responsible for constructing the interface.
Brick slip cladding systems can be applied the cavity face with all joints taped and
Typical interfaces
direct to masonry backing walls without a sealed.
The following sketches show examples of
cavity being provided. (d) brick slips typical interfaces and illustrate general
Brick slips should be fixed in accordance design principles.
Where required by the design, dpcs/dpms
should be installed correctly to provide a with the design and manufacturer’s
physical barrier to the passage of moisture. recommendations, taking account of internal seal
Dpc/dpm arrangements which rely solely relevant height restrictions. internal dpc/dpm

on sealant should not be used. Excessive cutting of brick slips should be

6.9
To ensure moisture is directed to the avoided. external dpc/dpm

outside, dpc/dpm arrangements should be

correctly formed with suitable upstands
and stop ends including at the junction
between the brick slip cladding system and
any other component or system. insulation (carrier)
positioned to
avoid excess
Guidance on interfaces is provided in cutting of slips
external seal
Appendix 6.9-A.
Appropriate tapes and sealants should be
1. Curtain walling to insulated render
used in accordance with the design and
system
the manufacturer’s recommendations to
Horizontal section
ensure satisfactory performance.

(b) insulation and condensation

Insulation should be installed in (e) joints
accordance with the design and the Proprietary mortars and grouts should be external dpc/dpm
linked to
manufacturer’s recommendations, used in accordance with the design and roofing membrane

ensuring that all parts of the backing wall the manufacturer’s recommendations.
internal
are adequately insulated. Each joint should be adequately filled and dpc/dpm
appropriately struck.
Insulation should be returned into window
and door openings and be continuous
around penetrations through the wall.
TOLERANCES
roofing membrane
6.9 - S20 Installation shall achieve
satisfactory appearance
Installation should allow for the line,
level, plumb and plane of the completed
brick slip cladding system to be within 2. Curtain walling to balcony/terrace
reasonable tolerances for the materials Vertical section
involved. See Chapter 1.2 ‘ A consistent
approach to finishes’.

2013 Chapter 6.9 Page 13

 6.9
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Curtain walling and cladding

internal seal external dpc/dpm linked

to roofing membrane

internal seal
dpc/dpm

roofing
membrane

dpc/dpm

external seal external seal

7. Insulated render system to windows

5. Curtain walling to roof including & doors
3. Curtain walling to conventional brick coping detail Horizontal section
& block wall Vertical section
Horizontal section

external seal

external seal
external
dpc/dpm

internal
dpc/dpm

external seal

external seal
4. Curtain walling to soffit 6. Brick slip cladding to insulated render 8. Penetration of gas flue through
Vertical section system insulated render system on light gauge
Horizontal section steel frame
6.9

Horizontal section

INDEX

A E M
Accessibility for 2 Earth bonding 3, 5 Movement 2, 4, 5, 6,
maintenance Electrical continuity 3, 5 9, 11
Acoustic performance 3, 5 F P
Air infiltration 3, 4, 10, Fire-stops 8 Primary components 2
12, 13 Provision of information 7
Fixings 2, 4, 5, 6, 8
B R
G
Backing wall 1, 4, 5, 6, 7 Reinforcement 6, 12
Gaskets 8, 9
Brackets 2 Replaceable components 2
H
Breather membranes 8 S
Handling and storage 9
Brick slips 7, 13 Sealant 8, 9
I
C Secondary components 2
In-service performance 2, 4, 5, 6
Carriers 7 T
Insulated glass units 3
Cavity barriers 8 Testing 3, 10, 11
Insulated render 1, 5, 11
Certification 2, 3, 5, 6 Tolerances 3, 5, 6, 7, 9,
Insulation 4, 6, 7, 8,
Compartmentation 5, 11 10, 12, 13 11, 12, 13
Condensation 3, 4, 6, 7, Interfaces 13 V
9, 10 Ventilation screens 8
J
D W
Joints 7, 13
Design life 2 Weather resistance 3, 4, 5, 6,
L
Dpcs/dpms 8, 9 9, 10, 11, 12
Loads 2, 4, 5, 6
Durability 3, 5, 6, 7, 11 Weathertightness 9, 10, 11, 12

Page 14 Chapter 6.9 2013

Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Part 6 Superstructure (excluding roofs)

Light steel framed walls and floors

Chapter 6.10
 6.10
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Light steel framed walls and floors

CONTENTS SCOPE

DESIGN Clause Page This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for light steel framed walls
and floors.
Statutory requirements D2 1
Steel and fixings D3 1
Loadbearing walls D4 1
Non-loadbearing walls D5 1
Moisture control and insulation D6 2
Exterior cladding D7 2
Floors D8 2
Services D9 4
Acoustic performance D10 4
Control of fire D11 4
Provision of information D12-D13 4
Certification D14 4

MATERIALS
Material standards M1 4
Steel and fixings M2 4
Damp-proof courses M3 5
Wallties and fixings M4 5
Sheathing M5 5
Breather membranes M6 5
Thermal insulation M7 5
Vapour control layers M8 5
Plasterboard M9 5
6.10

Cavity barriers and fire-stops M10 5

Floor decking M11 5

SITEWORK
Sitework standards S1 6
Construction of loadbearing walls and S2 6
external infillwalls
Insulation S3 7
Breather membranes S4 7
Wallties and fixings S5 7
Vapour control layers S6 7
Cladding S7 7
Construction of non-loadbearing internal S8 8
walls
Separating walls S9 8
Light steel joists S10-S15 8 -10
Separating floors S16 10
Services S17 10
Control of fire S18 10

APPENDIX 6.10-A
Certification procedure 10

INDEX 11

Page 5 Chapter 6.10 2013

 6.10
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Light steel framed walls and floors

(b) compatibility Additional studs may be required at

DESIGN STANDARDS Where two metals are to be joined they openings for fixing ties or supports for the
should be compatible and not cause cladding.
6.10 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical
bimetallic corrosion in that environment.
Requirements Multiple studs should be included to
Alternatively they should be isolated from
support multiple joists unless otherwise
Design that follows the guidance below each other.
specified by the designer.
will be acceptable for external and internal
The choice of fixings should take account
walls, and floors using light steel framing. Lintels should be securely fixed to
of bimetallic corrosion which can occur
supporting studs to ensure that loads are
This Chapter only applies to light steel when two dissimilar metals are in contact.
transferred properly.
framing, typically 0.45 to 3.2mm thick, as
described and illustrated. Construction (c) connections
Where panels are diagonally braced with
should be ‘warm frame’ with sufficient Light steel components should be securely
flat strip it should be fixed to each stud at
insulation outside the steel envelope fixed together by bolting, welding, riveting,
the intersection to minimise the bow in the
to ensure that condensation does not clinching, crimping, screwing or nailing.
bracing member.
fall within the depth of the light steel Connections using these techniques should
members. (d) joints between panels and other
be justified either by design to BS EN
1993-1-3 or an appropriate test acceptable elements
For dwellings that incorporate loadbearing The design should detail how wall panels
light steel framed walls and/or floors, both to NHBC.
are to be securely fixed:
system and project certification will be • to the substructure
required in accordance with Appendix 6.10-A. LOADBEARING WALLS • to adjacent panels
For the purpose of this Chapter, non- 6.10 - D4 Loadbearing walls • to the floor and roof framing.
loadbearing walls are those not designed incorporating light steel members shall Account should be taken of uplift forces
to carry the principal dead and imposed be designed to support and transfer and, where necessary, proper holding down
loads or provide the overall stability for loads to foundations safely and without devices should be provided to resist uplift.
the building. In some circumstances (e.g. undue movement The anchorage for holding down devices
external infill walls) they will carry wind Items to take into account include: should have sufficient mass to resist the
loads. uplift forces.
(a) design
If the light steel framing is of a novel The structural design of loadbearing steel Timber wall plates should be fixed to the
construction, not shown in this Chapter, framed walls should be in accordance with head rail of wall panels onto which timber
NHBC will require assessment in BS EN 1993-1-3. roof trusses bear. The timber wall plate and
accordance with Technical Requirement R3. head rail should be sized to permit single
(b) design loadings
This Chapter does not apply to light steel timber trusses to be positioned at any
The building should be designed to resist
framed external walls used in basements. point between studs.
loadings in accordance with BS EN 1991-

6.10
1-1, BS EN 1991-1-3 and BS EN 1991-1-4 (e) racking
STATUTORY including: Wall panels may provide resistance to
• dead loads
REQUIREMENTS • imposed loads
racking forces using one or more of the
following techniques:
6.10 - D2 Design shall comply with all • wind loads. • internal bracing
relevant statutory requirements • snow loads • crossed flat bracing
Design should be in accordance with • internal sheathing board
(c) structural elements
relevant Building Regulations and other • external lining board
Individual studs should not be less than
statutory requirements. • rigid frame action.
36mm wide, spaced at not more than
600mm centres, unless agreed with NHBC Methods adopted should be justified either
STEEL AND FIXINGS and other support is provided for wall by design to BS EN 1993-1-1 or tested to BS
boards and fixings. EN 594.
6.10 - D3 Steel and fixings shall be
suitable for the design and adequately A lintel should be provided to any opening
protected against corrosion in loadbearing panels where one or more NON-LOADBEARING
Items to be taken into account include:
studs is cut or displaced to form the WALLS
opening. A lintel is not required where an
(a) steel opening falls between studs. 6.10 - D5 Non-loadbearing walls
Steel should be grade S280 or S350 to BS incorporating light steel members shall
EN 10326. Grade S390 steel may be used lintel above window opening
have adequate strength and support
if it has a nominal yield strength of 390N/
mm2 and meets with the concepts of BS Items to take into account include:
EN 10326. (a) construction
The following form of construction is
To provide adequate protection against acceptable:
corrosion due to condensation and the • light steel partitions using studs, head
environment, steel should be pre-galvanised and base rails from sections not smaller
in accordance with BS EN 10326 to provide than 43mm x 32mm x 0.45mm
a minimum zinc coating of 275 g/m2. • stud spacings to suit the thickness of
plasterboard, as follows:
- not more than 450mm spacing for
9.5mm boards
- not more than 600mm spacing for
12.5mm or thicker boards.

2013 Chapter 6.10 Page 1

 6.10
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Light steel framed walls and floors

(b) movement joints Dpcs and trays should be provided at EXTERIOR CLADDING
Non-loadbearing walls should not bridge openings to prevent rain penetration.
movement joints in the main structure. 6.10 - D7 Exterior cladding shall be
(b) membranes compatible with the steel frame
A joint should be constructed between the Breather membranes and other barriers,
frame and any chimney or flue to prevent Items to be taken into account include:
where provided, should be lapped so that
load transfer onto the chimney or flue. each joint is protected and moisture drains (a) wall ties
outwards. Wall ties for masonry claddings should be:
(c) support • of a type which accommodates
Non-loadbearing walls should be supported (c) cavities in external walls differential movement between the light
from the structural floor, not by a floating A clear cavity should be provided to reduce steel frame and the cladding - see clause
floor that incorporates a compressible the risk of rain penetrating to the frame. D7(c) below
layer, unless the floating floor is The following minimum cavity widths, • fixed through to the studs, not the
specifically designed for that purpose. measured between the claddings and sheathing
sheathings, should be provided: • installed at a minimum density of 3.7
Allowance should be made for the possible
ties/m2 e.g. spaced at a maximum
deflection of floors at the head of non-
Cladding Cavity width of 600mm horizontally and 450mm
loadbearing walls to prevent the wall
vertically (see Sitework clause 6.10 - S5)
becoming loadbearing. Masonry 50mm nominal
• spaced at jambs of openings a maximum
Render on backed 25mm nominal of 300mm vertically within 225mm of
lathing the masonry reveal. Additional studs
Vertical tile No vertical cavity may be needed to achieve this
hanging without required when a • inclined away from the light steel
underlay breather membrane is framing.
provided
Other cladding* 15mm nominal (b) masonry claddings
Soft joints should be provided to allow for
* see Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and differential movement. A gap of 1mm per
cladding’ metre of masonry should be provided at
openings and soffits.
The cavity should extend at least 150mm
below the dpc and be kept clear to allow
drainage. Weep holes or other suitable
SUPPORT WHERE WALL IS means of drainage should be provided
PARALLEL AND BETWEEN JOISTS
where necessary to prevent water build up
in the cavity.
6.10

channel fixed to
structure over (d) insulation and interstitial
condensation
head rail should
The BRE Report ‘Thermal insulation:
compressible joint
not be connected
to top track
avoiding risks’ discusses aspects of to be 1.0mm thick
per metre of masonry
insulation relevant to external light to allow for vertical
movement
steel framed walls. In England and Wales
account should be taken of Accredited
Details for Part L.
A vapour control layer should be provided
unless a condensation risk analysis in (c) other claddings
accordance with BS 5250 shows that one For other claddings reference should be
is not necessary. The vapour control layer made to Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and
should be fixed on the warm side of the cladding’ (Design and Sitework).
wall insulation.
SUPPORT WHERE FLOOR OR
BEAM IS ABOVE WALL
The vapour control layer should cover the
FLOORS
external wall including base rails, head 6.10 - D8 Suspended floors shall be
rails, studs, lintels and window reveals. designed to support and transmit loads
MOISTURE CONTROL AND safely to the supporting structure
INSULATION Vapour control layers should be of
without undue deflection
500g polyethylene or vapour control
6.10 - D6 Wall designs shall ensure that plasterboard. Items to be taken into account include:
the structure is adequately protected (a) dead and imposed loads
from the effects of moisture Insulation should continue 150mm below
Floors should be designed to resist loading
the base rail of the steel wall to minimise
Items to be taken into account include: in accordance with BS EN 1991-1-1 including:
thermal bridging.
• dead loads
(a) provision of dpcs and dpms
Insulation with an integral facing on one • imposed loads.
Dpcs should be installed beneath and
for the full width of the lowest section of side only, e.g. a foil facing, should have the
Information concerning balcony loading
framing (e.g. all ground floor walls and facing on the cavity side. The facing should
is given in Chapter 7.1 ‘Flat roofs and
internal partitions) to protect the steel not be used as the vapour control layer.
balconies’ (Design and Sitework).
from corrosion due to moisture. The dpc Service pipes, conduits, etc within walls
should be wide enough to lap with the should be on the warm side of the (b) joist spacing
dpm. insulation. Steel joists should be spaced at centres
not greater than 600mm.

Page 2 Chapter 6.10 2013

 6.10
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Light steel framed walls and floors

(c) deflection each other at the cross-over point and (g) openings
The in-service performance of light create noise Suitably sized trimmers should be provided
steel joists should be controlled by four around floor openings.
serviceability criteria:
(h) notching and holing
Static criteria: The flanges of light steel joists should
i) the maximum deflection for a single joist not be notched except to accommodate
due to imposed load should be limited to connections.
span/450 • solid blocking provided to every third
ii) the maximum deflection for a single joist pair of joists with ties between them Drilling or punching through the web
due to dead and imposed loads should be should only be carried out within
limited to the lesser of span/350 or 15mm. recognised limits (see Sitework clause
6.10-S11).
Dynamic criteria:
iii) the natural frequency of the floor (i) ground floors
should be limited to 8Hz for dead load Light steel joists used in ground floor
plus 0.2 x imposed load. This can be • joists alternately reversed and tied construction should have thermal
achieved by limiting the deflection of a together in pairs insulation positioned to ensure that
single joist to 5mm for the given condensation does not form on the joists.
loading
The junction between the ground floor
iv) the deflection of the floor (i.e. a series
joists and their support should be designed
of joists plus the floor decking) when
to maintain the durability of the floor. Light
subject to a 1kN point load should be
steel floor joists and ring beams in ground
limited to the following values: • joists alternately reversed and floors should be galvanised to 450g/m2.
continuous ties (e.g. resilient bar) fixed Alternatively they can be galvanised to
Span (m) Max. deflection (mm)
to the joist flanges. 275g/m2 with additional protection of a
3.5 1.7
two-coat bitumen based coating to BS
3.8 1.6
1070, BS 3416 or BS 6949, or have a two
4.2 1.5 coat liquid asphaltic composition applied.
4.6 1.4 Ring beams to ground floors should be
5.3 1.3 totally protected and joists protected
6.2 1.2 (f) floor decking for 300mm adjacent to an external wall
The correct thickness of decking should be support or ring beam.
The deflection of a single joist is specified for the joist centres used.
(j) resistance to ground moisture
dependent on the overall floor The thickness should be not less than Provision should be made to prevent
construction and the number of effective

6.10
those shown in this table for normal ground moisture affecting light steel
joists that are deemed to share the applied domestic loads, i.e. an imposed load of floors.
1kN point load. The following table gives 1.5kN/m2.
typical values: This can be achieved by either:
• 50mm concrete or 50mm fine aggregate
Floor configuration Number of effective Floor decking Thickness of decking
[mm] on a polyethylene membrane laid on
joists 50mm sand blinding, or
Joist centres
Joist centres • 100mm concrete.
400mm 600mm
400mm 600mm
Chipboard 18 22 Where necessary, oversite concrete should
Chipboard, plywood 2.5 2.35 be protected against sulfate attack by the
or oriented strand Plywood 15 18/19
use of a polyethylene sheet dpm, not less
board Oriented strand 15 18/19
board
than 1200 gauge (0.3mm) (or 1000 gauge
Built-up acoustic 4 3.5 if assessed in accordance with Technical
floor
Note Requirement R3), properly lapped.
(d) attachment to supporting structure Oriented strand board should be laid with
(k) ventilation of underfloor voids
Light steel joists should be fixed to the stronger axis at right angles to the
A minimum ventilation void of 150mm
supporting walls by web cleats, direct supports. Other decking materials not listed
should be provided below the floor.
attachment to wall studs, or by bearing in the table should comply with Technical
onto the supporting structure. In the latter Requirement R3. The above thicknesses On shrinkable soils where heave could take
configuration, bearing stiffeners may be may not be adequate to achieve a mass place, an allowance for movement should
required. for floor decking of 15 kg/m2 for sound be added to the underfloor ventilation
insulation requirements of floors in England requirement to determine the minimum
(e) prevention of roll & Wales. dimension of the floor void. The allowance
Floors constructed using joists with an for movement relates to the shrinkage
The floor deck is generally used as a
asymmetric web (e.g. of ‘C’ or Sigma potential of the soil as follows:
diaphragm and, to achieve this, floor
profile) can cause the floor to ‘roll’. To • high potential - 150mm
boarding should be attached using self-
avoid this, one of the following alternatives • medium potential - 100mm
drilling, self-tapping screws, ring shank
should be used where the span exceeds • low potential - 50mm.
nails or other approved fixings at 300mm
3.5m for ‘C’ joists or 4.2m for Sigma joists:
maximum centres. T&g joints should be Voids should be ventilated by openings
• a continuous line (or lines) of proprietary
glued. providing not less than either 1500mm2
steel herringbone struts provided
between the joists. The pairs of struts per metre run of external wall or 500mm2
should have a physical gap between per m2 of floor area, whichever gives the
them so that they do not rub against greater opening area.

2013 Chapter 6.10 Page 3

 6.10
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Light steel framed walls and floors

Every part of the void under the floor (c) fire-stops

should be thoroughly ventilated through Fire-stops should be provided in accordance MATERIALS STANDARDS
openings on at least two opposite sides. with relevant Building Regulations.
6.10 - M1 All materials shall:
(a) meet the Technical Requirements
SERVICES PROVISION OF (b) take account of the design
6.10 - D9 Services shall be adequately INFORMATION Materials that comply with the design and
protected from damage the guidance below will be acceptable
6.10 - D12 Designs and specifications
Cutting of service holes on site should be shall be produced in a clearly for external and internal walls, and floors
avoided since badly cut edges can have understandable format and include all using light steel framing.
an adverse affect on the durability of the relevant information
Materials for external and internal walls
frame and may cause damage to pipes
For light steel framed walls and floors, the and floors using light steel framing
and cables.
following information should be available: should comply with all relevant standards,
Grommets should be used around the edge • relevant drawings including those listed below. Where no
of service holes to protect electrical cables • materials specification standard exists, Technical Requirement R3
and reduce the risk of bimetallic corrosion. • fixing schedules applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the
Swagged holes for electric cables and • fixing details Standards and Technical Requirements’).
plastic piping do not require grommets. • manufacturers’ recommendations
relating to proprietary items. References to British Standards and Codes
Service mains and service outlets should of Practice include those made under the
be designed to ensure the fire resistance The information should be in a form Construction Products Directive (89/106/
of walls and floors is not impaired. suitable for the use of site operatives and EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
be available on site before and during European Technical Specifications
In Scotland, services are not permitted construction. approved by a European Committee for
within framed separating walls. Standardisation (CEN).
Assembly instructions should allow for
ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE every structural connection made on site
including fixing details for framing, wall STEEL AND FIXINGS
6.10 - D10 Internal walls and floors shall ties and should show as appropriate: 6.10 - M2 Steel and fixings shall be
be designed to adequately resist the • number and spacing of bolts, screws and suitable for the design and adequately
passage of sound rivets protected against corrosion
Designs should be in accordance with • size and type of each fixing type,
including corrosion protection. Items to be taken into account include:
relevant Building Regulations and other
(a) steel
statutory requirements.
6.10 - D13 All relevant information shall Steel should be grade S280 or S350 to BS
be distributed to appropriate personnel EN 10326. Grade S390 steel may be used
CONTROL OF FIRE
6.10

Ensure that design and specification if it has a nominal yield strength of 390N/
6.10 - D11 Walls and floors shall resist information is issued to site supervisors mm2 and meets the concepts of
the spread of fire and relevant specialist subcontractors and/ BS EN 10326.

All structural elements should have or suppliers. To provide adequate protection against
adequate fire resistance. Where proprietary products are to be corrosion due to condensation and the
used, manufacturers usually have specific environment, the steel should be pre-
Items to be taken into account include: galvanised in accordance with BS EN 10326 to
requirements for fixing and/or assembly
(a) ceilings provide a minimum zinc coating of 275g/m2.
of their products. This information should
Ceilings should provide the necessary fire
also be made available for reference Light steel floor joists and ring beams
protection to floors constructed with light
on site so that work can be carried out in ground floors should be galvanised
steel joists. Either one or two layers of
satisfactorily in accordance with the design to 450g/m2. Alternatively they can be
plasterboard are required and at least one
and specification. galvanised to 275g/m2 with additional
of these should be fire-rated. When two
layers of board are used, joints should be Copies of the assembly instructions should protection of a two-coat bitumen based
staggered between layers. Boards should be given to the person doing the job. coating to BS 1070, BS 3416 or BS 6949,
be attached using self-drilling, self-tapping or have a two coat liquid asphaltic
composition applied. Ring beams to ground
screws. CERTIFICATION floors should be totally protected and
(b) cavity barriers 6.10 - D14 Design of the superstructure joists protected for 300mm adjacent to the
Cavity barriers should be provided shall be checked by an NHBC steel frame support or ring beam.
in accordance with relevant Building certifier
Regulations. (b) compatibility
The specific project details should be Where two metals are to be joined they
Horizontal cavity barriers (except under checked by an NHBC steel frame certifier should be compatible and not cause
eaves) should be protected with a dpc tray. so that a certificate can be issued in bimetallic corrosion in that environment.
The tray should have a minimum upstand accordance with Appendix 6.10-A. The Alternatively the two metals should be
of 100mm. Alternatively polyethylene project certificate should be made isolated from each other.
encased cavity barriers providing a available on site for inspection by NHBC.
minimum upstand of 100mm should be The choice of fixings needs to take account
used. of bimetallic corrosion which can occur
when two dissimilar metals are in contact.

Page 4 Chapter 6.10 2013

 6.10
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Light steel framed walls and floors

(c) connectors Plywood sheathing should be: Minimum 500 gauge polyethylene sheet
The following connectors are acceptable: • of performance characteristics or vapour control plasterboard should be
• zinc plated bolts should be in determined in accordance with BS EN used.
accordance with BS 4190 13986 table 7
Vapour control products manufactured
• countersunk bolts should be in • suitable for in humid conditions to BS
from recycled materials should be
accordance with BS 4933 EN 636
assessed in accordance with Technical
• screws should be in accordance with • at least 5.5mm thick
Requirement R3.
BS 5427 • appropriate to the exposure of the
• rivets should be in accordance with the building.
manufacturer’s recommendations PLASTERBOARD
Oriented strand board should be OSB3 to
• self-piercing rivets should be in 6.10 - M9 Plasterboard shall be of a
BS EN 300 and be at least 8mm thick.
accordance with the manufacturer’s suitable thickness for its intended use
recommendations Proprietary sheathing materials should
• ring shank nails should be in accordance be assessed in accordance with Technical Plasterboard should be to BS 1230.
with BS EN 10263 Requirement R3 and used in accordance Plasterboard thickness should be not less
• welded connections should be in with the assessment. than:
accordance with BS 5135. The welding • 9.5mm for stud spacings up to 450mm
wire should be in accordance with • 12.5mm for stud spacing up to 600mm.
BS 2901.
BREATHER MEMBRANES
To provide fire-resistance, fire-rated boards
6.10 - M6 Breather membranes shall be
Cleats should comply with the should be used and installed in accordance
capable of allowing water vapour from
requirements of BS EN 1993-1-1. with the manufacturer’s instructions.
within the frame to pass out into the
cavity and protect the sheathing and
(d) holding down devices
frame from external moisture CAVITY BARRIERS AND
Holding down devices should be
manufactured from mild steel with zinc Breather membranes should be: FIRE-STOPS
coating to BS 729 or BS 1706 and be • vapour resistant to less than 0.6MNs/g 6.10 - M10 Materials used for cavity
suitable for the environment they will be when calculated from the results of tests barriers and fire-stops shall be capable
exposed to. carried out in accordance with BS 3177 of providing adequate resistance to fire
at 25°C and relative humidity of 75% and smoke
Holding down devices manufactured from
• capable of resisting water penetration
stainless steel to BS EN 10095 will be Materials specified in statutory requirements
• self-extinguishing
suitable in any environment. are acceptable.
• durable
• adequately strong when wet to resist Suitable fire-stopping materials include:
DAMP-PROOF COURSES site damage • mineral wool
6.10 - M3 Materials for damp-proofing • Type 1 to BS 4016 in areas of Very • glass wool

6.10
shall adequately resist the passage of Severe exposure. • cement mortar
moisture • gypsum plaster
Materials which are acceptable for use as THERMAL INSULATION • intumescent mastic or preformed strip
• proprietary sealing systems (particularly
dpcs include: 6.10 - M7 Insulation materials shall be of
those designed for service penetrations)
• polyethylene to BS 6515 a suitable thickness to comply with the
assessed in accordance with Technical
• bitumen to BS 6398 design and statutory requirements Requirement R3 to maintain the fire
• proprietary materials assessed in
Insulation materials should be inert, resistance of the wall.
accordance with Technical Requirement
durable, rot and vermin proof and should
R3.
not be adversely affected by moisture or FLOOR DECKING
vapour.
WALL TIES AND FIXINGS 6.10 - M11 The type and thickness of the
The following materials are acceptable: decking material shall have adequate
6.10 - M4 Wall ties and fixings shall • mineral wool to BS EN 13162 strength and moisture resistance
connect the steel frame to the cladding • FR (flame retardant) grade expanded
in accordance with the design polystyrene to BS EN 13163 The following materials are acceptable:
• FR (flame retardant) grade extruded • moisture-resistant chipboard Type P5 to
For masonry claddings wall ties should
polystyrene to BS EN 13164 BS EN 312
be of austenitic stainless steel, phosphor
• rigid polyurethane foam and • oriented strand board Type OSB3 to BS
bronze or silicon bronze. Materials for wall
polyisocyanurate to BS EN 13165 EN 300
ties should be compatible. Stainless steel,
• phenolic foam to BS EN 13166 • plywood in accordance with BS EN 636.
phosphor bronze and silicon bronze are
compatible with each other. • cellular glass to BS EN 13167. Fixings and supports should be as
Other insulation materials should be recommended by the manufacturer.
For other claddings, ties and fixings should
be assessed in accordance with Technical assessed in accordance with Technical Floor decking materials not covered by
Requirement R3. Requirement R3. a British Standard should be assessed in
accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
SHEATHING VAPOUR CONTROL
6.10 - M5 Sheathing shall be durable LAYERS
and capable of providing structural 6.10 - M8 Vapour control layers shall
resistance to racking restrict the passage of water vapour
Cement bonded particle board sheathing from within the dwelling to the steel
should be in accordance with BS EN 634 frame
and BS EN 13986.

2013 Chapter 6.10 Page 5

 6.10
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Light steel framed walls and floors

The following guidance should be used,

SITEWORK STANDARDS unless the frame manufacturer confirms
otherwise:
6.10 - S1 All sitework shall:
(a) meet the Technical Requirements Gap under Acceptable packing
(b) take account of the design base rail
(c) follow established good practice and less than provide shims under each stud
anchor fixed to studs
10mm position
workmanship
10 - 20mm provide shims under each stud
Sitework that complies with the design position and grout under the
and the guidance below will be acceptable whole length of the base rail with
for external and internal walls, and floors cement:sand mortar
using light steel framing. more than obtain advice from the frame
20mm designer/manufacturer
Information in a form suitable for the - remedial work to the
use of site operatives should be available substructure may be required
on site before and during construction before erection commences
including: Shot-fired fixings should observe a
• relevant drawings minimum edge dimension to prevent
Shims should be of pre-galvanised steel.
• materials specification spalling at edges of masonry or slabs.
Plastic or timber shims are not acceptable.
• fixing schedules When shotfiring into masonry, solid
• fixing details (b) accuracy of walls concrete blocks with a minimum crushing
• manufacturers’ recommendations Wall frames should be checked to ensure strength of 7.3 N/mm2 should be used,
relating to proprietary items. that they are dimensionally accurate positioned to receive fixings.
before erection commences. Where the design incorporates gas
CONSTRUCTION OF All light steel framing should be correctly membranes (methane or radon) fixings
LOADBEARING WALLS AND positioned, square and plumb. The should not puncture them but where this is
verticality of a light steel frame, relative to unavoidable the penetration should
EXTERNAL INFILL WALLS its base should be +/- 5mm per storey. be sealed.
6.10 - S2 Construction of loadbearing
The horizontal position of the base rail (d) alterations
walls and external infill walls shall
should not vary in alignment by more than Steelwork should only be altered with the
ensure adequate stability
5mm in 10m. approval of the designer. Welded or flame cut
Items to be taken into account include: edges should be cleaned before being treated
nominal line of frame line of frame
(a) setting out with a zinc-rich paint to prevent corrosion.
The structure onto which the light steel
frame is to be erected should be correctly max 5mm max 5mm (e) fixing panels
6.10

set out in accordance with the design. The Wall panels should be securely fixed together
loads from the light steel frame should be and to floors in accordance with the design.
supported as detailed in the design. 25x25mm
spacing blocks 20mm 30mm (f) masonry claddings
Soft joints should be provided to allow for
10m differential movement. A gap of 1mm per
metre of wall height should be provided at
openings and soffits.
(c) anchoring the frame
The frame should be anchored to resist
both lateral movement and uplift as
required by the design.

bolt down bracket

compressible joint
chemical anchor at to be 1.0mm thick
overhangs should frame maximum 12mm from 20o from vertical per metre of masonry
not exceed 12mm edge with ledge protected to allow for vertical
movement

The supporting structure may have local

deviations in level along its length and
some packing will be required to achieve (g) supporting claddings
the required tolerances and to provide for Masonry claddings should not be
effective load transfer. supported by the light steel framed walls
unless shown in the design.
Masonry claddings may be tied to the light
steel framed walls with flexible wall ties
fixed through to the studs.
Lightweight claddings should be supported
by the light steel framed walls on battens
or by other suitable means unless shown
otherwise in the design.

Page 6 Chapter 6.10 2013

 6.10
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Light steel framed walls and floors

(h) fixing wallboard INSULATION VAPOUR CONTROL

Plasterboard should be fixed in accordance
with Chapter 8.2 ‘Wall and ceiling finishes’ 6.10 - S3 Insulation shall be correctly LAYERS
(Sitework). installed 6.10 - S6 A vapour control layer shall be
Other wallboards should be fixed in Insulation should cover the whole external correctly installed in accordance with
accordance with the manufacturer’s face of the wall and extend 150mm below the design
recommendations. the bottom rail to maintain a warm frame. Where required by the design a vapour
control layer should be fixed on the warm
Wallboards should be attached to light Insulation boards should be tightly butted.
side of the insulation and frame.
steel studs using self-drilling, self-tapping Joints between boards should be taped
screws at not more than 300mm centres. with a suitable tape where required by the The vapour control layer should be of the
design. material specified in the design. Minimum
Other fixings should be in accordance with
500 gauge polyethylene sheet or vapour
the manufacturer’s recommendations. Foil-faced insulation boards with an
control plasterboard should be used.
integral facing on one side only should be
Particular care should be taken at fixed with the foil face on the cavity side. Where polyethylene sheet is used all joints
the junction between walls and roofs.
in the vapour control layer should have
Reference should be made to Chapter 8.2
‘Wall and ceiling finishes’ (Sitework). BREATHER MEMBRANES at least 100mm laps, located on studs or
noggings. Double sided tape or adhesive
6.10 - S4 Breather membranes shall be
(i) movement between steel frame wall should be used as a temporary fixing
provided where required by the design before the wall board is fixed.
and other elements
Movement joints between light steel Breather membranes should be lapped so
Where vapour control plasterboard is used,
framed walls and other elements should be that each joint is protected and moisture
joints between sheets should be positioned
provided in accordance with the design. drains outwards.
on studs or noggings. When cutting vapour
A joint should be constructed between the Laps should be at least 100mm on control plasterboard, care should be taken
frame and any chimney or flue to prevent horizontal joints and 150mm on vertical not to displace the vapour control material.
load transfer onto the chimney or flue. joints.
Any holes made in the vapour control layer
should be made good and sealed.
(j) cavities WALL TIES AND FIXINGS
A clear cavity should be provided to reduce The vapour control layer should cover the
the risk of rain penetrating to the frame. 6.10 - S5 Wall ties and fixings shall be external wall including base rails, head
The following minimum cavity widths, correctly installed rails, studs, lintels and window reveals.
measured between the claddings and Wall ties should:
sheathings, should be provided. At the base of the wall the vapour control
• be fixed through to the studs
layer should overlap the base rail.
Cladding Cavity width • be inclined away from the light steel

6.10
framing
Masonry 50mm nominal
• be kept clean and free from mortar CLADDING
Render on backed 25mm nominal
droppings. 6.10 - S7 Cladding shall be correctly
lathing
Vertical tile hanging No vertical cavity Wall ties should be spaced as required by installed
without underlay required when a the design but not less than 3.7 ties/ Masonry cladding should be constructed
breather membrane is m2 e.g. spaced at a maximum of 600mm in accordance with Chapter 6.1 ‘External
provided
horizontally and 450mm vertically. At masonry walls’ (Design and Sitework).
Other cladding* 15mm nominal jambs of openings the spacing should be
a maximum of 300mm vertically with ties For other claddings reference should be
* see Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and set within 225mm of the masonry reveal. made to Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and
cladding’ cladding’ (Design and Sitework).
Other fixings should be of the type
The cavity should be extended at least specified, and be fixed in accordance with A clear cavity should be provided between
150mm below the dpc and be kept clear the design. the sheathing and the cladding. The cavity
to allow drainage. Weep holes or other should be drained. Where wall areas are
suitable means of drainage should be divided by cavity barriers, the drainage of
provided where necessary to prevent water the cavity should be maintained or cavity
build up in the cavity. trays and weep holes installed.
Drainage at the base of the cladding
system should be equivalent to 500mm2 /m
run (e.g. for masonry, one open perpend
150mm minimum
every 1.5m).
Openings for drainage should be placed to
prevent the ingress of rain.
The cavity should be kept clean, free of
obstructions and should be capable of
draining freely.

2013 Chapter 6.10 Page 7

 6.10
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Light steel framed walls and floors

CONSTRUCTION OF NON- Non-loadbearing partitions should not be LIGHT STEEL JOISTS

wedged against floor joists, ceiling joists or
LOADBEARING INTERNAL roof trusses. Allowance should be made for 6.10 - S10 Light steel joists shall be
WALLS the floor joists, ceiling joists or roof trusses selected,located and supported as
to deflect so that the partition does not detailed in the design
6.10 - S8 Construction of non- become loadbearing.
loadbearing internal walls shall ensure Items to be taken into account include:
adequate stability (a) protection
Where required by the design ground
Items to be taken into account include: floor joists should be protected by the
(a) setting out and workmanship application of a two-coat bitumen based
Partitioning should be correctly positioned, coating, or have a two-coat liquid asphaltic
square and plumb. composition applied. Ring beams to ground
floors should be totally protected and
joists protected for 300mm adjacent to the
support or ring beam.

(b) joist spacings

Joist spacings should be as shown in the
design.

SUPPORT WHERE WALL IS

(c) joist support cleats
PARALLEL AND BETWEEN JOISTS Joist support cleats should be of the
correct type and fitted in the specified
channel fixed to location with the fixings specified in the
structure over
design.

head rail should

Where joists are fitted directly to light
not be connected
to top track
steel wall studs, pre-drilled holes should be
correctly aligned before making the final
connection.
Studs should be spaced at maximum
Fixing holes should not be enlarged and
450mm or 600mm centres to suit the
additional holes should not be cut without
wall board thickness as required by the
the consent of the designer.
design. Extra studs should be provided at
openings, if required by the design. Where required, web stiffeners should be
properly fitted to ensure good bearing.
6.10

(b) size of steel members

Non-loadbearing partitions should be
constructed in accordance with the design. SUPPORT WHERE FLOOR OR
BEAM IS ABOVE WALL

(c) alterations
Steelwork should only be altered with the Noggings or straps should be provided
approval of the designer. Welded or flame as required to support fittings, such as
cut edges should be cleaned and treated radiators, wall-mounted boilers, sanitary
with a zinc-rich paint to prevent corrosion. fittings, kitchen units, etc.
(d) support and fixings Fixing and finishing of partitions should be
Non-loadbearing partitions should be fixed in accordance with Chapter 8.2 ‘Wall and
in accordance with the design. They should ceiling finishes’ (Sitework).
be fixed to the floor on which they stand,
at the head, to each other and to abutting SEPARATING WALLS
walls. Noggings or extra studs should be
used where shown in the design. 6.10 - S9 Construction of separating floor joists supported on ‘Z‘
section attached to wall frame
walls shall ensure adequate sound
insulation
The design details should be carefully
followed.
There should be no gaps in the:
• mineral wool quilt or batts
• wallboard layers
• fire-stopping.
Services in or adjacent to separating walls
should be installed in accordance with the
design. (See clause 6.10 - S17).

extra stud to support partition

bolted web to web connection

Page 8 Chapter 6.10 2013

 6.10
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Light steel framed walls and floors

(d) joist length and end support span exceeds 3.5m for ‘C’ joists or 4.2m for reinforced service hole
Sigma joists unless otherwise specified in
the design:
• a continuous line (or lines) of proprietary
steel herringbone strutting provided grommet (to all punched holes)
between the joists. The pairs of ties
should have a physical gap between
them so that they do not rub against elongated service hole
each other at the cross-over point and
cause noise

6.10 - S12 Restraint strapping shall be

provided in accordance with the design
• solid blocking provided to every third
floor joists directly supported on wall
frame with stiffener to prevent instability pair of joists with ties between Where external walls, not constructed from
light steel framing, are to be stabilised by
a connection to the floor, straps may be
Joists should be accurately cut to length required. Straps will generally be fixed to
in the factory to ensure a tight fit. The the web of the joist, to suit the masonry
correct type, size and number of fixings courses.
should be as specified at every connection. • joists alternately reversed and tied Where joists run parallel to the wall,
together in pairs straps should be supported on noggings
(e) support of trimmed and trimming
joists fixed between the joists. Straps should
Some end notching of light steel joists be placed at a maximum of 2m apart and
may be required for interconnection carried over three joists. Packing should
of trimming joists. This should be in be provided between the wall and the first
accordance with the design. Notches joist.
• joists alternately reversed and
elsewhere in the span are unacceptable. continuous ties (e.g. resilient bar) fixed Straps should be fixed with suitable bolts,
Welded or flame cut edges should be to the joist flanges. screws or rivets and should bear on the
cleaned and treated with zinc-rich paint to centre of bricks or blocks, not across
prevent corrosion. mortar joints.

6.10 - S13 Overlapping joists shall be

6.10
properly fixed to prevent disruption of
Where joists bear onto steelwork or finishes
are supported by cleats, blocking is not Where joists overlap on loadbearing
unacceptable notch
necessary adjacent to the supports. intermediate walls they should be fixed
(i) alterations together with bolts or screws to prevent
Joists should only be altered with the the floor decking being pushed up or
approval of the designer. Welded or flame the ceiling being cracked when the
cut edges should be cleaned and treated cantilevered part of the joist moves
with a zinc-rich paint to prevent corrosion. upwards.

6.10 - S11 Joists shall be drilled or holes

(f) joist bearings punched within recognised limits
Where light steel joists are supported by
steel joists, cleats or web stiffeners should The flanges of a light steel joist should not
be used in accordance with the design. be notched unless in accordance with the
design.
(g) fixing of multiple joists
Joists may be doubled up to support Drilling or punching through the web
partitions or to form trimmers. Fixings should only be carried out within
should be in accordance with the design recognised limits.
and should be properly installed. Bolted Unstiffened holes through the web should
connections should be tightened to the be carried out within the following limits:
torque given in the design. • a rectangular hole or slot should not overlapping joists
exceed 40% of the overall depth of the
(h) prevention of roll
member. The length of the hole should
Bridging and blocking should be provided
not exceed three times the depth of the 6.10 - S14 Continuous joists shall be
in accordance with the design to prevent
hole reinforced in accordance with the design
roll.
• the diameter of circular holes should not
Where joists are continuous over
Floors constructed with joists with an exceed 60% of the depth of the member
loadbearing intermediate walls, they
asymmetric web (e.g. of ‘C’ or Sigma • unstiffened holes should be at least the
should be reinforced as required by the
profile) can cause the floor to ‘roll’. depth of the member apart and at least
design.
1.5 times the depth from the end of the
To avoid this one of the following member.
alternatives should be provided where the

2013 Chapter 6.10 Page 9

 6.10
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Light steel framed walls and floors

6.10 - S15 Floor decking and ceilings Grommets should be used around the edge • A detailed description of the system
shall be adequately fixed of service holes to protect electrical cables • Details of any limitations of its use
and reduce the risk of bimetallic corrosion • Information for reference by the
Items to be taken into account include:
between the light steel framing and copper designer and steel frame project
(a) decking pipes. certifier.
Flooring should be attached using
self-drilling, self-tapping screws, ring Swaged holes will not require grommets * The manufacturer is the company which
shank nails or other approved fixings in for the passage of electric cables and assembles the steel frame sections to form
accordance with the design at centres not plastic piping. the wall and/or floor panels.
more than 300mm. T&g joints should be
In Scotland services are not permitted If in doubt consult with NHBC Technical.
glued.
within a separating wall cavity.
Stage 2 - Project certification
CONTROL OF FIRE NHBC requires the builder to appoint a
steel frame project certifier to check the
6.10 - S18 Fire spread shall be controlled specific design of the steel framed housing
as detailed in the design on the specific site.
Items to be taken into account include: The steel frame project certifier will ensure
(a) walls that the proposals are in accordance with:
Walls should be constructed in accordance • The manufacturer’s system certificate
with the design and relevant Building issued by SCI, and
Regulations to achieve the necessary fire • NHBC Standards Chapter 6.10 ‘Light
resistance. steel framed walls and floors’.

(b) floors In order to provide confirmation that

channel bearing stiffener Floors should be constructed in both documents have been satisfied for
accordance with the design and relevant a specific project, the steel frame project
Building Regulations to achieve the certifier will need to check supporting
(b) ceilings necessary fire resistance. details and calculations.
Plasterboard should be fixed in accordance
(c) cavity barriers and fire-stops If satisfied that the specific project details
with Chapter 8.2 ‘Wall and ceiling finishes’
Cavity barriers and fire-stops should be are satisfactory, the steel frame project
(Sitework) using self-drilling, self-tapping
installed in positions detailed by the design certifier will issue a ‘project certificate’ to
screws.
and relevant Building Regulations. the builder.
Other ceiling boards should be fixed in
Service penetrations in floors between Project certificates can only be issued
accordance with the manufacturer’s
dwellings should be fire-stopped. There by steel frame certifiers who have been
recommendations.
6.10

should be no holes or gaps for smoke to approved by NHBC*.

penetrate once the fire-stopping has been
SEPARATING FLOORS installed.
The project certificate should be made
available on site for inspection by NHBC.
6.10 - S16 Construction of separating
floors shall ensure adequate sound * Applications to become a steel frame
insulation Appendix 6.10-A certifier should be made to NHBC
Standards & Technical, Davy Avenue,
The floating part of a floor should be
completely separated from the main Certification procedure Knowlhill, Milton Keynes MK5 8FP.
structure and surrounding walls by a This Appendix outlines the two-stage
resilient layer. certification process required by NHBC for
light steel framed housing:
All joints should be glued where boards are
laid loose over insulation without battens. Stage 1 - System certification
NHBC requires manufacturers* of steel
SERVICES frame systems forming loadbearing wall
and floor panels to submit details in the
6.10 - S17 Services shall be adequately
form of a system manual, to the Steel
protected from damage
Construction Institute (SCI), Silwood Park,
Services and service outlets should be Ascot, Berkshire, SL5 7QN for assessment.
installed in accordance with the design.
The system manual must contain all of the
Light steel studs should not be notched information shown in Table 1 (overleaf).
to accommodate services. Holing of Where there are choices (e.g. types of
structural light steel members should only claddings) the manufacturer will need to
be carried out as detailed in the Clause specify which options the SCI is to consider
6.10 - S11 unless approved by the designer. in its assessment.
Welded or flame cut edges should be
cleaned and treated with zinc-rich paint to The SCI will, upon satisfactory completion
prevent corrosion. of the assessment, issue a numbered
‘system certificate’ and approve the
Cutting of service holes on site should be manufacturer’s system manual. The system
avoided since badly cut edges can have certificate issued by the SCI will include
an adverse affect on the durability of the the following information:
frame and may cause damage to pipes and
cables.

Page 10 Chapter 6.10 2013

 6.10
Licensed copy from CIS: [email protected], Silcock Dawson & Partners, 13/02/2013, Uncontrolled Copy.

Light steel framed walls and floors

Table 1 - Information to be contained in the system manual

This table outlines the minimum information that should be provided in the system manual.
The SCI may ask for additional information.

Topic Description
Description of system Key features
Application The use(s) to which the system can be put, e.g. max number of storeys,
type of cladding
Durability Confirmation that design life is at least 60 years
Grade of steel
Corrosion protection
Supplementary protection
Strength and stability Structural design philosophy including Codes of Practice referenced
and test reports
Grade of steel (traceability)
Section properties
Loading
Ultimate Limit State
Serviceability Limit State
Resistance to overturning
Racking resistance
Holding down
Connections
Structural integrity
Positions and sizes of holes through members
Claddings Which claddings are acceptable?
Provision of cavity
Type of wall ties
Behaviour in relation to fire Which internal linings are necessary?
Fire-stops and cavity barriers
Condensation risk Type, thickness and location of insulation material

6.10
Sound insulation Does specification comply with Building Regulations/Robust Details?
Balconies, terraces, and Any specific design considerations
parapets
Other Other information of relevance to the designer and steel frame certifier

INDEX

A G S
Accuracy 6 Ground floors 3 Separating walls 8
Alterations 6, 8, 9 H Services 4, 10
B Holding down 5 Setting out 6, 8
Breather membranes 2, 5, 7 I Sheathing 5
C Insulation 2, 5, 7 Sound insulation 4, 10
Cavities 2, 7 J Steel 1, 4, 8, 9
Cavity barriers and fire-stops 4, 5, 10 Joists 2, 8 System Certification 4, 10
Claddings 2, 6, 7 L T
Compatibility 1, 4 Loadbearing walls 1 Thermal insulation 5
Connections 1 M V
Connectors 5 Moisture control 2 Vapour control layers 5, 7
Control of fire 4, 10 N Ventilation (of voids) 3
D Non-loadbearing walls 1, 8 W
Deflection 3 P Wall ties and fixings 2, 5, 7
Design 1 Plasterboard 5
Dpc and dpm 2, 5 Project certification 4, 10
F R
Fixings 4, 5, 6, 7 Restraint strapping 9
Floor decking 3, 5, 10 Roll 3, 9
Floors 2, 3, 4

2013 Chapter 6.10 Page 11